Hitachi Nji 350B Users Manual HIDIC MICRO EH APPLICATION
NJI-350B micro-EH-MA-NJI350BX-W
NJI-350B to the manual b0c219f7-c5b8-45bc-99ca-fbfc487bf68c
2015-01-24
: Hitachi Hitachi-Nji-350B-Users-Manual-314269 hitachi-nji-350b-users-manual-314269 hitachi pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 319
Download | ![]() |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
HITACHI PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER APPLICATION MANUAL NJI-350B (X) WARNING To ensure that the equipment described by this manual. As well as all equipment connected to and used with it, operate satisfactorily and safely, all applicable local and national codes that apply to installing and operating the equipment must be followed. Since codes can vary geographically and can change with time, it is the user’s responsibility to determine which standard and codes apply, and to comply with them. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND / OR SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL. INSTALL EMERGENCY POWER STOP SWITCH WHICH OPERATES INDEPENDENTLY OF THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER TO PROTECT THE EQUIPMENT AND / OR PERSONNEL IN CASE OF THE CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION. Personnel who are to install and operate the equipment should carefully study this manual and any others referred to by it prior to installation and / or operation of the equipment. Hitachi, Ltd. constantly strives to improve its products, and the equipment and the manual(s) that describe it may be different from those already in your possession. If you have any questions regarding the installation and operation of the equipment, or if more information is desired, contact your local Authorized Distributor or Hitachi, Ltd. IMPORTANT THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES, USES, AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY AND, IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL, MAY CAUSE INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS. AS TEMPORARILY PERMITTED BY REGULATION, IT HAS NOT BEEN TESTED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE LIMITS FOR CLASS A COMPUTING DEVICES PURSUANT TO SUBPART J OF PART 15 OF FCC RULES, WHICH ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST SUCH INTERFERENCE. OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER, AT HIS OWN EXPENSE, WILL BE REQUIRED TO TAKE WHATEVER MEASURES MAY BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE. LIMITED WARRANTY AND IMITATION OF LIABILITY Hitachi, Ltd. (Hitachi) warrants to the original purchaser that the programmable controller (PLC) manufactured by Hitachi is free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. The obligation of Hitachi under this warranty shall be limited to the repair or exchange of any part or parts which may prove defective under normal use and service within eighteen (18) months from the date of manufacture or twelve (12) months from the date of installation by the original purchaser which ever occurs first, such defect to be disclosed to the satisfaction of Hitachi after examination by Hitachi of the allegedly defective part or parts. This warranty in expressly in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied including the warranties of merchantability and fitness for use and of all other obligations or liabilities and Hitachi neither assumes, nor authorizes any other person to assume for Hitachi, any other liability in connection with the sale of this PLC. This warranty shall not apply to this PLC or any part hereof which has been subject to accident, negligence, alteration, abuse, or misuse. Hitachi makes no warranty whatsoever in respect to accessories or parts not supplied by Hitachi. The term "original purchaser", as used in this warranty, shall be deemed to mean that person for whom the PLC in originally installed. In no event, whether as a result of breach of contract, warranty, tort (including negligence) or otherwise, shall Hitachi or its suppliers be liable for any special, consequential, incidental or penal damages Including, but not limited to, loss of profit or revenues, loss of use of the products or any associated equipment, damage to associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute products, facilities, services or replacement power, down time costs, or claims of original purchaser’s customers for such damages. To obtain warranty service, return the product to your distributor, or send it with a description of the problem, proof of purchase, post paid, insured, and in a suitable package to: Quality Assurance Dep. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd. 46-1, Ooaza-Tomioka Nakajo-machi Kitakanbara-gun, Niigata-ken 959-2608 JAPAN Copyright 2000 by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd. All Rights reserved - Printed in Japan The information and/or drawings set forth in this document and all rights in and to inventions disclosed herein and patents which might be granted thereon disclosing or employing and the materials, techniques or apparatus described herein are the exclusive property of Hitachi, Ltd. No copies of the information or drawings shall be made without the prior consent of Hitachi, Ltd. Hitachi, Ltd. provides customer assistance in varied technical areas. Since Hitachi does not posses full access to data concerning all of the uses and applications of customer‘s products, responsibility is assumed by Hitachi neither for customer product design nor for any infringements of patents or rights of others which may result from Hitachi assistance. The specifications and descriptions contained in this manual were accurate at the time they were approved for printing. Since Hitachi, Ltd. Incorporated constantly strives to improve all its products, we reserve the right to make changes to equipment and/or manuals at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation other than as noted in this manual. Hitachi, Ltd. assumes no responsibility for errors that may appear in this manual. As the product works with user program and Hitachi, Ltd. cannot test all combination of user program components, it is assumed that a bug or bugs may happen unintentionally. If it is happened: please inform the fact to Hitachi, Ltd. or its representative. Hitachi will try to find the reason as much as possible and inform the countermeasure when obtained. Nevertheless Hitachi, Ltd. intends to make products with enough reliability, the product has possibility to be damaged at any time. Therefore personnel who are to install and operate the equipment has to prepare with the counter-measure such as power off switch can be operated independently of the controller. Otherwise, it can result in damage to equipment and/or serious injury to personnel. Safety Precautions Read this manual and attached documents thoroughly before installing and operating this unit, and performing maintenance or inspection of this unit in order to use the unit correctly. Be sure to use this unit after acquiring adequate knowledge of the unit, all safety information, and all precautionary information. Also, be sure to deliver this manual to the person in charge of maintenance. Safety caution items are classified as “Danger” and “Caution” in this document. DANGER CAUTION : Cases in which, if handled incorrectly, a dangerous situation may occur, resulting in possible death or severe injury. : Cases in which, if handled incorrectly, a dangerous situation may occur, resulting in possible minor to medium injury to the body, or only mechanical failure. However, depending on the situation, items marked with CAUTION may result in major accidents. Both of these items contain important safety information, so be sure to follow them closely. Icons for prohibited items and required items are shown below: : Indicates a prohibited item (item that cannot be performed). For example, when open flames are prohibited, is shown. : Indicates a required item (item that must be performed). For example, when grounding must be performed, is shown. 1. Installation CAUTION • Use this product in an environment as described in the catalogue and this document. If this product is used in an environment subject to high temperature, high humidity, excessive dust, corrosive gases, vibration or shock, it may result in an electric shock, fire or malfunction. • Installation this product according to the instructions in this manual. If installation is not performed correctly, it may result in falling, malfunction, or an operational error of the unit. • Never allow foreign objects such as wire chips to enter the unit. They may cause a fire, malfunction, or failure. 2. Wiring REQUIRED • Always perform grounding (FE terminal). If grounding is not performed, there is a risk of an electric shock or malfunction. CAUTION • Connect a power supply that meets the rating. If a power supply that does not meet the rating is connected, it may result in a fire. • Any wiring operation should only be performed by a qualified technician. If wiring is performed incorrectly, it may result in a fire, failure, or electric shock. 3. Precautions When Using the Unit DANGER • Never touch the terminals while the power is on. There is a risk of an electric shock. • Configure the emergency stop circuit, interlock circuit and other related circuits external to the programmable controller (referred to as the PLC in this document). Otherwise, a failure in the PLC may damage the equipment or result in a serious accident. Never interlock the unit with the external load via the relay drive power supply of the relay output module. CAUTION • Before performing program change, forced output, run, stop and other operations while the unit is in operation, be sure to check the validity of the applicable operation and safety. An operation error may damage the equipment or result in a serious accident. • Be sure to power on the unit according to the designated power-on sequence. Otherwise, an erroneous operation may damage the equipment or result in a serious accident. 4. Maintenance DANGER • Never connect the and of the battery in reverse. Also, never charge, disassemble, heat, place in fire, or short circuit the battery. There is a risk of an explosion or fire. PROHIBITED • Never disassemble or modify the unit. These actions may result in a fire, malfunction, or failure. CAUTION • Be sure to turn off the power supply before removing or attaching the module/unit. Otherwise, it may result in an electric shock, malfunction, or failure. Revision History No. 1 Description of Revision Appendix-1 Instruction Support Date of Revision Manual Number 2000/11 NJI-350 (X) 2000/12 NJI-350A (X) 2003/10 NJI-350B (X) FUN92 to 96 of H-4010 { -> ×. Appendix-2 Task code H28 Corrected explanation of Timer counter number. 2 Postscript of battery error detection. (3.2 chapters item number 26, 15 chapters (4) ) Correct a description of digital filter . (8.7 chapters) Addition of appendix 3. 3 28 points expansion units added. Analog expansion module added. Circuit diagram added in chapter 3 FUN 5, TRNS/RECV command added in chapter 5. Table of Contents Chapter 1 Features ..................................................................................................................................... 1-1 to 1-2 Chapter 2 System Overview....................................................................................................................... 2-1 to 2-2 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications ............................................................................... 3-1 to 3-14 3.1 3.2 3.3 Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring ....................................................................................................... 4-1 to 4-18 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 Chapter 5 Product lineup .......................................................................................................................... 4-1 10-Point Basic Unit.................................................................................................................. 4-3 14-Point Basic Unit.................................................................................................................. 4-4 23-Point and 28-Point Basic Unit ............................................................................................ 4-5 Expansion Unit......................................................................................................................... 4-6 Terminal Layout and Wiring.................................................................................................... 4-7 Weights and Power Consumption .......................................................................................... 4-16 Exterior Dimensions .............................................................................................................. 4-17 Instruction Specifications ...................................................................................................... 5-1 to 5-146 5.1 5.2 5.3 Chapter 6 General Specifications ............................................................................................................. 3-1 Function Specifications............................................................................................................ 3-2 Performance Specifications...................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3.1 Calculation Specifications ............................................................................................ 3-6 3.3.2 Input Specifications ...................................................................................................... 3-7 3.3.3 Output Specifications.................................................................................................... 3-8 3.3.4 High-Speed Counter Specifications ............................................................................ 3-12 3.3.5 PWM Output/Pulse Train Output Specifications........................................................ 3-12 3.3.6 Analogue Input Specifications .................................................................................... 3-12 3.3.7 Analogue Output Specifications ................................................................................. 3-13 3.3.8 Potentiometer Analogue Input Specifications............................................................. 3-14 3.3.9 Interrupt Input Specifications ..................................................................................... 3-14 3.3.10 Backup ........................................................................................................................ 3-14 3.3.11 Expansion ................................................................................................................... 3-14 3.3.12 Clock Function............................................................................................................ 3-15 3.3.13 Power Supply for Sensor ............................................................................................ 3-16 Instruction Classifications ........................................................................................................ 5-1 List of Instructions ................................................................................................................... 5-2 Instruction Specification Details ............................................................................................ 5-13 I/O Specifications...................................................................................................................... 6-1 to 6-6 6.1 6.2 6.3 I/O Assignment ........................................................................................................................ 6-2 External I/O Numbers .............................................................................................................. 6-3 Internal Output Numbers.......................................................................................................... 6-6 Chapter 7 Programming............................................................................................................................. 7-1 to 7-8 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 Chapter 8 High speed counter, PWM/Pulse train output and Analogue I/O............................................ 8-1 to 8-22 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 Chapter 9 Memory Size and Memory Assignment ................................................................................... 7-1 Programming Devices.............................................................................................................. 7-2 Programming Methods............................................................................................................. 7-3 Program Transfer ..................................................................................................................... 7-7 Input/Output Function.............................................................................................................. 8-1 8.1.1 Initial Setting for Input/Output Function ...................................................................... 8-1 8.1.2 Operation Mode............................................................................................................ 8-2 8.1.3 Input/Output Setting .................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.4 Input/Output Setting (Mode 10) ................................................................................... 8-4 8.1.5 Special Output Operation in CPU STOP Status ........................................................... 8-5 8.1.6 Pulse / PWM Output adjustment................................................................................... 8-5 High-Speed Counter (Single-Phase) ........................................................................................ 8-6 8.2.1 Operation of Single-Phase Counter............................................................................... 8-6 8.2.2 Setting of Single-Phase Counter ................................................................................... 8-8 High-Speed Counter (Two-Phase Counter)............................................................................ 8-10 8.3.1 Operation of the Two-Phase Counters ........................................................................ 8-10 8.3.2 Setting of Two-Phase Counter .................................................................................... 8-13 PWM Output.......................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.4.1 Operation of PWM Output ......................................................................................... 8-15 8.4.2 Setting of PWM Output .............................................................................................. 8-16 Pulse Train Output ................................................................................................................. 8-18 8.5.1 Operation of Pulse Output .......................................................................................... 8-18 8.5.2 Setting of Pulse Output ............................................................................................... 8-19 Interrupt Input ........................................................................................................................ 8-21 Digital Filter........................................................................................................................... 8-21 Potentiometers........................................................................................................................ 8-22 Analogue Input....................................................................................................................... 8-23 Analogue Output .................................................................................................................... 8-23 Analogue Expansion unit ....................................................................................................... 8-24 PLC Operation ........................................................................................................................ 9-1 to 9-12 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 RUN Start ................................................................................................................................ 9-2 9.1.1 Normal Scan ................................................................................................................. 9-3 9.1.2 Periodical Scan ............................................................................................................. 9-5 9.1.3 Interrupt scan ................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.1.4 Relationship of Each Scan Type ................................................................................... 9-8 Online Change in RUN ............................................................................................................ 9-9 Instantaneous Power Failure .................................................................................................. 9-10 Operation Parameter .............................................................................................................. 9-11 Test Operation........................................................................................................................ 9-12 Forced Set/Reset .................................................................................................................... 9-12 Forced Output ........................................................................................................................ 9-12 Chapter 10 PLC Installation, Mounting, Wiring...................................................................................... 10-1 to 10-8 10.1 10.2 Chapter 11 Communication Specifications............................................................................................ 11-1 to 11-10 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 Chapter 12 Port function .......................................................................................................................... 11-1 Port 1...................................................................................................................................... 11-1 Port 2...................................................................................................................................... 11-3 General purpose port (Port 1,2) ............................................................................................. 11-4 Modem Control Function....................................................................................................... 11-5 11.5.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................. 11-5 11.5.2 AT Commands............................................................................................................ 11-5 Connecting to the Ports .......................................................................................................... 11-8 11.6.1 Port 1 .......................................................................................................................... 11-8 11.6.2 Port 2 .......................................................................................................................... 11-9 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs ..................................................................... 12-1 to 12-14 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 Chapter 13 Installation ............................................................................................................................. 10-1 Wiring .................................................................................................................................... 10-3 Error Codes............................................................................................................................ 12-1 Syntax and Assembler Error Codes........................................................................................ 12-3 Operation Error Codes ........................................................................................................... 12-4 Bit Special Internal Output Area............................................................................................ 12-5 Word Special Internal Output Area........................................................................................ 12-9 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 13-1 to 13-16 13.1 13.2 13.3 Error Display and Actions...................................................................................................... 13-1 Checklist when Abnormality Occurred .................................................................................. 13-5 Procedures to Solve Abnormality .......................................................................................... 13-6 Chapter 14 Operation Examples ............................................................................................................ 14-1 to 14-16 Chapter 15 Daily and Periodic Inspections.............................................................................................. 15-1 to 15-2 Appendix 1 H-Series Instruction Support Comparison Chart .................................................................................A-1 Appendix 2 Standards...........................................................................................................................................A-11 MEMO Chapter 1 Features Chapter 1 Features 1. Multifunctional all-in-one type PLC The MICRO-EH is a multifunctional all-in-one type PLC that contains all necessary parts—a power supply and CPU parts as well as I/O units--within one unit. Three sizes of PLCs are available: 10, 14, and 28 points. A type with 23 points plus three points of analog I/O having the same size as the 28-point PLC is also available. Moreover, for PLCs with more than 14 points, it is possible to install additional 14 or 28 point expansion units up to four units. Thus, the MICRO-EH can control a wide range of systems from small to medium size. 2. Simplified positioning by counter inputs and pulse train outputs The function of inputs/outputs can be selected from four modes. By selecting a mode, inputs/outputs that are used as normal inputs/outputs can be set as counter inputs and pulse train outputs. Through a combination of these special inputs/outputs, it is possible to control positioning without using special modules. 3. Simplified instrument system by analog integration For the 23-point PLC, there are two points of analog input and one point of analog output for which both current and voltage can be selected. High performance analog channels, with a resolution of 12 bits and an overall accuracy of ±1 % or less, can be used without requiring special settings of the channels; thus, a simplified instrument system can easily be implemented. 4. Superior upward compatibility The MICRO-EH has been developed as a part of the EH/H series family. Debugging and programming can be performed using the same concept as for the EH/H series. In addition, the MICRO-EH software property can effectively be applied to the EH/H series for future system expansion. 5. Easy maintenance through removable terminal blocks and installation on a DIN rail All models of the MICRO-EH series support the DIN rail so that the PLC can easily be mounted and dismounted. In addition, the I/O section of the 14-point PLC or more utilizes a removable terminal block. Thus, erroneous and faulty wiring that may occur when connecting to external devices can be reduced. 6. Remote maintenance through modem connection Communication with remote sites can be performed via dial-up line by connecting a modem to port 1 on the 14point PLC or more of the MICRO-EH series. It is possible to monitor and manage remote systems from an office or monitor room. 7. Easily adjustable potentiometer The 14-point PLC or more of the MICRO-EH series supports two potentiometers. By using these potentiometers, it is possible to rewrite internal output values in real-time by one driver without using peripheral devices. Since the resolution of the potentiometer is 10 bits, it is possible to set any value from 0 to 3FFH. To obtain stable analog values of the potentiometers, it is possible to sample 1 to 40 analog values of the potentiometers and average them. 8. Maintaining programs without a battery It is possible to retain user programs in case of out-of battery or no battery, since FLASH memory is used as the backup memory for the user programs. However, a battery is necessary for data memory backup. (See the Notes in Chapter 7.1 for a list of precautionary details.) 9. Support for various programming languages The MICRO-EH supports “Pro-H,” the programming software that allows creating programs in five programming languages regulated in IEC1131-3. This means that customers who have learned languages other than Ladder can easily create programs with this programming software. 10. Compliant with overseas specifications as standard All types of MICRO-EH PLCs have obtained the CE mark, C-TICK and UL. Therefore, systems in which these PLCs are installed can be exported without requiring any modification. 1-1 Chapter 1 Features MEMO 1-2 Chapter 2 System Overview Chapter 2 System Overview This chapter describes the system configuration of the MICRO-EH. The MICRO-EH is an all-in-one type programmable controller, and has the following system configuration. 1] Basic unit Figure 2.1 10-point type system configuration diagram 1] Basic unit 2] Expansion unit 3] Expansion cable 2] Expansion unit 3] Expansion cable 2] Expansion unit 3] Expansion cable 3] Expansion cable Figure 2.2 14-point type system configuration diagram 2-1 2] Expansion unit Chapter 2 System Overview [1] Basic unit [2] Expansion unit [3] Expansion cable [2] Expansion unit [3] Expansion cable [2] Expansion unit [3] Expansion cable [2] Expansion unit [3] Expansion cable Figure 2.3 23,28-point type system configuration diagram No restriction for combination of 14,23,28 points, and basic/expansion unit. 14 points basic unit can handle any type of expansion units, and 23/28 points basic unit as well. No. 1] 2] 3] Device name Basic unit Expansion unit Expansion cable Description Calculates, imports inputs, and controls outputs according to the contents of user programs. 14 points digital unit, 4 in/2 out analog unit Cable for connecting the basic unit and expansion unit, or between expansion units. 2-2 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications Chapter 3 3.1 Function and Performance Specifications General Specifications Item Power supply type Power voltage Specification AC 100/110/120 V AC (50/60 Hz), 200/220/240 V AC (50/60 Hz) 85 to 264 V AC wide range DC 24 V DC Power voltage fluctuation 19.2 to 30 V DC range Current consumption Please refer to 4.7, “Weights and Power Consumption.” Allowable momentary power 85 to 100 V AC: For a momentary power 19.2 to 30 V DC: For a momentary power failure of less than 10 ms, failure failure of less than 10 ms, operation continues operation continues 100 to 264 V AC: For a momentary power failure of less than 20 ms, operation continues Operating ambient temp. 0 to 55 °C Storage ambient temp. -10 to 75 °C Operating ambient humidity 5 to 95 % RH (no condensation) Storage ambient humidity 5 to 95 % RH (no condensation) Vibration proof Conforms to JIS C 0911 Noise resistance { Noise voltage 1,500 Vpp Noise pulse width 100 ns, 1 µs (Noise created by the noise simulator is applied across the power supply module's input terminals. This is determined by our measuring method.) { Based on NEMA ICS 3-304 { Static noise: 3,000 V at metal exposed area { Conforms with EN50081-2 and EN50082-2 Supported standards Conforms with UL, CE markings and C-TICK Insulation resistance 20 MΩ or more between the AC external terminal and the protection earth (PE) terminal (based on 500 V DC mega) Dielectric withstand voltage 1,500 V AC for one minute between the AC external terminal and the protection earth (PE) terminal Grounding Class D dedicated grounding (grounded by a power supply module) Environment used No corrosive gases and no excessive dirt Structure Attached on an open wall Cooling Natural air cooling 3-1 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications 3.2 Function Specifications The functions available in the MICRO-EH are described in the table below. No. 1 2 3 4 Item Basic functions Description The following functions can be executed when constructing a system using the PLC. 1] An input signal is received from the control object, operations are performed according to the contents of the program created by the user and the results are output as an output signal. Also, operation results and progress information can be retained in the internal output area. 2] Power is supplied to the main module, system starts to run, and the operation described above is performed continuously until the power is shut down or the system stops running. 3] The information retained internally can be extracted by a device connected externally or can be set in other information. Also, this information is initialized at the time the system starts running, but it can also be retained depending on the user settings. 4] Operating status can be confirmed with the LED display of each unit or with an external device that has been connected. Setting and display The following have been provided for the user to set or confirm various types of operation status: 1] DIP switch (basic unit) This specifies the CPU communication function setting and operation mode, etc. (except for 10-point type) 2] RUN switch (basic unit) It can instruct to run and stop. (external input for 10-point type) 3] LED display (basic unit and expansion unit) Indicates the power system status, operating status and I/O operation status. 4] Communication connector (basic unit) This can connect external devices using RS-232C, RS-485, RS-422. (only the 23-point and 28-point types with RS-485, RS-422) 5] Expansion connector (basic unit and expansion unit) This allows installation of additional input/output. (except for 10-point type) 6] Terminal block (basic unit and expansion unit) This performs the connections for supplying power, and for handling signals with the control object. Number of I/O points The number of points that can be controlled with respect to the control object is as follows: 1] External inputs/outputs The number of points that can be use for external inputs/outputs differs depending on the basic unit. The 10-point type cannot expand the inputs/outputs. For the 14-point, 23-point and 28-point types, a maximum of 4 expansion units can be connected. The I/O numbers for inputs are indicated by X, WX, DX and outputs are indicated by Y, WY, DY. 2] Internal outputs These are areas for temporarily storing information. The I/O numbers include M, WM, DM, R, WR, DR. 3] A timer counter is provided internally. 4] Array (corresponding to a substitution statement only) An array of I/O numbers can be expressed by enclosing by parentheses. User program The program in which the control contents have been described can be stored. This FLASH memory memory resides in the basic unit. 1] The contents of this memory will be maintained even if the power is shut off. Because of this, it is necessary to initialize the memory since it may have undefined after the unit is purchased. 2] Programming is done using peripheral units such as programming software (LADDER EDITOR) for the H-series programmable controllers. 3] The instructions that can be used are those designated by the H-series ladder. See the list of instructions for details. 4] A battery is not required to retain the contents of the user program. Always save the created programs to a floppy disk just in case an unexpected problem occurs. 3-2 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications No. 5 6 7 8 Item Control method Description With the PLC, the user programs are converted in batch at operation startup, and the programs after conversion will be executed in order as they are read one by one. 1] The method used for data I/O is that after the I/O data (information) is scanned (execution from the head of the program to the end), it is updated in group. If refresh of external I/O is required during scanning (refresh method), use the refresh instruction. 2] Apart from the program that will be normally executed, a periodic scan program which interrupts the normal program at a fixed time intervals and is executed, can be created. The time intervals are 10 ms, 20 ms and 40 ms. 3] The user programs are executed from the head of the program to the end, and are once again repeated after performing the system processing that updates the lapsed timer value, refreshes I/O, and performs communication with peripheral units. Run/stop control Running and stopping the PLC is normally performed by the user. 1] Turn on the RUN switch to start operation for the 14-point type or higher. Turn this switch off to stop operation. For the 10-point type, turn on the RUN input terminal to start operation. Turn it off to stop operation. 2] The start and stop operations can be performed with designated external inputs or internal outputs by designating the operation control inputs with a programming unit. 3] Apart from the operation described above, if a malfunction is detected in the system while it is running, operation stops and the outputs are aborted (OFF). 4] If the power is shut off and then turned back on while the system is running, operation starts. When the power shuts off, turn off the power to the PLC, then shut off the external input power. When turning the power back on, turn on the external input power before turning on the power to the PLC. 5] When starting operation, do so after clearing internal information which is not designated for storage during power failure. When stopping operation, leave the internal information as is, turn off the outputs and then stop the operation. 6] When the power has been cut off for longer than the time allowed for the momentary power failure, then depending on the system load status, either operation continues or the system perceives that a power shut off has occurred and restarts operation. To resume operation securely, have the power remain off for 1 minute or longer. Operation parameters Each type of condition for operating the PLC can be set. The possible settings for operation when an error occurs are provided below. 1] Operation may be continued when I/O information does not match. 2] Overload check time can be set. The initial value is 100 ms and the module stops when the time for one scan takes longer than the set overload check time. (overload error) 3] Operation may be continued when an overload error occurs. 4] When a power failure (power shutoff) occurs, the internal output area for retaining information and the timer counter range can be designated. And, the setting below is possible. 1] The name of the user program can be registered. 2] A password can be set up so that the third party cannot reference the program. 3] It is necessary to register the type of I/O module used as an I/O assignment table. In order to create this I/O assignment table, the types of I/O modules that are connected can be read. Change while in A part of a program can be modified during operation. operation 1] If a modification is made with a programming unit and a change is performed while in operation, the user program in the CPU is changed and the altered program is switched internally at the end of scanning, and operation continues with the new program. 2] When a control instruction is included in the modification to the program, make the changes after first performing the control instruction change procedure in the programming unit to check for safety. 3] Until operation starts to continue with the new program, a pause [halt period] occurs when the module does not run. External input information is not being received during this time, so leave a sufficient time for executing a change while in operation. 3-3 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications No. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Item Forced set/reset Description Forced set and forced reset of the designated I/O can be performed from the programming unit connected to the CPU module. Forced output Output can be forced with respect to the designated I/O number from the programming unit connected to the CPU module. For I/O that is not designated, outputs are shut off. 23-point and 28-point types have the calendar clock function. Calendar clock 1] The year, month, date, day of the week, hour, minute and second can be set. function (only for 23- and 28- 2] There is a function for making adjustments in 30-second units. 3] When a battery is not installed, the calendar clock information is not retained when power point types) goes off. The calendar clock must be reset. (The battery is an optional. Purchase separately.) Dedicated port This is a communication port with dedicated protocol for the H-series. The communication command called the task code is defined in the port. 1] A programming unit can be connected. (However, the command language programmer PGM-CHH and the portable graph programmer PGM-GPH cannot be used.) 2] Port 1 and port 2 can be used as dedicated ports. Transmission speed, etc. can be switched using the DIP switch. (Port 2 is supported only by the 23-point and 28-point type models.) General purpose port General purpose port function is supported from software version H0130 (WRF051=H0130) or newer. This function enables serial communication to any standard devices like bar code reader by using TRNS/RECV command in user program. Modem control A modem can be used to connect externally. It becomes operable when data receives from the external media, and task code communication can afterward be performed. Port 1 can be assigned for this function by switching the DIP switch. (The 10-point type is not supported.) Self-diagnosis Self-diagnostic tests for the following items are performed: 1] Microcomputer check 2] System program area check 3] Memory check 4] User program check 5] Internal output area check 6] Mounted I/O check Abnormal handling When a problem occurs, the error code that indicates the error description is output to special internal output WRF000 as a hexadecimal value. Also, errors are notified to the external devices through the OK LED. If the error level is high, the CPU stops operation, but depending on the error, the operation may be continued using the user settings. If multiple errors occur, the error code with higher error severity is set. The detailed information is also set to the special internal output. Also, this information is always recorded in the power failure memory, so the information can be referenced even after the power is cut off. (However, a battery is required.) The clearing of the error information can be conducted by turning on R7EC. Task code By combining individual task codes, the following functions can be achieved by the programs in the host computer: 1] CPU control (RUN/STOP control of CPU, occupy/release, CPU status read, etc.) 2] I/O control (various types of monitoring) 3] Memory write (all clear, batch transfer, etc.) 4] Memory read (reading of programs, etc.) 5] Response (various responses from CPU) Instruction Programming can be performed for various purposes and usage by combining Ladder and the instruction language. High-speed counter The external input of the basic unit can be used as a high-speed counter by specifying it as a counter input. The following can be set. 1] Single-phase counter, 2 channels 2] Single-phase counter, 4 channels (For the 10-point type, it is single-phase, 3 channels.) 3] Two-phase counter 1 channel, single-phase counter 1 channel (For the 10-point type, it is two-phase, 1 channel.) The functions include a count operation (up/down, leading/trailing), coincidence output control, preset by preloaded input, and count value reading by strobe input. 3-4 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications No. 20 Item Interrupt input 21 PWM output 22 Pulse train output 23 Analogue input 24 Analogue output 25 Potentiometer 26 Battery Note: Description The external input of the basic unit can be specified for interrupt input. With the interrupt input, the corresponding interrupt program can be executed. The external output of the basic unit can be specified for pulse width modulated output. In this case, pulses are output at the specified frequency with a duty between 0 and 100 %. A maximum of 4 points, including the pulse array output, can be set. The external output of the basic unit can be specified for pulse output. In this case, pulses are output at the specified frequency with a duty between 30 and 70 %. A maximum of four points, including the pulse output, can be set. The analogue input function is available in the 23-point type and analog exp. unit. The resolution is 12 bits and it can be used by either selecting a current input between 0 and 20 mA or a voltage input between 0 and 10 V. The analogue output function is available in the 23-point type and analog exp. unit. The resolution is 12 bits and it can be used by either selecting a current output between 0 and 20 mA or a voltage output between 0 and 10 V. 14-point, 23-point, and 28-point types have two potentiometers, with which setting values etc. can be changed without using the programming units. A dedicated battery can be installed in the 23-point and 28-point types so that data in the data memory can be maintained even when the power supply to the main unit is shut off. In addition, the data of the calendar clock in the 23-point and 28-poins types can be maintained. The battery is an optional (model EH-MBAT). Please refer to Chapter 15 (4) Life of the battery. There are functions supported by H series that are not supported by this PLC (debug, trace, force, and simulation functions). 3-5 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications 3.3 Performance Specifications 3.3.1 Calculation Specifications The calculation specifications of the PLC are described below. Model Name Type Control CPU specifications Processing system Processing Basic instructions speed Application instructions User program memory Operation Instruction Basic instructions processing language specifications Arithmetic instructions Application instructions Ladder Basic instructions Arithmetic instructions Application instructions External I/O I/O processing system I/O processing Maximum number of specifications points Internal Bit output Word Special Bit Word Bit/word shared Timer Number of points counter Timer set value Counter set value Edge detection Peripheral equipment Program system Peripheral unit Maintenance functions Self-diagnosis *1: *2: 10-point type EH-D10DT EH-D10DTP EH-D10DR 14-point type EH-D14DT EH-D14DTP EH-A14DR EH-D14DR EH-A14AS 23/28-point type EH-D28DT EH-A23DRP EH-D28DTP EH-A23DRT EH-A28DRP EH-D23DRP EH-A28DRT EH-A28DR EH-D28DRP EH-D28DRT EH-D28DR EH-A28AS 32-bit RISC processor Stored program cyclic system 0.9 µs / instruction Several 10 µs / instruction 3 k steps max. (FLASH memory) 39 types such as LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI, ANB, ORB, OUT, MPS, MRD, MPP, etc. 62 types (arithmetic, application, control, FUN command etc.) 39 types, such as 62 types (arithmetic, application, control, FUN command etc.) Refresh processing 10 points 126 points 135 points 140 points 1,984 points (R0 to R7BF) 4,096 words (WR0 to WRFFF) 64 points (R7C0 to R7FF) 512 words (WRF000 to WRF1FF) 16,384 points, 1,024 words (M0 to M3FFF, WM0 to WM3FF) 256 points (TD + CU) *1 0 to 65,535, timer base 0.01 s, 0.1 s, 1 s (0.01s has maximum 64 points *2) 1 to 65,535 times 512 points (DIF0 to DIF511: Decimal) + 512 points (DFN0 to DFN511: Decimal) Instruction language, ladder diagram Programming software (LADDER EDITOR DOS version/Windows® version, Pro-H) Instruction language programmer and form graphic display programmer cannot be used. PLC error (LED display): Microcomputer error, watchdog timer error, memory error, program error, system ROM/RAM error, scan time monitoring, battery voltage low detection, etc. The same numbers cannot be used with the timer counter. Only timers numbered 0 to 63 can use 0.01 s for their timer base. 3-6 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications 3.3.2 Input Specifications The input circuit consists of DC input and AC input, with the following specifications. (1) DC input Specification 24 V DC 0 to 30 V DC Approx. 2.8 kΩ 7.5 mA typical 15 V DC (min) / 4.5 mA (max) 5 V DC (max) / 1.5 mA (max) Basic unit : 0.5 to 20 ms (configurable) Exp. unit : 0.5 ms or less Basic unit : 0.5 to 20 ms (configurable) ON → OFF Exp. unit : 0.5 ms or less See Chapter 4 Number of input points See Chapter 4 Number of common Polarity None Insulation system Photocoupler insulation Input display LED (green) External connection 10-point type: fixed type terminal block 14-, 23-, 28-point types: Removable type screw terminal block (M3) *1: Common terminals are separated each other. Circuit diagram 0 1 C Internal circuit Item Input voltage Allowable input voltage range Input impedance Input current Operating ON voltage voltage OFF voltage Input lag OFF → ON (2) AC input Item Input voltage Allowable input voltage range 3-7 Internal circuit Specification Circuit diagram 100 to 120 V AC 85 to 132 V AC 50 -5 % to 60 +5 % Hz Input impedance Approx. 14.6 kΩ (60 Hz) Approx. 17.6 kΩ (50 Hz) 0 Input current Approx. 7 mA RMS (100 V AC/60 Hz) Operating ON voltage 80 V AC (min.) 4.5 mA 1 voltage OFF voltage 30 V AC (max.) 2 mA 25 ms (max.) *1 Input lag OFF → ON 30 ms (max.) *1 ON → OFF C Number of input points See Chapter 4. Number of common See Chapter 4. Polarity None Insulation system Photocoupler insulation Input display LED (green) External connection 14-, 28-point types: Removable type screw terminal block (M3) *1: Delay by hardware only. Delay by digital filter (software filter) 0.5 to 20 ms is not included. *2: Common terminals are separated each other. Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications 3.3.3 Output Specifications (1) DC output (Y100 of EH-*23DRP/A23DRT/*28DRP/*28DRT) Item Type Specification EH-A23DRT Y100 output specifications EH-*28DRT EH-*28DRP Transistor output Transistor output (sink type) (source type) 24 / 12 / 5 V DC 24 V DC +20 %, -80 % Minimum switching current Leak current Maximum 1 mA 0.1 mA (max) 1 circuit load current Circuit diagram Sink type (23/28DRT) 0 Internal circuit Rated load voltage EH-*23DRP C0 0.75 A 24 V DC 0.5 A 12 V DC 0.25 A 5 V DC 1 common 0.75 A OFF → ON 0.1 ms (max) 24 V DC 0.2 A response time ON → OFF 0.1 ms (max) 24 V DC 0.2 A Output Number of output points 1 None Fuse None External connection External power supply *1 Photocoupler insulation LED (green) Removable type screw terminal block (M3) Not necessary Internal circuit Surge removing circuit Output display V0 1 Number of common Insulation system Source type (23/28DRP) 30 to 16 V DC to V terminal Insulation 1500 V or more (external-internal) 500 V or more (external-external) Output voltage drop 0.3 V DC (max) *1: It is necessary to supply 16 to 30 V DC between the V and C terminals externally for the source type. The sink type operates by load power supply only. See “4.6 Terminal Layout and Wiring” for the details. 3-8 0 C0 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications (2) DC output: LCDC-Low Current (All points of EH-D10DT/DTP, Y102-Y105 of EH-D14DT/DTP, Y102-Y109 of EH-D28DT/DTP, Y*018-Y*021 of EH-D14EDT/D14EDTP) Circuit diagram Item Specification Output specification Rated load voltage 1 mA Leak current 0.1 mA (max) 0.75 A 24 V DC 0.5 A 12 V DC 1 common 3A 0.1 ms (max) 24 V DC 0.2A 0.1 ms (max) 24 V DC 0.2A Number of output points See Chapter 4. Number of common See Chapter 4. Surge removing circuit None Fuse None Insulation system Removable type screw terminal block (M3) 30 to 12 V DC 1500 V or more (external-internal) 500 V or more (external-external) Output voltage drop V0 0 Internal circuit Insulation C0 Source type (EH-D**DTP) LED (green) Externally supplied power *1 0 Photocoupler insulation Output display External connection Internal circuit 1 circuit Output OFF → ON response time ON → OFF *1: V0 24/12 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) Minimum switching current Maximum load current Sink type (EH-D**DT) Transistor output C0 0.3 V DC (max) It is necessary to supply 12 to 30 V DC between the V and C terminals externally. See “4.6 Terminal Layout and Wiring.” (3) DC output: HCDC-High Current (Y100,Y101 of EH-D14DT/DTP, Y100, Y101, Y110, and Y111 of EH-D28DT/DTP, Y*016, Y*017 of EH-D14EDT/D14EDTP) Item Output specification Rated load voltage Minimum switching current Leak current Transistor output V0 1 mA 0.1 mA (max) 1 circuit 1 common Output OFF → ON response time ON → OFF 1A 24 V DC 3A 0.1 ms (max) 24 V DC 0.2A 0.1 ms (max) 24 V DC 0.2A Number of output points See Chapter 4. Number of common See Chapter 4. Surge removing circuit None Fuse None Insulation system Output display Externally supplied power *1 Insulation Output voltage drop Source type (EH-D**DTP) 0 C0 V0 Photocoupler insulation LED (green) Removable type screw terminal block (M3) 30 to 12 V DC 1500 V or more (external-internal) 500 V or more (external-external) Internal circuit External connection *1: Sink type (EH-D**DT) 24/12 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) Internal circuit Maximum load current Circuit diagram Specification 0 C0 0.3 V DC (max) It is necessary to supply 12 to 30 V DC between the V and C terminals externally. See “4.6 Terminal Layout and Wiring.” 3-9 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications (4) DC output (ESCP type): HCDC-High Current (Y100,Y101 of EH-D14DTPS, Y100-Y103 of D28DTPS) Y*016,Y*017 of EH-EDTPS, Y*016-Y*019 of EH-D28EDTPS) Item Output specification Rated load voltage Minimum switching current Leak current Maximum load current 24/12 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) 10 mA 0.1 mA (max) 1 circuit 1A 1 common 3A 0.05 ms (max) 24 V DC 0.2A See Chapter 4. Number of common See Chapter 4. Surge removing circuit None Fuse None Output display V0 0.05 ms (max) 24 V DC 0.2A Number of output points Insulation system Source type (EH-D**DTPS) Internal circuit Output OFF → ON response time ON → OFF 0 Photocoupler insulation C0 LED (green) External connection Externally supplied power *1 Insulation Removable type screw terminal block (M3) 30 to 12 V DC 1500 V or more (external-internal) 500 V or more (external-external) Output voltage drop *1: Circuit diagram Specification Transistor output 0.3 V DC (max) It is necessary to supply 12 to 30 V DC between the V and C terminals externally. See “4.6 Terminal Layout and Wiring.” (5) DC output (ESCP type): LCDC-Low Current (Y102-Y105 of EH-D14DTPS, Y104-Y111 of EH-D28DTPS Y*018-Y*021 of EH-D14EDTPS, Y*020-Y*027 of EH-D28EDTPS) Item Output specification Rated load voltage Minimum switching current Leak current Maximum load current Transistor output 24/12 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) 10 mA 0.1 mA (max) 1 circuit 1 common 0.5 ms (max) 24 V DC 0.2A 0.5 ms (max) 24 V DC 0.2A See Chapter 4. Number of common See Chapter 4. Surge removing circuit None Fuse None Output display External connection Externally supplied power *1 Insulation Output voltage drop V0 3A Number of output points Insulation system Source type (EH-D**DTPS) 0.7 A Photocoupler insulation Internal circuit Output OFF → ON response time ON → OFF *1: Circuit diagram Specification 0 C0 LED (green) Removable type screw terminal block (M3) 30 to 12 V DC 1500 V or more (external-internal) 500 V or more (external-external) 0.3 V DC (max) It is necessary to supply 12 to 30 V DC between the V and C terminals externally. See “4.6 Terminal Layout and Wiring.” 3-10 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications (6) Relay output Specification 5 to 250 V AC, 5 to 30 V DC 1 mA 2 A (24 V DC, 240 V AC) 5A 15 ms (max) 15 ms (max) See Chapter 4. See Chapter 4. None None Relay insulation LED (green) Removable type screw terminal block (M3) Not necessary Circuit diagram 0 1 Internal circuit Item Rated load voltage Minimum switching current Maximum 1 circuit load current 1 common Output OFF → ON response time ON → OFF Number of output points Number of common Surge removing circuit Fuse Insulation system Output display External connection Externally supplied power (for driving the relays) Contact life *1 C 20,000,000 times (mechanical) 200,000 times (electrical: 2 A) Insulation 1500 V or more (external-internal) 500 V or more (external-external) *1: Refer to the Life curve of relay contacts in Chapter 10 for the details. (7) AC output (SSR) Item Output specification Rated voltage Output voltage Internal circuit Specification Circuit diagram Triac output 100/240 V AC 100 –15 % to 240 +10 % V AC 50 –5 % to 60 +5 % Hz Maximum 1 circuit 0.5 A 240 V AC load current 1 common 2A Minimum load current 100 mA Maximum leakage current 1.8 mA 115 V AC(max) 3.5 mA 230 V AC(max) Maximum inrush current 5 A (at 1 cycle or less)/point 10 A (at 1 cycle or less)/common 1 ms or less Maximum Off → On delay time 1 ms + 1/2 cycle or less On → Off Output common See Chapter 4. Polarity See Chapter 4. Insulation system Phototriac insulation Fuse *2 Used Surge removing circuit Sunabar circuit + varistor External connection Removable terminal block Voltage drop 1.5 V RMS (max) Insulation 1500 V or more (external-internal) 500 V or more (external-external) *2: It is necessary to repair the module if the load short-circuits and causes the fuse to melt. Note that the fuse cannot be replaced by users. 3-11 0 1 C Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications 3.3.4 High-Speed Counter Specifications Available input Input voltage Single phase X0, X2, X4, X6 Two phase X0 and X2 in pair 15 V 5V Count pulse width 100 µs Maximum count frequency 10 kHz each channel Count register 16 bits Coincidence output Allowed On/Off-preset Allowed Upper/lower limit setting Not allowed Preload/strobe Allowed Since 10 points type does not have input X6, counter channel is up to 3 ch. 3.3.5 ON OFF PWM Output/Pulse Train Output Specifications 23-point and 28-point type Relay Output Y100 (optional) 5/12/24 V *1: 10/14/28-point Transistor Output Y100-Y103 (optional) 12/24 V Available outputs Load voltage Minimum load current 1 mA PWM max. output frequency *1 2 kHz total channels Pulse train max. output frequency *1 5 kHz total channels Pulse acceleration/deceleration By FUN 151. Relay outputs cannot keep up with high frequencies; these outputs should be used at the operating frequency upon confirmation. 3.3.6 Analogue Input Specifications Module type Input channel Input range Resolution Accuracy Linearity Current input impedance Voltage input impedance Input delay time Channel to internal circuit insulation Channel-to-channel insulation 23 points module WX30, WX31 Analog exp. unit WX u01 - WX u04 (u : unit number) 0-10 V (10.24V max.) 0-10V (10.24V max.) -10 to +10V (±10.24V max.) 0-20 mA (20.48 mA max.) 0-20 mA (20.48 mA max.) 4-20 mA (20.38 mA max.) 12 bits ±1 % of full scale Max. +/-3 units Approx. 249 Ω Approx. 100 kΩ Approx. 200 kΩ 20 ms Not insulated Insulated Not insulated 3-12 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications Circuit diagram (23 points type) Circuit diagram (Analog expansion unit) IN2JP IN4JP IN2+ IN4+ IN2IN1JP IN4IN1JP IN1+ IN1+ Voltage Voltage IN1- 3.3.7 Internal circuit Current Internal circuit Current IN1- Analogue Output Specifications Module type Output channel 23 points type module WY40 Analog exp. unit WY u06, WY u07 (u : unit number) 0-10V (10.24V max.) 0-10V (10.24V max.) 0-20mA (20.48mA max.) 0-20mA (20.48mA max.) 4-20mA (20.38mA max.) 12 bits ±1 % of full scale Output range Resolution Accuracy Current output Allowable load Output allowable capacity Output allowable inductance Voltage output Allowable load Output allowable impedance 10 to 500 Ω Maximum 2000 pF Maximum 1 H Maximum 10 kΩ Maximum 1 µF Circuit diagram (23 points type) Circuit diagram (Analog expansion unit) VO7 Voltage IO7 Internal circuit Internal circuit VO VC IO Voltage Current OC7 VO6 IC IO6 OC6 3-13 Current Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications 3.3.8 Potentiometer Analogue Input Specifications Number of potentiometer inputs Stored in Input range Resolution Input filter 3.3.9 2 Ch.1 : WRF03E, Ch.2 WRF03F 0-1023 (H0-H3FF) 10 bits By user settings Interrupt Input Specifications Input that can be used Input voltage ON OFF X1, X3, X5, X7 (by user settings) 15 V 5V 3.3.10 Backup (1) Battery Data memory (retentive area) can be kept by EH-MBAT battery as below. Battery life time (total power off time) [Hr] * Guaranteed value (Min.) @55°C Actual value (Max.) @25°C 9,000 18,000 * Battery life time has been changed since Oct. 2002 production (MFG NO.02Jxx) due to hardware modification. Battery can be mounted inside of front cover. Battery is available only for 23-point and 28-point types. If the calendar clock function is used with the 23-point or 28-point type, be sure to use the battery. (2) Capacitor 14-point type: Data can be kept for 72 hours (at 25 °C) by the capacitor. 23 and 28-point types: Data can be kept for 24 hours (at 25 °C) by the capacitor. Please note that data memory of 10 point type cannot be retained. 3.3.11 Expansion • • • • • Up to 4 times of expansion units can be installed. 14 points and 28 points digital units, and 4ch. input / 2 ch. output analog expansion units available. A cable with a length of up to 1 m can be used to connect between units. The total extension cable length can be up to 2 m (from the basic unit to the expansion unit at the end). The 10-point type unit cannot be expanded. 3-14 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications 3.3.12 Clock Function 23-point and 28-point types have calendar function. This can be operated either by internal output area or task code. * 10-point and 14-point types do not have this function. (1) Reading the clock data By turning on the read request (R7F8), the clock data is read out in the reading value area (WRF01B to WRF01F). (2) Writing the clock data By turning on the write request (R7F9), the clock data stored in writing value area (WRF01B to WRF01F) is written to the current data area (WRF00B to WRF00F). If the data is wrong, error flag (R7BF) will turn on. If data is right, clock data will be written and writing flag R7FB will turn off. (3) Adjusting the clock data ± 30 seconds By turning on the ± 30 seconds adjustment request (R7FA), one of the following operations is performed depending on the second value: If the second digits are 00 to 29, the second digits are set to 00. If the second digits are 30 to 59, the minute is incremented by 1 and the second digits are set to 00. • • (4) • Special internal output definitions Operation bits I/O number R7F8 R7F9 R7FA R7FB • Description Calendar and clock data is read out to WRF01B-F01F. Calendar and clock data in WRF01B-F01F is written to the current data in WRF00B-F00F. Sets the second digits of the RTC to 00. Turns on when the setting data is abnormal. Current data monitor area : Current data of the clock given always (all BCD data). I/O number WRF00B WRF00C WRF00D WRF00E WRF00F • Name Request to read calendar and clock data Request to write calendar and clock data Clock ± 30 seconds adjustment request Calendar and clock setting data error Name Year Month and date Day of the week Hour and minute Second Description 4-digit year [yyyy] [mmdd] 0 to 6 : Sunday to Saturday [hhmm] (24-hour system). [00ss] Reading/writing area : Clock data to be read or written. (All BCD data) I/O number WRF01B WRF01C WRF01D WRF01E WRF01F Name Year Month and date Day of the week Hour and minute Second Description 4-digit year [yyyy] [mmdd] 0 to 6 : Sunday to Saturday [hhmm] (24-hour system). [00ss] Note 1: The day of the week data is expressed as follows. 0: Sunday, 1: Monday, 2: Tuesday, 3: Wednesday, 4: Thursday, 5: Friday, 6: Saturday 3-15 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications 3.3.13 Power Supply for Sensor The 24 V terminal at the input terminal part can supply current to external equipment (not for all units). If this terminal is used as the power supply for the input part of this unit, the remaining can be used as power supply for the sensors. The following current (I) can be supplied as power supply for the sensors. (1) EH-*14*** (14-point type basic unit) EH-*14E*** (14-point type extension unit) I = 350 mA – (7.5 mA x number of input points that are turned on at the same time) (2) EH-A28DR* (28-point type basic unit) EH-A23DR*** (23-point type basic unit) I = 280 mA – (7.5 mA x number of input points that are turned on at the same time) 3-16 Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring Chapter 4 4.1 Product lineup and wiring Product lineup (1) Basic units Table 4.1 Product lineup list Type Specifications DC power, DC input × 6, Transistor (sink) output × 4 DC power, DC input × 6, Transistor (source) output × 4 DC power, DC input × 6, Relay output × 4 DC power, DC input × 8, Transistor (sink) output × 6 DC power, DC input × 8, Transistor (source) output × 6 AC power, DC input × 8, Relay output × 6 DC power, DC input × 8, Relay output × 6 AC power, AC input × 8, SSR output × 6 DC power, DC input × 13, Relay output × 9, Transistor output (source) × 1, EH-D23DRP Analog input × 2, Analog output × 1 AC power, DC input × 13, Relay output × 9, Transistor output (sink) × 1, EH-A23DRT Analog input × 2, Analog output × 1 AC power, DC input × 13, Relay output × 9, Transistor output (source) × 1, EH-A23DRP Analog input × 2, Analog output × 1 EH-D28DT DC power, DC input × 16, Transistor (sink) output × 12 EH-D28DTP DC power, DC input × 16, Transistor (source) output × 12 EH-D28DTPS DC power, DC input × 16, Transistor (source) output (ESCP) × 12 EH-D28DRT DC power, DC input × 16, Relay output × 11, Transistor output (sink) × 1 EH-D28DRP DC power, DC input × 16, Relay output × 11, Transistor output (source) × 1 EH-A28DRT AC power, DC input × 16, Relay output × 11, Transistor output (sink) × 1 EH-A28DRP AC power, DC input × 16, Relay output × 11, Transistor output (source) × 1 EH-A28DR AC power, DC input × 16, Relay output × 12 EH-A28AS AC power, AC input × 16, SSR output × 12 EH-D14EDT Expansion unit, DC power, DC input × 8, Transistor (sink) output × 6 EH-D14EDTP Expansion unit, DC power, DC input × 8, Transistor (source) output × 6 EH-D14EDTPS Expansion unit, DC power, DC input × 8, Transistor (source) output (ESCP) × 6 EH-D14EDR Expansion unit, DC power, DC input × 8, Relay output × 6 EH-A14EDR Expansion unit, AC power, DC input × 8, Relay output × 6 EH-D28EDT Expansion unit, DC power, DC input × 16, Transistor (sink) output × 12 EH-D28EDTPS Expansion unit, DC power, DC input × 16, Transistor (source) output (ESCP) × 12 EH-D28EDR Expansion unit, DC power, DC input × 16, Relay output × 12 EH-A28EDR Expansion unit, AC power, DC input × 16, Relay output × 12 EH-D6EAN Expansion unit, DC power, Analog input × 4, Analog output × 2 EH-A6EAN Expansion unit, AC power, Analog input × 4, Analog output × 2 EH-D10DT EH-D10DTP EH-D10DR EH-D14DT EH-D14DTP EH-A14DR EH-D14DR EH-A14AS I/O assignment symbol X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/ empty16/WX4/WY4 X48/Y32/ empty16/WX4/WY4 X48/Y32/ empty16/WX4/WY4 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 X48/Y32/empty16 B1/1 B1/1 B1/1 B1/1 B1/1 B1/1 B1/1 B1/1 B1/1 FUN 0 FUN 0 Each digit in the type name has the following meaning: EH - D 28 D T P [None]: Sink, T: Sink, P: Source (except in the cases of relay output and SSR output) R: Relay output, T: Transistor (DC) output, S: SSR (AC) output D: DC input, A: AC input [None]: Basic unit, E: Expansion unit 10: 10-point type, 14: 14-point type, 23: 23-point type, 28: 28-point type A: AC power supply type, D: DC power supply type 4-1 Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring (2) Peripheral Units Table 4.2 List of peripheral units Specification Ladder diagram/Instruction language editor LADDER EDITOR (for GPCL) Ladder diagram/Instruction language editor LADDER EDITOR (for PC98 series) with CPU connection cable HL-AT3E Ladder diagram/Instruction language editor LADDER EDITOR (for PC/AT compatible personal computer) HLW-PC3 Ladder diagram/Instruction language editor LADDER EDITOR (for Windows® 95/NT 4.0) HLW-PC3E Ladder diagram/Instruction language editor LADDER EDITOR (for Windows® 95/98/NT 4.0) Pro-H HITACHI H-series PLC Programming Software According to IEC 61131-3 (for Windows® 95/98/NT 4.0) Note: HI-LADDER (attached to the GPCL01H) may also be used. However, HL-GPCL and HI-LADDER cannot be used for the 10-point type. Product Graphic input device support software (3) Form HL-GPCL HL-PC3 Remarks Connection Cables Product Form Cable for connecting basic unit EH-MCB10 and expansion unit EH-MCB05 EH-MCB01 Conversion cable for EH-RS05 connecting peripheral units Peripheral equipment GPCB02H GPCB05H GPCB15H CBPGB LP100 KBADPTH PCCB02H WPCB02H WVCB02H EH-VCB02 Table 4.3 List of connection cables Specification Length: 1 m (basic unit–exp. unit, exp. unit - exp. unit) Length: 0.5 m (basic unit–exp. unit, exp. unit - exp. unit) Length: 0.1 m (basic unit–exp. unit, exp. unit - exp. unit) Length: 0.5 m Remarks Total 2 m Total 2 m Total 2 m * Length: 2 m, between CPU and graphic input unit Length: 5 m, between CPU and graphic input unit Length: 15 m, between CPU and graphic input unit Length: 2 m, between graphic input unit and printer Length: 2 m, between graphic input unit and kanji printer Length: 15 m, between graphic input unit and JIS keyboard Length: 2 m, between CPU and PC98 series ** Length: 2 m, between CPU and PC98 series (25-pin) ** Length: 2 m, between CPU and DOS/V (9-pin) ** Length: 2 m, between CPU (8P modular terminal) and DOS/V (9-pin) *: Required when connecting the MICRO-EH with PC98, IBM PC/AT compatible PC or other system using one of the cables marked with **. (4) Model EH-MBAT Others Usage Remarks Lithium battery 4-2 Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring 4.2 10-Point Basic Unit Name and function of each part Type EH-D10DT, EH-D10DTP, EHD10DR 6] Input terminals 5] RUN input 9] Mounting hole 1] POW LED 2] OK LED 3] RUN LED 4] Serial port 7] Output terminals 8] Power terminal No. Item Explanation of operation 1] 2] 3] 4] POW LED OK LED RUN LED Serial port 1 5] RUN input 6] Input terminals 7] Output terminals 8] Power terminal 9] 10] Mounting hole DIN rail installation clip 10] DIN rail installation clip Detailed explanation Operations are performed according to the contents of the program created by the user. The programming unit connected to the CPU module communication port writes and reads the user programs. Memory is installed inside the CPU module in which the user programs and internal output information are stored. Lighting when the power is supplied. Lighting at normal operation. Lighting at RUN status. Serial port for connecting the peripheral units. Communication speed is fixed as 4800 bps. The communication specification is set to port 1. External input to control the PLC’s RUN/STOP. When 24 V DC is loaded to the RUN terminal and common terminal (C), the PLC is set to the RUN state. Terminals for wiring the external input units. One piece of AWG14 to AWG22 (2.1 to 0.36 mm2) or two pieces of AWG16 to AWG22 (1.3 to 0.36 mm2) per terminal may be wired. Terminals for connecting the external load. The wiring specification is the same as for the input terminals. Terminal for connecting the power supply. The wiring specification is the same as for the input terminals. Used when installing the PLC directly on a board with screws Used when installing the PLC on a DIN rail 4-3 Remarks See Chapter 12. See Chapter 11. See Chapter 10. See Chapter 10. See Chapter 10. See Chapter 10. See Chapter 10. See Chapter 10. Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring 4.3 14-Point Basic Unit Name and function of each part Type 10] Terminal cover EH-*14*** 5] Input terminals 1] POW LED 2] OK LED 3] RUN LED 8] Expansion connector cover 11] Mounting hole 9] DIP SW cover 6] Output terminals 12] DIN rail installation clip 4] Serial port cover 7] Power terminal No. Item Explanation of operation 1] 2] 3] 4] POW LED OK LED RUN LED Serial port cover 5] Input terminals 6] Output terminals 7] Power terminal 8] 9] Expansion cover DIP SW cover 10] 11] 12] Terminal cover Mounting hole DIN rail installation clip Detailed explanation Operations are performed according to the contents of the program created by the user. The programming unit connected to the CPU module communication port writes and reads the user programs. Memory is installed inside the CPU module in which the user programs and internal output information are stored. Lighting when the power is supplied. Lighting at normal operation. Lighting at RUN status. Cover for the connector for connecting STOP RUN peripheral units and the RUN switch. When the cover is opened, the RUN switch, VR1 VR2 potentiometers (VR), and RS-232C serial port 1 (PORT 1) can be used. PORT1 The communication specification is set to port 1. Terminals for wiring the external input units. Recommended terminals are shown in the 6 figure to the right. One piece of AWG14 to AWG22 (2.1 to 6 0.36 mm2) or two pieces of AWG16 to AWG22 (1.3 to 0.36 mm2) per terminal may be wired. Terminals for connecting the external load. The wiring specification is the same as for the input terminals. Terminal for connecting the power supply. The wiring specification is the same as for the input terminals. Cover for the expansion connector Cover for the DIP switches When the cover is opened, the DIP switches are exposed. These DIP switches are used to set the communication speed of serial port 1 and the modem connection. Cover for terminals Used when installing the PLC with screws Used when installing the PLC on a DIN rail 4-4 Remarks See Chapter 12. See Chapters 8 and 11. See Chapter 10. (Make sure that the terminals will not disengage due to loose screws.) (Recommended) See Chapter 10. See Chapter 10. See Chapter 10. See Chapter 11. See Chapter 10. See Chapter 10. Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring 4.4 23-Point and 28-Point Basic Unit Name and function of each part Type 10] Terminal cover EH-*23*** EH-*28*** 5] Input terminals 13] RS-485 port cover 1] POW LED 2] OK LED 3] RUN LED 11] Mounting hole 8] Expansion connector cover 9] DIP SW cover 4] Serial port cover 6] Output terminals 12] DIN rail installation clip 7] Power terminal No. Item Explanation of operation 1] 2] 3] 4] POW LED OK LED RUN LED Serial port cover 5] Input terminals Detailed explanation Operations are performed according to the contents of the program created by the user. The programming unit connected to the CPU module communication port writes and reads the user programs. Memory is installed inside the CPU module in which the user programs and internal output information are stored. Lighting when the power is supplied. Lighting at normal operation. Lighting at RUN status. Cover for the connector for connecting STOP RUN peripheral units and the RUN switch. When the cover is opened, the RUN switch, VR1 VR2 potentiometers (VR), and RS-232C serial port 1 (PORT 1) can be used. PORT1 The communication specification is set to port 1. Terminals for wiring the external input units. Recommended terminals are shown in the figure 6 to the right. One piece of AWG14 to AWG22 (2.1 to 0.36 mm2) or two pieces of AWG16 to AWG22 (1.3 6 to 0.36 mm2) per terminal may be wired. Terminals for connecting the external load. The wiring specification is the same as for the input terminals. Terminal for connecting the power supply. The wiring specification is the same as for the input terminals. Cover for the expansion connector Cover for the DIP switches and the backup battery storage unit. When the cover is opened, the DIP switches are exposed. These DIP switches are used to set the communication speed of serial port 1 and the modem connection. Cover for terminals Used when installing the PLC with screws Used when installing the PLC on a DIN rail 6] Output terminals 7] Power terminal 8] 9] Expansion cover DIP SW cover 10] 11] 12] Terminal cover Mounting hole DIN rail installation clip RS-485 port cover Cover for RS-485 port. It is connected with a D sub 15-pin female connector. The communication specification is set to port 2. 13] 4-5 Remarks See Chapter 12. See Chapters 8 and 11. See Chapter 10. (Make sure that the terminals will not disengage due to loose screws.) (Recommended) See Chapter 10. See Chapter 10. See Chapter 10. See Chapter 11. See Chapter 10. See Chapter 10. See Chapter 11. Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring 4.5 Expansion Unit Name and function of each part Type 9] Terminal cover EH-*14ED** (same dimension as 14 pts. basic unit) EH-*28ED** (same dimension as 28 pts. basic unit) EH-*6EAN (same dimension as 14 pts. basic unit) 4] Input terminals 1] POW LED 2] OK LED 10] Mounting hole 7] Expansion connector cover (right side) 8] Dummy cover 3] Expansion connector cover (left side) 5] Output terminals 11] DIN rail installation clip 6] Power terminal No. Item Explanation of operation 1] 2] 3] 4] POW LED OK LED Expansion cover (Left side) Input terminals 5] Output terminals 6] Power terminal 7] Expansion cover (Right side) Dummy cover Terminal cover Mounting hole DIN rail installation clip 8] 9] 10] 11] Above picture is 14 points module Detailed explanation Remarks Operations are performed according to the contents of the program created by the user. The programming unit connected to the CPU module communication port writes and reads the user program. Memory is installed inside the CPU module in which the user program and internal output information are stored. Lighting when the power is supplied. Lighting at normal operation. Cover for expansion connector See Chapter 10. Used when connecting to the expansion cable from the front unit. See Chapter 10. Terminals for wiring the external input units. Recommended terminals are shown in the figure (Make sure that the terminals will not 6 disengage due to loose screws.) to the right. One piece of AWG14 to AWG22 (2.1 to 0.36 (Recommended) 6 mm2) or two pieces of AWG16 to AWG22 (1.3 to 0.36 mm2) per terminal may be wired. Terminals for connecting the external load. The wiring specification is the See Chapter 10. same as for the input terminals. Terminal for connecting the power supply. The wiring specification is the See Chapter 10. same as for the input terminals. Cover for expansion connector See Chapter 10. Used when connecting to the next unit. Cover used as a dummy. Cover for terminals Used when installing the PLC with screws See Chapter 10. Used when installing the PLC on a DIN rail See Chapter 10. 4-6 Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring 4.6 Terminal Layout and Wiring 10-point type EH-D10DT, EH-D10DTP * Since the DC input is bidirectional, it is possible to reverse the polarity of the power supply. Input power supply 24 V DC RUN NC 0 1 2 3 C0 4 5 In case of EH-D10DTP 24 V 0V 0 1 2 3 C0 V0 In case of EH-D10DT Power supply 24V DC Load power supply 12/24V DC EH-D10DR * Since the DC input is bidirectional, it is possible to reverse the polarity of the power supply. Input power supply 24V DC RUN NC 24V 0V 0 1 2 3 C0 4 5 NC 0 1 2 3 C0 Load power supply 24V DC 100-240V AC Power supply 24V DC 4-7 Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring 14-point type EH-A14DR, EH-D14DR * Since the DC input is bidirectional, it is possible to reverse the polarity of the power supply. Input power supply 24V DC 24+ 0V 1 0 AC 3 2 0 AC 4 C0 1 C0 6 5 2 C1 C1 Input 7 4 3 C2 Output 5 Load power supply 24V DC, 100-240V AC AC power supply 100-240V AC 0V 24V DC power supply 24V DC EH-A14EDR, EH-D14EDR * Since the DC input is bidirectional, it is possible to reverse the polarity of the power supply. Input power supply 24V DC 24+ 0V 1 0 AC AC 3 2 16 4 C0 17 C0 6 5 18 C1 C1 7 20 19 Input C2 21 Output Load power supply 24V DC, 100-240V AC AC power supply 100-240V AC 0V 24V DC power supply 24V DC 4-8 Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring EH-A14AS Power supply for input 100-115V AC 24+ 0V 1 0 AC 3 2 NC AC 4 C0 1 0 6 5 2 C0 Input C1 7 4 3 C1 Output 5 Load power supply 100-240V AC Power supply 100-240V AC EH-D14DTP * Since the DC input is bidirectional, it is possible to reverse the polarity of the power supply. Power supply for input 24V DC 24+ 0V 1 0 0V 3 2 0 24V 4 C0 NC 1 6 5 3 2 C1 Input 7 5 4 C0 V0 Output Load power supply 12/24V DC Power supply 24V DC EH-D14DT (The input wiring is the same as EH-D14DTP.) 0V 24V 0 NC 1 3 2 Power supply 24V DC 5 4 C0 V0 Output Load power supply 12/24V DC 4-9 Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring EH-D14EDTP * Since the DC input is bidirectional, it is possible to reverse the polarity of the power supply. 24+ 0V 1 0 0V 3 2 16 24V 4 C0 NC 17 6 5 19 18 C1 Input 7 21 20 C0 Output V0 Power supply 24V DC Load power supply 12/24V DC EH-D14EDT (The input wiring is the same as EH-D14EDTP.) 0V 24V 16 NC 17 19 18 21 20 C0 V0 Output Load power supply 12/24V DC Power supply 24V DC 4-10 Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring 23-point type EH-A23DRP * Since the DC input is bidirectional, it is possible to reverse the polarity of the power supply. Power supply for input, 24V DC 24+ 1 0V 3 0 2 AC 0 AC 4 C0 V0 C0 6 5 2 1 10 C2 7 4 3 8 C1 5 9 6 C1 12 11 7 C2 C3 IN1+ IN1- 8 C4 IN2- 9 Input IN2+ IN1JP C5 IN2JP IO IC VO VC Output + Power supply 100-240V AC Load power supply 24V DC, 100-240V AC TR output power supply 16-30V DC EH-A23DRT (The input wiring is the same as EH-A23DRP.) AC 0 AC NC C0 1 Power supply 100-240V AC EH-D23DRP 0V Output 24V TR output power supply 16-30V DC Analog voltage input IN1+ IN1- 2 IN2- IN1JP IN2JP IN2+ IN1+ 0 V0 C0 2 1 Output TR output power supply 16-30V DC Analog current input IN1- Analog output IN2- IN1JP IN2JP IN2+ 4-11 In case of analog current input, please set the following value in WRF06E. WRF06E ch-0 ch-1 H0000 Voltage Voltage H4000 Voltage Current H8000 Current Voltage HC000 Current Current Please refer to Chapter 8-9. Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring 28-point type EH-A28DRP * Since the DC input is bidirectional, it is possible to reverse the polarity of the power supply. Power supply for input 24V DC 24+ 0V 1 0 AC 3 4 2 0 C0 V0 5 2 C0 AC 1 Power supply 100-240V AC 6 8 7 4 3 9 C1 5 C1 C2 AC NC C0 2 Output 1 Power supply 100-240V AC EH-D28DRP (The input wiring is the same as EH-A28DRP.) 0V 0 24V V0 C0 Power supply 24V DC 2 1 Output TR output power supply 16-30V DC EH-D28DRT (The input wiring is the same as EH-A28DRP.) 0V 24V 0 NC C0 2 1 C2 C2 7 C3 13 12 8 C4 15 14 9 C5 C3 11 10 Input C3 C6 C6 Output Load power supply 24V DC, 100-240V AC TR output power supply 16-30V DC 0 10 6 EH-A28DRT (The input wiring is the same as EH-A28DRP.) AC 11 Output Power supply 24V DC 4-12 Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring EH-A28AS Power supply for input 100-115V AC NC NC 1 0 AC 3 2 NC C0 1 0 AC 4 6 5 2 C0 C1 C2 7 4 3 C2 C1 5 9 8 NC NC 11 C3 10 C2 C2 C3 7 12 C3 6 C3 Power supply 100-240V AC 13 15 Input 14 9 8 11 Output 10 Load power supply 100-240V AC EH-D28DTP * Since the DC input is bidirectional, it is possible to reverse the polarity of the power supply. Power supply for input, 24V DC 24+ 0V 1 0 0V 3 2 0 C0 NC 1 24V 4 6 5 3 2 9 C1 8 7 5 4 C0 V0 11 10 C1 NC C2 C2 V1 C1 13 12 6 V1 14 8 7 Power supply 24V DC 15 C3 Input C3 NC 9 11 Output 10 Load power supply 12/24V DC EH-D28DT (The input wiring is the same as EH-D28DTP.) 0V 24V 0 NC 1 3 2 5 4 C0 V0 C1 NC Power supply 24V DC V1 C1 6 V1 8 7 NC 9 11 10 Load power supply 12/24V DC 4-13 Output Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring EH-A28DR * Since the DC input is bidirectional, it is possible to reverse the polarity of the power supply. Power supply for input 24V DC 24+ 0V 1 0 AC 3 2 0 C0 NC C0 AC 4 6 5 2 1 9 C1 8 7 4 3 5 11 10 6 C1 C2 C2 C2 7 C3 13 12 8 C4 15 14 9 C5 11 10 Power supply 100-240V AC Input C3 C3 C6 Output C6 Load power supply 24V DC, 100-240V AC EH-A28EDR * Since the DC input is bidirectional, it is possible to reverse the polarity of the power supply. Power supply for input 24V DC 24+ 0V 1 0 AC 3 2 16 C0 NC C0 AC 4 6 5 18 17 8 7 20 19 9 C1 21 11 10 22 C1 C2 C2 C2 23 C3 13 12 24 C4 14 25 C5 Power supply 100-240V AC C3 27 26 C6 C6 EH-D28EDR 0V Input C3 Output Load power supply 24V DC, 100-240V AC EH-D28DR 24V 15 0 NC C0 2 1 0V 24V 4-14 16 NC C0 18 17 Output Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring Analog expansion unit EH-A6EAN (Example of voltage input and voltage output) Voltage input × 4 IN1+ IN1- IN2- IN1JP AC IN2JP IN2+ NC AC IN3+ IN3IO6 OC6 IN4- IN3JP OC7 VO6 IN4JP IN4+ VO7 IO7 Input and output can be configured as voltage or current independently. NC NC Voltage output × 2 _ _ + Power supply 100-240V AC + EH-D6EAN (Example of current input and current output) Current input × 4 IN1+ IN1- IN2- IN1JP 0V 24V IN2JP IN2+ NC IO6 OC6 IN3+ IN3- IN4- IN3JP OC7 VO6 IN4JP IN4+ VO7 IO7 Input and output can be configured as voltage or current independently. NC NC Current output × 2 Power supply 24V DC 4-15 Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring 4.7 Weights and Power Consumption Type Weight (g) 100V AC Normal Rush - - Power consumption (A) 264V AC 24V DC Normal Rush Normal Rush EH-D10DT/DTP/DR 200 - - 0.12 0.6 EH-D14DT/DTP/DTPS 300 - - EH-A14DR 400 0.1 15 - - 0.16 0.6 0.06 40 - - EH-D14DR 300 - - - - 0.16 0.6 EH-A14AS 380 0.1 15 0.06 40 - - EH-A23DRP/DRT 600 0.2 15 0.06 40 - - EH-D23DRP 500 - - - - 0.2 0.6 0.6 EH-D28DT/DTP/DTPS 500 - - - - 0.2 EH-A28DRP/DRT 600 0.1 15 0.06 40 - - EH-A28DR 600 0.2 15 0.06 40 - - EH-D28DRP/DRT 500 - - - - 0.3 0.6 EH-D28DR 500 - - - - 0.3 0.6 EH-A28AS 600 0.2 15 0.06 40 - - EH-D14EDT/EDTP/EDTPS 300 - - - - 0.16 0.6 EH-A14EDR 400 0.1 15 0.06 40 - - EH-D14EDR 300 - - - - 0.16 0.6 EH-D28EDT/EDTPS 500 - - - - 0.2 0.6 EH-A28EDR 600 0.2 15 0.06 40 - - EH-D28EDR 500 - - - - 0.3 0.6 EH-A6EAN 400 0.1 15 0.06 40 - - - 0.16 0.6 EH-D6EAN 300 - - - 4-16 Remarks Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring 4.8 Exterior Dimensions (1) 10-point type (Unit : mm) 70 80 4.4 65 8 47 75 (2) 14-point type, 14-point expansion unit, Analog expansion unit 80 90 4.8 85 76 95 8.4 (3) 23-point, 28-point types and 28-point expansion 80 90 4.8 140 76 150 4-17 8.4 Chapter 4 Product lineup and wiring MEMO 4-18 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Chapter 5 5.1 Instruction Specifications Instruction Classifications The instructions used with the MICRO-EH are classified as shown in the following table. Table 5.1 Instruction classification table Instruction classification Description Basic instructions Sequence Timer/counter Relational box Arithmetic instructions Substitution (array variable) Mathematical operations Logical operations Relational expression Application instructions Bit operation Shift/rotate Transfer Negation/Two's complement/Sign Conversion Application: BCU, SWAP, UNIT, DIST Control instructions END, JMP, CAL, FOR, NEXT, RTS, RTI, LBL, SB, INT, CEND, CJMP Transfer instructions TRNS 0, RECV 0 FUN instructions Refresh, high-speed counter, PMW, pulse, comments No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 5.2 Type 21 6 8 1 10 3 8 3 8 3 3 4 4 12 2 18 List of Instructions [Legend] Condition codes DER ERR SD V C z 1] ↕ Processing time Data error (special internal output R7F4) Set to “1” as a data error when the I/O number is exceeded or when the BCD was abnormal data, etc. When there is no data error, it is set to “0.” Error (special internal output R7F3) Set to “1” when an error is generated when a control instruction and a special instruction are executed. The error code is set in WRF015. When there are no errors, the previous status is maintained. Shift data (special internal output R7F2) Performs shift-in of the contents of SD by the SHR or SHL instruction. Over flow (special internal output R7F1) Indicates that a digit overflow has occurred and the signed data range is exceeded as a result of signed data operations. Carry (special internal output R7F0) Indicates the contents of digit increase due to addition, digit decrease due to subtraction, and shift-out due to shifting. Maintains the previous status. Set to “1” when there is an error in operation results. The previous status is maintained if there is no error. Changes according to the operation result. This indicates the instruction processing time. The displayed value is an average. It varies depending on the parameter and data count with the instructions used. See the details on the instruction specifications for details. 5-1 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications The following lists the instructions. 1 Logical Indicates the operation start commencement of acontact operation. LDI Logical Indicates the negation commencement of boperation start contact operation. AND Logical AND Indicates a-contact series connection. 3 4 ANI Logical NAND Indicates b-contact series connection. 5 OR Indicates a-contact parallel connection. 6 ORI Logical NOR Indicates b-contact parallel connection. 7 NOT Logical NOT 8 9 Logical OR 0.9 Steps R7F0 MICRO-EH 1 0.8 2 z z z z z 0.8 2 z z z z z 1.0 3 Number 4 overlap not allowed z z z z z 1.2 3 Number 4 overlap not allowed z z z z z Indicates an output coil. X, Y R0 to R7BF M0 to M3FFF TD, SS, CU, CTU, CTD, CL Timer: 0 to 255 Counter: 0 to 255 z z z z z Indicates set output. X, Y R0 to R7BF M0 to M3FFF 1.0 1 0.9 1 Reverses all operation results up to that point. None OR DIF DFN AND Trailing edge DFN detection DFN OR DFN SET I/O set C 0.9 DIF 11 V Remarks z z z z z AND Leading edge Indicates detection of the DIF0 to DIF511 DIF detection input rise. (Decimal) OUT I/O output Process time (µs) z z z z z X, Y R0 to R7BF M0 to M3FFF TD, SS, CU, CT Timer: 0 to 255 Counter: 0 to 255 DIF0 to DIF511 DFN0 to DFN511 DIF 10 R7F1 DER ERR SD LD 2 I/O types used R7F2 Process descriptions R7F3 Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Basic instructions (sequence instructions) Sequence instructions Classification Item number 1. Indicates detection of the DFN0 to input fall. DFN511 (Decimal) SET 12 RES I/O reset Indicates reset output. MCS Set master control Indicates master control set operation. MCS0 to MCS49 z z z z z 0.7 3 Number overlap allowed MCR Reset master control Indicates master control reset operation. MCR0 to MCR49 z z z z z 0.7 2 Number overlap allowed RES 13 MCS 14 MCR 5-2 MPS Operation Stores the previous result push operation result. 16 MRD MRD Operation result read 17 MPP None Reads the stored operation result and continues operation. MPP Operation Reads the stored operation result pull result, continues operation and clears the stored result. ANB Logical Indicates serial connection None block serial between two logical blocks. connection 21 Indicates parallel connection between two logical blocks. R7F0 V C MICRO-EH Steps R7F1 R7F2 Process time (µ s) z z z z z — 0 z z z z z — 0 0.7 1 None Indicates start and end of a None process box. z z z z z 0.6 3 Indicates start and end of a None comparison box. z z z z z 0.8 0 Steps ORB Logical block parallel connection [ ] Processing box start and end ( ) Relational box start and end 20 R7F3 I/O types used DER ERR SD MPS 19 Remarks TD 23 SS 24 CU 25 CTU 26 CTD 27 CL R7F0 DER ERR SD R7F1 I/O types used R7F2 Process descriptions R7F3 Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Timer Classification Item number Basic instructions (timer, counter) 22 Counter Process descriptions 15 18 2. Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Sequence instructions Classification Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Process time (µ s) V C MICRO-EH z z z z z Indicates an on delay timer TD0 to TD255 operation. When 0.01 s, it is possible to use until 0 to 63. z z z z z OUT Single shot Indicates a single shot SS0 to SS255 SS operation. When 0.01 s, it is possible to use 0 to 63. z z z z z OUT Counter Indicates a counter CU0 to CU255 CU operation. OUT On delay TD timer OUT Up of CTU up/down counter OUT Down of CTD up/down counter OUT Counter CL clear 1.4 5 Number overlap not allowed 1.4 5 1.4 5 Indicates an up operation of CTU0 to up-down counter. CTU255 z z z z z 1.4 5 Indicates a down operation CTD0 to of up-down counter. CTD255 z z z z z 1.4 3 Indicates a clear operation for CU, RCU, CTU, CTD and WDT. z z z z z 0.9 1 5-3 CL0 to CL255 Remarks Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications 28 s1 == s2 s1 == AND (s1== s2) == [Word] WX, WY, WR, WM, Timer Counter [Double word] DX, DY, DR, DM R7F0 Process time (µ s) V C MICRO-EH z z z z z 27 Steps R7F1 DER ERR SD LD = Relational When s1 = s2: Continuity (s1== box When s1 ≠ s2: s2) Noncontinuity 5 6 7 8 35 Remarks *1 *2 Upper case: W Lower case: DW Constant s2 s1 I/O types used R7F2 Process descriptions R7F3 Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Basic instructions (relational box) Relational box Classification Item number 3. OR (s1== s2) s2 29 s1 S== s2 s1 S== s2 s1 S== s2 30 s1 <> LD (s1 S== s2) Signed = Relational box When s1 = s2: Continuity When s1 ≠ s2: Noncontinuity s1 and s2 are compared as signed 32-bit binary. DX, DY, DR, DM When s1 = s2: Noncontinuity When s1 ≠ s2: Continuity [Word] WX, WY, WR, WM, Timer Counter [Double word] DX, DY, DR, DM <> <> z z z z z 26.8 Constant 5 *2 6 7 8 OR (s1 S== s2) LD (s1< >s2) <> Relational box AND (s1< >s2) 34.5 5 6 7 8 *1 *2 Upper case: W Lower case: DW Constant s2 s1 35 AND (s1 S== s2) s2 s1 z z z z z OR (s1< >s2) s2 31 s1 S<> s2 s1 S<> s2 s1 S<> s2 *1: *2: LD (s1 S<> s2) Signed <> Relational box When s1 = s2: Noncontinuity When s1 ≠ s2: Continuity s1 and s2 are compared as signed 32-bit binary. DX, DY, DR, DM Constant z z z z z 34.5 5 *2 6 7 8 AND (s1 S<> s2) OR (s1 S<> s2) In the case of word, it requires five steps for LD (s1s2) and AND (s1s2), and six steps for OR (s1s2). In the case of double word, for LD (s1s2) and AND (s1s2), it requires five steps when the combination of s1 and s2 is I/O and I/O, six steps when the combination is either I/O and constant or constant and I/O, and seven steps when the combination is constant and constant. For OR (s1s2), one step is added respectively. 5-4 32 s1 < s2 s1 < AND (s1< s2) < V C MICRO-EH z z z z z 26.8 Steps Process time (µ s) 5 6 7 8 37.5 Remarks *1 *2 Upper case: W Lower case: DW Constant s2 s1 R7F0 DER ERR SD [Word] WX, WY, WR, WM, Timer Counter [Double word] DX, DY, DR, DM R7F1 < Relational When s1 < s2: Continuity box When s1 ≥ s2: Noncontinuity I/O types used R7F2 LD (s1< s2) Process descriptions R7F3 Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Relational box Classification Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications OR (s1< s2) s2 33 s1 S< s2 s1 S< s2 s1 S< s2 34 s1 <= s2 s1 <= s2 s1 <= s2 35 s1 S<= s2 s1 S<= s2 s1 S<= s2 *1: *2: LD (s1 S< s2) Signed < Relational box When s1 < s2: Continuity When s1 ≥ s2: Noncontinuity s1 and s2 are compared as signed 32-bit binary. DX, DY, DR, DM When s1 ≤ s2: Noncontinuity When s1 > s2: Continuity [Word] WX, WY, WR, WM, Timer Counter [Double word] DX, DY, DR, DM z z z z z 37.5 5 *2 6 7 8 z z z z z 26.8 5 6 7 8 Constant AND (s1 S< s2) OR (s1 S< s2) LD (s1 <= s2) <= Relational box AND (s1 <= s2) 42 *1 *2 Upper case: W Lower case: DW Constant OR (s1 <= s2) LD (s1 S<= s2) Signed <= Relational box When s1 ≤ s2: Continuity When s1 > s2: Noncontinuity s1 and s2 are compared as signed 32-bit binary. DX, DY, DR, DM Constant z z z z z 37.5 5 *2 6 7 8 AND (s1 S<= s2) OR (s1 S<= s2) In the case of word, it requires five steps for LD (s1s2) and AND (s1s2), and six steps for OR (s1s2). In the case of double word, for LD (s1s2) and AND (s1s2), it requires five steps when the combination of s1 and s2 is I/O and I/O, six steps when the combination is either I/O and constant or constant and I/O, and seven steps when the combination is constant and constant. For OR (s1s2), one step is added respectively. 5-5 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Mathematical operation 1 d=s Binary addition d ← s1+s2 3 d=s1 B+ s2 BCD addition d ← s1+s2 5 d=s1 s2 B - Binary d ← s1 - s2 subtraction BCD d ← s1 - s2 subtraction R7F0 Process time (µ s) V C MICRO-EH ↕ z z z z 32 74 52 92 [Word] d: WY, WR, WM, Timer · Counter s: WX, WY, WR, WM, Timer · Counter, Constant [Double word] d: DY, DR, DM s: DX, DY, DR, DM, Constant * Array variables can be used. [Word] d: WY, WR, WM s1, s2: WX, WY, WR, WM, Timer Counter, Constant [Double word] d: DY, DR, DM s1, s2: DX, DY, DR, DM, Constant ↕ z z z z 27 66 I/O: I/O I/O: Array Array: I/O Array: Array 3 I/O: I/O 4 I/O: Array 53 4 Array: I/O 99 5 Array: Array 35 86 4 I/O: I/O 4 I/O: Array 71 5 Array: I/O 120 5 Array: Array 4 Upper 6 case: W Lower case: DW 4 Upper case: W 6 Lower case: DW 4 Upper case: W 6 Lower case: DW 4 Upper case: W 6 Lower case: DW 4 Upper case: W 6 Lower case: DW 4 Upper case: W 6 Lower case: DW 6 ↕ z z z z z z z ↕ ↕ ↕ 45 61 z z z ↕ 115 177 z z z ↕ ↕ 41 58 ↕ Binary d ← s1 x s2 multiplication z z z ↕ 104 ↕ z z z z 43 112 7 d=s1 B x s2 BCD d ← s1 x s2 multiplication ↕ z z z z 164 447 8 d=s1 S x s2 Signed binary d ← s1 x s2 multiplication 9 d=s1 / s2 Binary division 10 d=s1 B/ s2 11 d=s1 S/ s2 BCD division [Word] d ← s1 / s2 WRF016 ← s1 mod s2 [Double word] d ← s1 / s2 DRF016 ← s1 mod s2 Signed binary division 5-6 Remarks [Bit] d: Y, R, M s: X, Y, R, M, Constant 163 6 d=s1 x s2 Steps R7F1 DER ERR SD Substitution d ← s statement 2 d=s1+s2 4 d=s1 - s2 I/O types used R7F2 Process descriptions R7F3 Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Arithmetic instructions Substitution statement Classification Item number 4. [Double word] ↕ d: DY, DR, DM s1, s2: DX, DY, DR, DM, Constant [Word] ↕ d: WY, WR, WM s1, s2: WX, WY, WR, WM, Timer Counter, Constant [Double word] d: DY, DR,, DM s1, s2: DX, DY, DR, DM, Constant [Double word] ↕ d: DY, DR, DM s1, s2: DX, DY, DR, DM, Constant z z z z 143 z z z z 55 110 152 z z ↕ z 3 4 4 5 4 Upper case: W 6 Lower case: DW 4 Upper case: W 253 6 Lower case: DW 101 6 12 d=s1 OR s2 13 d=s1 AND s2 14 d=s1 XOR s2 Logical AND Exclusive OR Process time (µ s) V C MICRO-EH z z z z z [Bit] d: Y, R, M s1, s2: X, Y, R, M [Word] d: WY, WR, WM, z z z z z Timer Counter s1, s2: WX, WY, WR, WM, Timer Counter, Constant [Double word] d: DY, DR, DM z z z z z s1, s2: DX, DY, DR, DM, Constant d ← s1 x s2 d ← s1 ⊕ s2 62 33 86 46 36 49 42 33 Relational expression 66 15 d=s1 == s2 = Relational When s1 = s2, d ← 1 expression When s1 ≠ s2, d ← 0 16 d=s1 S== s2 Signed = Relational expression When s1 = s2, d ← 1 When s1 ≠ s2, d ← 0 s1 and s2 are compared as signed 32-bit binary. 17 d=s1<>s2 <> Relational expression When s1 = s2, d ← 0 When s1 ≠ s2, d ← 1 When s1 = s2, d ← 0 When s1 ≠ s2, d ← 1 s1 and s2 are compared as signed 32-bit binary. 18 d=s1 S<> s2 Signed <> Relational expression 19 d=s1s2, d ← 0 s1 and s2 are compared as signed 32-bit binary. R7F0 Process time (µ s) V C MICRO-EH z z z z z [Word] d: Y, R, M s1, s2: WX, WY, WR, WM, Timer Counter, Constant [Double word] d: Y, R, M s1, s2: DX, DY, DR, DM, Constant [Double word] d: Y, R, M s1, s2: DX, DY, DR, DM, Constant Steps R7F1 R7F2 R7F3 I/O types used DER ERR SD Signed ≤ Relational expression 22 d=s1 S<= s2 Remarks 40 4 Upper case: W 71 6 Lower case: DW 50 6 2 BRES(d, n) 3 BTS(d, n) 4 SHR(d, n) 5 SHL(d, n) n d 1 Bit reset Sets 1 to bit n. n d 0 0 Bit test Sets 0 to bit n. n d 0 Shift right Shift left [Word] d: WY, WR, WM, TC n(0-15): WX, WY, WR, WM, TC, Constant 0 Process time (µ s) V C MICRO-EH z z z z z 26 35 z z z z z 29 38 [Double word] z z z z d: DY, DR, DM n(0-31): WX, WY, WR, WM, Acquires the value in bit n TC, Constant to C (R7F0). z z z z [Word] SD → → C d: WY, WR, d WM, TC n: WX, WY, WR, Shifts right by n bits. WM, TC, z z z z C ← ← SD Constant d C ↕ ↕ 31 38 3 Upper case: W 3 Lower case: DW 3 Upper case: W 3 Lower case: DW 3 Upper case: W 3 Lower case: DW 38 46 Rotate right → C d Rotates right by n bits. 7 ROL(d, n) Rotate left C ← d z z z z [Double word] d: DY, DR, DM n: WX, WY, WR, WM, TC, Constant z z z z *C: R7F0 SD: R7F2 ↕ 47 75 ↕ 46 54 Rotates left by n bits. 8 LSR(d, n) Logical shift right 0 → → C d z z z z ↕ 9 LSL(d, n) Logical shift left C ← d 36 45 Shifts right by n bits. ← 0 z z z z ↕ 36 45 Shifts left by n bits. 5-8 3 Upper case: W 3 Lower case: DW 3 Upper case: W 3 Lower case: DW 3 Upper case: W 3 Lower case: DW Shifts left by n bits. 6 ROR(d, n) Remarks 38 46 ↕ Steps R7F0 DER ERR SD Bit set R7F1 I/O types used R7F2 Process descriptions R7F3 Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Bit operations Classification Item number Application instructions 1 BSET(d, n) Shift/rotate Process descriptions ≤ Relational When s1 < s2, d ← 1 expression When s1 ≥ s2, d ← 0 21 d=s1 <= s2 5. Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Relational expression Classification Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications 3 Upper case: W 3 Lower case: DW 3 Upper case: W 3 Lower case: DW 3 Upper case: W 3 Lower case: DW 10 BSR(d, n) Transfer 12 MOV(d, s, n) Negation / Two's complement / Sign 13 COPY(d, s, n) 14 XCG(d1, d2, n) 15 NOT(d) 16 NEG(d) 17 ABS(d, s) Block transfer Copy Block exchange Reverse MICRO-EH 32 Shifts BCD to left by n digits. Transfers (copies) n bits (or words) of data from I/O number s to the n bit (or word) range from I/O number s. Copies the bit (or word) data of I/O number s to the n bit (or word) range from I/O number d. Exchanges the n bit (or word) range from I/O number d1 and the n bit (or word) range from I/O number d2. Reverses the bit for the I/O number d value. [Bit] d, s: R, M n(0-255): WX, WY, WR, WM, TC, Constant [Word] d, s: WR, WM n(0-255):WX, WY, WR, WM, TC, Constant [Bit] d: R, M s: X, Y, R, M, Constant n(0-255): WX, WY, WR, WM, TC, Constant [Word] d: WR, WM s, n(0-255): WX, WY, WR, WM, TC, Constant [Bit] d1, d2: R, M n(0-255): WX, WY, WR, WM, TC, Constant [Word] d: WR, WM n(0-255): WX, WY, WR, WM, TC, Constant [Bit] Y, R, M [Word] WY, WR, WM [Double word] DY, DR, DM [Word] WY, WR, WM ↕ ↕ ↕ z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z 39 3 Upper case: W Lower 3 case: DW 124 4 Lower case: W 80 4 *3 Upper case: B 73 4 Lower case: W 139 4 *3 Upper case: B 120 4 Lower case: W 27 2 Upper case: B 2 Middle case: W 2 Lower case: DW 2 Upper case: W 22 29 ↕ 3 Upper case: W Lower 3 case: DW 4 *3 Upper case: B 28 z z z z z Remarks 153 22 [Double word] DY, DR, DM z z z z Stores the absolute value of [Word] s in d, and the sign value of d: WY, WR, WM s in carry (R7F0). s: WX, WY, WR, (0: Positive, 1: Negative) WM, TC, Constant [Double word] d: DY, DR, DM s: DX, DY, DR, DM, Constant 5-9 40 Steps R7F0 C z z z z z [Double word] d: DY, DR, DM n: WX, WY, WR, ←0 WM, TC, constant Two's Stores two's complement of complement the value stored in I/O number d, in d. Absolute value V 32 d d Process time (µ s) z z z z z [Word] d: WY, WR, WM, TC n: WX, WY, WR, WM, TC, Constant 0→ BCD shift left R7F1 DER ERR SD BCD shift right Shifts BCD to right by n digits. 11 BSL(d, n) I/O types used R7F2 Process descriptions R7F3 Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Shift/rotate Classification Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications 30 41 2 Lower case: DW 3 Upper case: W 4 Lower case: DW 21 ENCO(d, s, n) R7F0 V C MICRO-EH z z z z d: R, M ↕ s: WX, WY, WR, WM, TC, Constant n: Constant(1-8) d: WY, WR, WM ↕ s: R, M n: Constant(1-8) 79 89 z z z z 49 Steps R7F1 R7F2 R7F3 DER ERR SD [Word] ↕ d: WY, WR, WM s: WX, WY, WR, WM, TC, Constant [Double word] ↕ d: DY, DR, DM s: DX, DY, DR, DM, Constant Remarks 3 Upper case: W Lower 4 case: DW 75 3 Upper case: W Lower 4 case: DW z z z z 105 4 *3 z z z ↕ 128 4 *3 R7F0 20 DECO(d, s, n) I/O types used Process time (µ s) R7F1 19 BIN(d, s) Process time (µ s) V C MICRO-EH DER ERR SD Bit count 23 SWAP(d) Swap 24 UNIT(d, s, n) Unit 25 DIST(d, s, n) Distribute z z [Word] d: WY, WR, WM s: WX, WY, WR, WM, TC, Constant [Double word] d: WY, WR, WM s: DX, DY, DR, DM, Constant Swaps the upper 8 bits and d: WY, WR, WM z z the lower 8 bits of the value (word) for I/O number d. Stores the lower 4 bit d: WY, WR, WM ↕ z values of the n words s: WR, WM starting with s in the lower n: Constant(0-4) 4 bits each of d (word). Extracts the value of s d: WR, WM ↕ z (word) in 4 bit units from s: WX, WY, WR, the least significant bits, WM, TC, and sets them in the lower 4 Constant bits of each word starting n: Constant(0-4) with I/O number d (word). The upper bits are set to 0. Among the contents of s (word, double-word), stores the number of bits that are set to 1 in I/O number d. Processing time when n = 1 5-10 z z z Steps I/O types used R7F2 Process descriptions R7F3 Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Application instruction Classification Item number Processing time when n=1. 22 BCU(d, s) *4: Process descriptions Binary → Converts the value of s into BCD and stores it in I/O BCD conversion number d. If the value of s is an error, DER (R 7F4) = 1 is set. Converts the value of s into BCD → binary and stores it in I/O Binary conversion number d. If the value of s is an error, DER (R 7F4) = 1 is set. Decode Decodes the value indicated by the least significant n bits of s, and sets the bit that corresponds to the decoding result of the bit row starting from I/O number d, to 1. Encode Encodes the bit location in which 1 is set within the bit row, which starts with I/O number s and lasts for the amount of nth power of 2, and stores it in I/O number d. If multiple bits that contain 1 exist, the one with the upper bit locations will be encoded. 18 BCD(d, s) *3: Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Conversion Classification Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Remarks 33 3 Upper case: W 42 4 Lower case: DW z z z 25 2 z z z 100 4 *4 z z z 87 4 *4 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Indicates the end of a normal scan. Re-executes normal scan from the beginning of the normal scan when s=1, while the next instruction is executed when s=0. Unconditio- Jumps to LBL n of the nal jump same No. n. Conditional When s=1, jumps to the jump LBL n of the same No.; when s=0, executes the next instruction. Label Indicates the jump destination of JMP or CJMP of the same No. FOR When s=0, jumps to the location after the NEXT n of the same No.; when s is not 0, executes the next instruction. NEXT Subtracts 1 from the s value of the FOR n of the same No. and jumps to FOR n. Call Executes the SB n subroutine subroutine of the same No. n. Start Indicates the start of No. n subroutine subroutine. RETURN Returns from subroutine. 3 JMP n 4 CJMP n (s) 5 LBL n 6 FOR n (s) 7 NEXT n 8 CAL n 9 SB n 10 RTS SUBROUTIN 11 INT n Start interrupt scan 12 RTI RETURN Returns from interrupt INTERRUPT scan. Indicates the start of No. n interrupt scan. R7F0 V C MICRO-EH None z z z z z 714 s: X, Y, R, M z z z z z 5 Steps R7F1 R7F2 R7F3 Process time (µ s) 1 2 *5 2 707 32 *6 n: Constant(0255) n: Constant(0255) s: X, Y, R, M z 1] z z z n: Constant(0255) z z z z z 0.5 1 n: Constant(0-49) z 1] z z z s: WY, WR, WM 33 3 n: Constant(0-49) z 1] z z z 38 2 n: Constant(0-99) z 1] z z z 24 2 n: Constant(0-99) z 1] z z z 0.5 1 None z z z z z 25 1 n: Constant(0-2, 16-19, 20-27) z z z z z 0.5 1 None z z z z z 0.5 1 z 1] z z z Remarks 3 3 *5 32 *6 R7F0 Process time (µ s) V C MICRO-EH ↕ z z z z 80 3 ↕ z z z z 80 3 Steps Data sending and receiving d: WY10 (optional) s: WR, WM t: R, M Data receiving and sending d: WX0 (optional) s: WR, WM t: R, M R7F1 R7F2 I/O types used DER ERR SD General purpose port communica -tion command 2 RECV 0 Process descriptions R7F3 Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Transfer inst. Classification Item number Transfer instructions 1 TRNS 0 Remarks 1 FUN 5 (s) 2 FUN 80 (s) (ALREF (s)) 3 FUN 81 (s) (IOREF (s)) R7F0 DER ERR SD General purpose port switching I/O refresh (all points) I/O refresh (I/O /link designation ) R7F1 I/O types used R7F2 Process descriptions R7F3 Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol FUN instructions FUN instructions Classification Item number 8. I/O types used DER ERR SD Normal scan end Scan conditional end 2 CEND(s) 7. Process descriptions Steps 1 END Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol Control instructions Control Classification Item number 6. Process time (µ s) V C MICRO-EH s: WR,WM ↕ z z z z 114 3 Refreshes all external I/O s: WR,WM ranges. Refreshes only the input s: WR,WM range, output range or link range. ↕ z z z z 432 3 ↕ z z z z 244 3 Port type switching from dedicated port to general purpose port 5-11 Remarks 4 FUN 82 (s) (SLREF (s)) 5 FUN 140 (s) 6 FUN 141 (s) 7 FUN 142 (s) 8 FUN 143 (s) 9 FUN 144 (s) 10 FUN 145 (s) 11 FUN 146 (s) 12 FUN 147 (s) 13 FUN 148 (s) 14 FUN 149 (s) 15 FUN 150 (s) 16 FUN 151 (s) 17 FUN 254 (s) (BOXC (s)) 18 FUN 255 (s) (MEMC (s)) V C MICRO-EH Steps Process time (µ s) Refreshes the I/O at the s: WR, WM designated slot. Performs the starting and s: WR, WM stopping of the count operation of the specified counter. Performs the enabling and s: WR, WM disabling of the coincidence output of the specified counter. ↕ z z z z 311 3 ↕ z z z z 147 3 ↕ z z z z 138 3 This controls the upcount/down-count of the specified counter. (Singlephase counters only) s: WR, WM ↕ z z z z 156 3 s: WR, WM s+1: WR, WM ↕ z z z z 175 3 s: WR, WM s+1: WR, WM ↕ z z z z 132 3 s: WR, WM ↕ z z z z 157 3 s: WR, WM s+1: WR, WM s+2: WR, WM ↕ z z z z 162 3 s: WR, WM ↕ z z z z 135 3 s: WR, WM s+1: WR, WM s+2: WR, WM ↕ z z z z 173 3 s: WR, WM ↕ z z z z 149 3 s: WR, WM s+1: WR, WM s+2: WR, WM ↕ z z z z 217 3 s: WR, WM s+1: WR, WM s+2: WR, WM s+3: WR, WM s+4: WR, WM No processing is performed s: WR, WM in the CPU. No processing is performed in the CPU. ↕ z z z z 919 3 z z z z z — 3 z z z z z — 3 The counter value of the specified counter number will be replaced by the data stored in the replacement value storage area. High-speed This function reads the counter count value of the specified current counter number and writes value it to the current value reading storage range High-speed Clears the count value of the counter specified counter number. current value clear High-speed The on-preset value and counter off-preset value will be set preset according to the preset specifications in respect to the specified counter number. PWM Starts PWM output of the operation specified PWM output control number. PWM Sets the frequency value Frequency and the on-duty value of the on-duty PWM output number changes specified by the on-duty value and the specified frequency value. Pulse Starts pulse output of the output specified pulse number and control the output is stopped when the specified number of pulses are output. Pulse Pulse output is commenced frequency at the specified frequency. output Output is stopped when the setting number of pulses specified changes have been output. Pulse output Divides the time band and with frequency into 10 levels acceleration/ and performs deceleration acceleration/deceleration. BOX comment Memo comment R7F0 DER ERR SD I/O refresh (any slot) High-speed counter operation control High-speed counter coincidence output control High-speed counter upcount / down-count control High-speed counter current value replacement R7F1 I/O types used R7F2 Process descriptions R7F3 Instruction name R7F4 Ladder symbol Instruction symbol FUN instructions Classification Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications 5-12 Remarks Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications 5.3 Instruction Specification Details (1) Basic instructions (2) Arithmetic instructions (3) Application instructions (4) Control instructions (5) Transfer instructions (6) FUN instructions 5-13 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-1, 2 Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) LD LDI n R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 n DER ERR SD V C z z z z z n n Instruction format 0.9 n Condition Steps LDI n — 1 I/O number Bit R, TD, SS, X Y M CU, CT { { { { Word WR, Remark Average Maximum Number of steps LD Usable I/O n Logical operation start (LD, LDI) ← Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Other Function n LD n Starts the a-contact logical operation. Enters the continuity state when input is on. n Starts the b-contact logical operation. Enters the continuity state when input is off. LDI n Notes • • Edge detection (DIF, DFN) cannot be used in respect to LDI. Pay close attention if the external output is to be monitored when counter input (coincidence output), PWM output or pulse output is set with the PI/O function. Y100 DIF1 WR0 = WR0 + 1 Y100 will not change while monitored. It will remain the same value previously set using functions such as set/reset. For example, if Y100 is off, the Y100 status will not change while being monitored and WRO will also remain unchanged. Program example X00000 Y00100 LD OUT X00000 Y00100 X00001 Y00101 LDI OUT X00001 Y00101 Program description • • When input X00000 is on, output Y00100 is on; when off, the output is off. When input X00001 is off, output Y00101 is on; when on, the output is off. 5-14 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Condition code n R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z n Instruction format 0.8 n Condition Steps ANI n 1 I/O number Bit R, TD, SS, X Y M CU, CT { { { { Word WR, Remark Average Maximum Number of steps AND Usable I/O n Processing time (µs) R7F4 n n Ladder format Contact serial connection (AND, ANI) AND ANI Name Basic instructions-3, 4 ← Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Other Function n Obtains AND of the previous operation result and the a-contact operation. AND n n Obtains AND of the previous operation result and the b-contact operation. ANI n Notes • • Edge detection (DIF, DFN) cannot be used in respect to ANI. Pay close attention if the external output is to be monitored when counter input (coincidence output), PWM output, or pulse output is set with the PI/O function. R0 Y100 DIF1 WR0 = WR0 + 1 Y100 will not change when monitored. It will remain the same value previously set using functions such as set/reset. For example, if Y100 is off, the Y100 status will not change while being monitored and WRO will also remain unchanged. Program example X00002 R010 Y00100 X00003 R011 Y00101 LD AND OUT X00002 R010 Y00100 LD ANI OUT X00003 R011 Y00101 Program description • • When input X00002 and R010 are both on, output Y00100 is on and all others are off. When input X00003 is on and R011 is off, output Y00101 is on and all others are off. 5-15 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-5, 6 Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) OR ORI n R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 n DER ERR SD V C z z z z z n n Instruction format Number of steps n Condition Steps ORI n 2 I/O number Bit R, TD, SS, X Y M CU, CT { { { { Word WR, Remark Average Maximum 0.9 OR Usable I/O n Contact parallel connection (OR, ORI) ← Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Other Function n Obtains OR of the previous operation result and the a-contact operation. OR n n Obtains OR of the previous operation result and the b-contact operation. ORI n Notes • • Edge detection (DIF, DFN) cannot be used in respect to ORI. Pay close attention if the external output is to be monitored when counter input (coincidence output), PWM output, or pulse output is set with the PI/O function. R0 DIF1 WR0 = WR0 + 1 Y100 Y100 will not change when monitored. It will remain the same value previously set using functions such as set/reset. For example, if Y100 is off, the Y100 status will not change while being monitored and WRO will also remain unchanged. Program example X00000 X00001 Y00105 LD OR ORI OUT X00000 X00001 X00002 Y00105 X00002 Program description • When X00000 is on, X00001 is on, or X00002 is off, the operation is “1” and Y00105 turns on. 5-16 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z Instruction format X Y 0.8 Condition Steps 2 Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Remark Average Maximum Number of steps NOT Usable I/O Negation (NOT) NOT Name Basic instructions-7 Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Other Function • Reverses the operation result obtained up to that point. Program example X00000 X00001 R100 LD AND NOT OUT X00000 X00001 R100 Program description • • When input X00000 and input X00001 are both on, the operation is “1,” but due to and R100 turns off. In all other cases, R100 turns on. 5-17 , the calculation turns into “0” Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-8 Ladder format Condition code AND OR R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DIF n DIF n DER ERR SD V C z z z z z DIF DIF DIF n n n Number of steps AND DIF n Condition Steps OR AND DIF n 3 OR DIF n 4 DIF n Usable I/O X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Remark Processing time (µs) DIF n Instruction format n Leading edge detection (AND DIF, OR DIF) Word WR, Average Maximum 1.0 ← Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number { Number Other 0 to 511 (Decimal) Function • Detects the rise of an input signal and retains the operation result only for one scan. ( ) indicates the display when the Ladder Editor is used. Notes • • DIF number may not be overlapped. (However, no error is generated even if overlapped numbers are used.) DIF cannot use the b contact. Program example X00000 DIF0 R123 LD AND OUT X00000 DIF0 R123 Program description Time chart X00000 R123 1 scan time • • Upon leading of X00000 on, R123 turns on only for one scan. If b-contact is used for X00000, operation will be the same as the a-contact DFN operation. 5-18 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Ladder format DFN n DFN n DFN n DFN n Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z Number of steps DFN n Steps AND DFN n 3 OR DFN n 4 Usable I/O n X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Average Maximum 1.0 Condition AND DFN n Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 Instruction format OR Trailing edge detection (AND DFN, OR DFN) Word WR, ← Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { Number AND DFN n OR DFN n Basic instructions-9 Constant Item number Other 0 to 511 (Decimal) Function • Detects the fall of an input signal and retains the operation result only for one scan. ( ) indicates the display when the Ladder Editor is used. Notes • • DFN number may not be overlapped. (However, no error is generated even if overlapped numbers are used.) DFN cannot use the b contact. Program example X00000 DFN0 R124 LD AND OUT X00000 DFN0 R124 Program description Time chart X0 R124 1 scan time • • Upon a fall of X00000, R124 turns on only for one scan. If b-contact is used for X00000, operation will be the same as the a-contact DIF operation. 5-19 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-10 Ladder format Condition code n R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z OUT R7F3 n I/O number X 1.0 Condition Steps 1 Bit R, TD, SS, Y M CU, CT { { { Word WR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Switches on the coil when the operation result obtained up to that point is “1.” Switches off the coil when the operation result obtained up to that point is “0.” Notes • L becomes the internal output when link modules are not used. Program example X00000 X00001 Y00100 LD OUT X00000 Y00100 LD OUT OUT X00001 Y00101 Y00102 Y00101 Y00102 Program description • • ← Double word DR, Function • • When input X00000 is on, the operation is “1” and Y00100 turns on. When input X00001 is on, the operation is “1,” and Y00101 and Y00102 turn on. 5-20 Remark Average Maximum Number of steps OUT n n Processing time (µs) R7F4 Instruction format Usable I/O Coil output (OUT) Constant Item number Other Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications SET n RES n S n R Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z SET RES Instruction format n Condition Steps RES n 1 I/O number Average Maximum Upper case: SET 0.9 ← 0.9 ← Lower case: RES Number of steps SET n Usable I/O Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 n n Ladder format n Set/reset coil output (SET, RES) X Bit R, TD, SS, Y M CU, CT { { Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Other Function n SET SET n Switches on the device when the operation result obtained up to that point is “1.” The device that is switched on will not be switched off even if the operation result is “0.” n RES RES n Switches off the device when the operation result obtained up to that point is “1.” ( ) indicates the display when the Ladder Editor is used. Notes • When a set/reset coil is used on a multi-layer coil, it must be set to the highest level or an arbitrary contact must be entered immediately before the use. Example of OK Example of NG SET SET SET SET SET Program example X00000 R100 SET X00001 R100 RES LD SET LD RES X00000 R100 X00001 R100 Program description • • • When input X00000 turns on, output R100 turns on. Even if X00000 turns off, R100 remains on. When input X00001 turns on, output R100 turns off. When input X00000 and X00001 both turn on, the one executed later than the other during programming takes a higher priority. 5-21 SET RES Name Basic instructions-11, 12 Constant Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-13, 14 Ladder format MCS MCR MCS n MCS n S MCR n MCR n R Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z n n Instruction format Remark Average Maximum Upper case: MCS 0.7 ← 0.7 ← Lower case: MCR Number of steps MCS n Condition Steps MCR n MCS n 3 MCR n 2 Usable I/O n Set (start)/reset (cancel) master control (MCS, MCR) X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, DL, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number { Number Other 0 to 49 (Decimal) Function • • Controls the input to the circuit sandwiched by the master control set (MCS n) and reset (MCR n). (An AND operation is performed with respect to each input and MCS.) The master control can be used up to eight layers. ( ) indicates the display when the Ladder Editor is used. Notes • Always use the master control MCS and MCR in pairs. Program example MCS0 X00000 MCS1 X00001 Y00100 MCR1 LD MCS1 LD OUT MCR1 X00000 MCS1 X00001 Y00100 MCS2 MCR2 Up to eight layers are allowed. MCR1 MCR0 Program description X00000 X00001 Y00100 • • When input X00000 is on, the circuits surrounded by MCS and MCR obeys input X00001, and output Y00100 turns on/off. When input X00000 is off, the circuits surrounded by MCS and MCR are independent of input X00001, and output Y00100 turns off. 5-22 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Ladder format Save/read/clear operation result (Branching of ladder) Condition code Processing time (µs) Save R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 Read DER ERR SD V C Clear z z z z z Instruction format Number of steps MPS Save Condition Steps MRD Read 0 MPP Clear Usable I/O X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Remark Average Maximum MPS Save MRD Read MPP Clear Name Basic instructions-15, 16, 17 Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Other Function X00100 R001 Y00101 R002 • • • Y00102 R003 Y00103 R004 Y00104 LD MPS AND MPS OUT MPP AND OUT MRD AND OUT MPP AND OUT X00100 R001 Y00101 R002 Y00102 R003 Y00103 R004 Y00104 MPS stores the previous operation result. (Push) MRD reads the results stored by the MPS and continues operation. MPP reads the results stored previously by the MPS and continues operation, then clears the results after operation. (Pull) 5-23 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-18 Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) ANB R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z (See Function column) Instruction format Condition Steps 0 X Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Y Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Function X00001 R010 M0020 M0021 R011 M0022 Y00100 LD X00001 LD R010 OR R011 ANB LD M0020 AND M0021 OR M0022 ANB OUT Y00100 This instruction is used to perform AND operation with respect to the logical operation blocks (dotted line area). 5-24 Remark Average Maximum Number of steps ANB Usable I/O Logical block serial connection (ANB) Constant Item number Other Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z (See Function column) Instruction format Number of steps Steps 1 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Function X00000 R010 Y00105 R011 R012 X00001 LD X00000 LD R010 LD R011 AND R012 ORB OR X00001 ANB OUT Y00105 This instruction is used to perform OR operation with respect to the logical operation blocks (dotted line area). 5-25 Remark Average Maximum 0.7 Condition ORB Usable I/O Logical block parallel connection (ORB) ORB Basic instructions-19 Constant Item number Other Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-20 Ladder format Condition code [ R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z ] Number of steps Condition Steps — 3 ] Usable I/O Processing time (µs) R7F4 Instruction format [ Processing box start and end (PROCESSING BOX) X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Average Maximum 0.6 Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Function • Indicates the start and end of the processing box. X00001 WY0010=WX0000 • LD X00001 [ WY0010=WX0000 ] In the above example, the operation inside the processing box will be executed when input X00001 is on. Parallel connection of processing box or coil is not allowed. Not allowed Allowed Not allowed Allowed 5-26 Remark Other Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-21 Ladder format Condition code R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z Condition Steps — 0 ) X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, z Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Function • 0.8 Indicates the start and end of the relational box. 5-27 ) Number of steps Remark Average Maximum ( R7F3 Instruction format Usable I/O Processing time (µs) R7F4 z ( Relational box start and end (RELATIONAL BOX) Constant Item number Other Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-22 Ladder format Condition code OUT TD n t s TD n R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z Instruction format Timer number t Time base s Set value X Y 1.4 Condition Steps 5 Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Remark Average Maximum Number of steps OUT TD n t s Usable I/O Processing time (µs) R7F4 txs n On delay timer (ON DELAY TIMER) Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number { Other 0 to 255 (Decimal) .01s, .1s, 1s { { { { 1 to 65535 (Decimal) Function • • • • • The progress value is updated when the startup condition is on, and the coil turns on when the progress value is greater than or equal to the set value. If the startup condition is turned off, the progress value is cleared and the coil turns off. The progress value is set in TC n and does not exceed 65535 (decimal). If the progress value is updated during RUN, the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point. If an I/O is set for the set value, the set value can be changed during operation by changing the I/O value, since the set values are updated during each scan. Notes • • • The .01s time base can only be used for timer numbers 0 to 63 (64 points). The .1 s and 1 s time bases can be used for all timer numbers (0 to 255). A maximum of 256 points can be used for the timers TD, SS, CU, CTU and CTD in total. However, the same area as the counter is used. The timer numbers and counter numbers may not be overlapped. Program example X00000 TD10 0.01S 12345 TD10 • R100 LD OUT LD OUT X00000 TD10 0.01S 12345 TD10 R100 An example of a word I/O being used as the set value for the circuit shown above. R7E3 WR0010=12345 X00000 TD10 TD10 R100 0.01S WR0010 LD R7E3 [ WR0010=12345 ] LD X00000 OUT TD10 0.01S WR0010 LD TD10 OUT R100 5-28 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications [Time chart] 1] 2] 3] 4] X00000 TD10 R100 Set value 65 535 5] 12345 When input X00000 turns on, TD progress value is updated. When input X00000 turns off, the TD progress value is cleared. TD10 turns on when progress value ≥ set value. While X00000 is on, the progress value increases, but will not increase exceeding 65535. When X00000 turns off, TD10 also turns off and the progress value is cleared. Progress value of TD10 (TC10) 1] • 2] 3] 4] 5] Example using word I/O as the set value When RUN is commenced, the set value is set to the word I/O. Or, the word I/O for the set value is designated to store in the power failure memory. 5-29 OUT TD n t s Program description Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-23 Ladder format Single shot (SINGLE SHOT) Condition code OUT SS n t s SS n Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z txs Instruction format Number of steps 1.4 Condition Steps 5 OUT SS n t s Bit Usable I/O X n Timer number t Time base s Set value Y Remark Average Maximum Word Double word TD, SS, WDT, MS, WR, DR, R, TMR, CU, M RCU, CT WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number { Other 0 to 255 (Decimal) .01s, .1s, 1s { { { { 1 to 65535 (Decimal) Function • • • • • Detects the leading edge of the startup condition, starts updating progress values, and turns on the coil. The coils turns off when the progress value is greater than or equal to the set value. If a leading edge is detected while the progress value is less than the set value, the progress value is set to 0 and the counter is reset. The progress value is set in TC n and does not exceed 65535 (decimal). If the progress value is updated during RUN, the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point. If an I/O is set for the set value, the set value can be changed during operation by changing the I/O value, since the set values are updated during each scan. Notes • • • • The .01 s time base can only be used for timer numbers 0 to 63 (64 points). The .1 s and 1s time bases can be used for all timer numbers (0 to 255). A maximum of 256 points can be used for the timers TD, SS, CU, CTU and CTD in total. However, the same area as the counter is used. Timer number and counter number may not be overlapped. Since the startup condition of a single shot is edge detection, the condition for one scan cannot be detected during the first scan after RUN starts. Program example X00001 SS11 0.01S 12567 SS11 • R101 LD OUT LD OUT X00001 SS11 0.01S 12567 SS11 R101 An example of a word I/O being used as the set value for the circuit shown above. R7E3 WR0011=12567 X00001 SS11 SS11 R101 0.01S WR0011 LD R7E3 [ WR0011=12567 ] LD X00001 OUT SS11 0.01S WR0011 LD SS11 OUT R101 5-30 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications [Time chart] 1] 2] X00001 SS11 R101 Set value 4] 12 567 Progress value of SS11 (TC11) 1] • 3] 2] 3] 4] The progress value is updated and SS11 turns on at the leading edge of X00001. SS11 turns off when set value ≥ progress value. X00001 is turned on at this time, but the single shot startup conditions are ignored because it uses edge trigger. SS11 is turned on at the leading edge of X00001 again, and the progress value is updated. When the leading edge of X00001 is detected while the progress value does not reach the set value, the single shot timer is triggered again and the progress value returns to 0, then starts increasing. The SS11 remains on. Example using word I/O as the set value When RUN is commenced, the set value is set to the word I/O. Or, the word I/O for the set value is designated to store in the power failure memory. 5-31 OUT SS n t s Program description Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-24 Ladder format Condition code OUT CU n R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z CU n s Instruction format Counter number s Set value X Y 1.4 Condition Steps — 5 Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { Remark Average Maximum Number of steps OUT CU n s n Processing time (µs) R7F4 s Usable I/O Counter (COUNTER) { Constant Item number Other { 0 to 255 (Decimal) { 1 to 65535 (Decimal) Function • • • • Increments the progress value by 1 each time the leading edge of the startup condition is detected, and switches on the coil when the progress value is greater than or equal to the set value. The coil that is switched on turns off when the counter clear CL n is switched on, and the progress value is cleared to 0. The progress value is set in TC n and does not exceed 65535 (decimal). If the progress value is updated while the system is running, the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point. If an I/O is set for the set value, the set value can be changed during operation by changing the I/O value, since the set values are updated during each scan. Notes • • • • • A maximum of 256 points can be used for the timers and counters TD, SS, CU, CTU and CTD in total. The timer numbers and counter numbers can not be overlapped. While the counter clear CL n is on, the rise of startup condition is ignored. Since the startup condition of the counter is edge detection, the condition for one scan can not be detected during the first scan after RUN starts. If the set value is set to 0, it is regarded as a coil that is always on and controlled by the CL n. Program example X00005 CU15 X00006 CL15 CU15 R105 4 • LD OUT LD OUT LD OUT X00005 CU15 4 X00006 CL15 CU15 R105 An example of a word I/O being used as the set value for the circuit shown above. R7E3 WR0015=4 X00005 CU15 X00006 CL15 CU15 R105 WR0015 LD R7E3 [ WR0015=4 ] LD X00005 OUT CU15 WR0015 LD X00006 OUT CL15 LD CU15 OUT R105 5-32 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Ignored X00005 CL15 CU15 65 535 5 Set value 4 Progress value of CU15 (TC15) 4 3 3 2 1 1] • 2] 3] 4] 5] Example using word I/O as the set value When RUN is commenced, the set value is set to the word I/O. Or, the word I/O for the set value is designated to store in the power failure memory. 5-33 CU n Ignored 1] The progress value (count) is cleared to 0 by the counter clear (CL15). While the counter clear is on, the progress value will not be updated. 2] The progress value is updated at the leading edge of X00005. 3] Counter coil (CU15) is turned on since the progress value ≥ set value. 4] The count value will not exceed 65535 (decimal). 5] The progress value and counter coil are cleared by counter clear (CL15). • The clear is performed under the conditions set immediately prior to the execution of the counter coil instruction. OUT [Time chart] s Program description Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-25, 26 OUT CTU n s OUT CTD n Ladder format Up (CTU n) and down (CTD n) of up/down counter (UP/DOWN COUNTER) Condition code Processing time (µs) CTU n s R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 CTD n DER ERR SD V C z z z z z Instruction format OUT CTD n n Counter number s Set value Upper case: CTU 1.4 1.4 Lower case: CTD Number of steps OUT CTU n s Usable I/O Remark Average Maximum X Y Condition Steps CTU 5 CTD 3 Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { Constant Item number Other { 0 to 255 (Decimal) { 1 to 65535 (Decimal) Function • • • • For the UP counter, increments the progress value by 1 each time the leading edge of the startup condition is detected, while it decrements the progress value by 1 for the DOWN counter. The coil switches on when the progress value is greater than or equal to the set value and switches off when the progress value is less than the set value. When the counter clear CL n switches on, the progress value is cleared to 0 and the coil switches off. The progress value is set in TC n, and the value will be in the range of 0 to 65535 (decimal). If the progress value is updated during RUN, the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point. If an I/O is set for the set value, the set value can be changed during operation by changing the I/O value, since the set values are updated during each scan. Notes • • • • • • A maximum of 256 points can be used for the timers and counters TD, SS, CU, CTU and CTD in total. The timer numbers and counter numbers cannot be overlapped. The numbers for the UP coil and DOWN coil must be the same. While the counter clear CL n is on, the rise of startup condition is ignored. Since the startup condition of the counter is edge detection, the condition for one scan may not be detected during the first scan after RUN starts. If the set value is set to “0”, it is regarded as a coil that is always on and controlled by the CL n. 5-34 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications X00007 CTU17 LD OUT LD OUT LD OUT LD OUT 4 • X00008 CTD17 X00009 CL17 CT17 R107 X00007 CTU17 4 X00008 CTD17 X00009 CL17 CT17 R107 z An example of a word I/O being used as the set value for the circuit shown above. R7E3 WR0017=4 X00007 CTU17 WR0017 X00008 CTD17 X00009 CL17 CT17 R107 LD R7E3 [ WR0017=4 ] LD X00007 OUT CTU17 WR0017 LD X00008 OUT CTD17 LD X00009 OUT CL17 LD CT17 OUT R107 Program description [Time chart] Ignored Ignored X00007 Ignored X00008 CL17 CT17 65 535 65 534 Set value 5 =4 4 3 5 4 4 3 2 Progress value (TC17) 3 2 0 1 1] 1] The progress value (count value) is up-counted at the leading edge of X00007. 2] The counter coil (CT17) is turned on when the progress value ≥ set value. 3] When the up-coil and down-coil startup conditions turn on simultaneously, the progress value does not change. 4] The progress value is down-counted at the leading edge of X00008. 5] The counter coil turns off when set value > progress value. 2] 3] 4] 5] 7] 6] 6] 6] The progress value will not exceed 65535 (decimal). Also, it will not be below 0. 7] When the counter clear (CL17) turns on, the progress value and the counter coil are cleared. The progress value is not updated while the counter clear is on. • The clear is performed under the conditions set immediately before execution of the counter coil instruction. • Example using the word I/O as the set value When RUN is commenced, the set value is set to word I/O. Or, the word I/O for the set value is designated to store in the power failure memory. 5-35 OUT CTU n s OUT CTD n Program example Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-27 Ladder format Condition code OUT CL n R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z CL n R7F3 s Number of steps Steps — 1 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { Counter number Remark Average Maximum 0.9 Condition OUT CL n s n Processing time (µs) R7F4 Instruction format Usable I/O Counter clear (COUNTER CLEAR) Constant Item number Other 0 to 255 (Decimal) Function • • • • Clears the progress values of the integral timer and switches off the timer coil. In the case of WDT, the time monitor check is performed (see WDT for details). In the case of counters, the progress value is cleared and the counter coil is switched off. The clearing operation is conducted immediately before execution of the counter or timer coil instruction indicated by the clear coil. Example: X00000 CL10 X00001 CU10 X00002 CL10 1) When X00000 is turned on, the CL10 immediately prior to CU10, and CU10 is cleared. 2) Even if X00002 turns on, if X00001 is off, the CL10 is turned off by the circuit before CU10 is executed. Thus, the CU10 will not be cleared. Notes • The same number should be used for the timer number and counter number. 5-36 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Ladder format =Relational box (=RELATIONAL BOX) Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z (See Function column) Instruction format Upper case: W 27 40 35 50 Lower case: DW Number of steps LD (s1 == s2) Condition Steps AND (s1 == s2) Word (See Notes) OR (s1 == s2) Double word (See Notes) Usable I/O Remark Average Maximum X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM s1 Relational number 1 { { { { { { { { s2 Relational number 2 { { { { { { { { Other Function [Ladder format] • • s1 == s2 s1 == s2 s1 == s2 Compares s1 and s2 as unsigned numbers, and if s1 is equals to s2, it enters the continuity status (on) and if s1 is not equal to s2, enters the noncontinuity status (off). When s1 and s2 are words: 0 to 65535 (decimal) or H0000 to HFFFF (hexadecimal) When s1 and s2 are double words: 0 to 4294967295 (decimal) or H00000000 to HFFFFFFFF (hexadecimal) Notes [Number of steps] Word LD Double word (s1 == s2) 5 steps I/O I/O OR (s1==s2) 5 steps 6 steps AND (s1 == s2) 5 steps I/O Constant 6 steps 7 steps OR 6 steps Constant I/O 6 steps 7 steps Constant Constant 7 steps 8 steps (s1 == s2) Program example WR0000 == R001 LD OUT (WR0000 == WR0002) R001 WR0002 Program description • LD, AND (s1==s2) When WR0000 = WR0002, R001 turns on. 5-37 LD (s1 == s2) AND (s1 == s2) OR (s1 == s2) Basic instructions-28 Constant Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Basic instructions-29 Ladder format Condition code LD (s1 == s2) AND (s1 == s2) OR (s1 == s2) R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z Command format 35 (s1 S== s2) Condition Steps AND (s1 S== s2) Double word (See Cautionary notes) OR (s1 S== s2) Usable I/O Average Maximum Number of steps Bit X Y R, L, M Word TD, SS, CU, CT Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 (See Function column) LD Signed = Relational box (SIGNED = RELATIONAL BOX) 50 Double word WR, DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number s1 Relational number 1 { { { { s2 Relational number 2 { { { { Other Function [Ladder format] z z s1 S== s2 s1 S== s2 b31 Compares s1 and s2 as signed double-word numbers, and if s1 is equals to s2, it enters the continuity status (on) and if s1 is not equal to s2, enters the noncontinuity status(off). s1, s2 s1 S== s2 Sign bit: 0 - Positive; 1 - Negative – 2147483648 to + 2147483647 (decimal) H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF (hexadecimal) Cautionary notes [Number of steps] Double word LD, AND (s1S==s2) OR (s1S==s2) I/O I/O 5 steps 6 steps I/O Constant 6 steps 7 steps Constant I/O 6 steps 7 steps Constant Constant 7 steps 8 steps Program example DR0000 S== DR0002 R002 LD OUT (DR0000 S== DR0002) R002 Program description z When DR0000 = DR0002, R002 turns on (signed). 5-38 b0 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Ladder format <> Relational box (<> RELATIONAL BOX) Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z (See Function column) Instruction format Average Maximum Upper case: W 26.8 40 34.5 50 Lower case: DW Number of steps LD (s1 <> s2) Condition Steps AND (s1 <> s2) Word (See Notes) OR (s1 <> s2) Double word (See Notes) Usable I/O Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM s1 Relational number 1 { { { { { { { { s2 Relational number 2 { { { { { { { { Other Function [Ladder format] • • s1 <> s2 s1 <> s2 s1 <> s2 Compares s1 and s2 as unsigned numbers, and if s1 is equals to s2, it enters the noncontinuity status (off) and if s1 is not equal to s2, enters the continuity status (on). When s1 and s2 are words: 0 to 65535 (decimal) or H0000 to HFFFF (hexadecimal) When s1 and s2 are double words: 0 to 4294967295 (decimal) or H00000000 to HFFFFFFFF (hexadecimal) Notes [Number of steps] Word Double word OR (s1<>s2) LD (s1 <> s2) 5 steps I/O I/O 5 steps 6 steps AND (s1 <> s2) 5 steps I/O Constant 6 steps 7 steps OR (s1 <> s2) 6 steps Constant I/O 6 steps 7 steps Constant Constant 7 steps 8 steps Program example WR0000 < > R003 LD OUT (WR0000 < > WR0002) R003 WR0002 Program description • LD, AND (s1<>s2) When WR0000 ≠ WR0002, R003 turns on. 5-39 LD (s1 <> s2) AND (s1 <> s2) OR (s1 <> s2) Basic instructions-30 Constant Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications LD (s1 S <> s2) AND (s1 S <> s2) OR (s1 S <> s2) Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z Command format (s1 S<> s2) Condition Steps AND (s1 S<> s2) Double word (See Cautionary notes) OR (s1 S<> s2) Usable I/O X Y R, L, M Word TD, SS, CU, CT Average Maximum 34.5 Number of steps Bit Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 (See Function column) LD Signed <> Relational box (SIGNED <> RELATIONAL BOX) Name Basic instructions-31 50 Double word WR, DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number s1 Relational number 1 { { { { s2 Relational number 2 { { { { Other Function [Ladder format] z z s1 S<> s2 s1 S<> s2 b31 Compares s1 and s2 as signed double-word numbers, and if s1 is equals to s2, it enters the noncontinuity status (off) and if s1 is not equal to s2, enters the continuity status (on). s1, s2 s1 S<> s2 Sign bit: 0 - Positive; 1 - Negative – 2147483648 to + 2147483647 (decimal) H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF (hexadecimal) Cautionary notes [Number of steps] Double word I/O LD, AND (s1S<>s2) OR (s1S<>s2) 5 steps 6 steps I/O I/O Constant 6 steps 7 steps Constant I/O 6 steps 7 steps Constant Constant 7 steps 8 steps Program example DR0000 S< > DR0002 R004 LD OUT (DR0000 S < > DR0002) R004 Program description z When DR0000 ≠ DR0002, R004 turns on (signed). 5-40 b0 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Ladder format s2 Instruction format d = s1 <> s2 Condition Steps s is a word 4 s is a double Word 6 Bit 60 46 X Word R, TD, SS, Y M CU, CT { { Double word WR, DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM d Substitution destination s1 Comparand { { { { { { { { s2 Relational number { { { { { { { { Function • Substitutes 1 when s1 is not equal to s2 and otherwise 0 into d, assuming s1 and s2 as binary data. Notes • The combinations of d, s1 and s2 are as follows: d s1 s2 Bit Word Word Bit Double word Double word Program example [ Y00000= WR0000 < > WR0001 ] Y00000= WR0000 < > WR0001 Program description • Remark Average Maximum Number of steps d = s1 <> s2 Usable I/O <> Relational expression Constant Item number When WR0000 ≠ WR0001, “1” is set in Y00000. Otherwise, Y00000 is reset to “0.” 5-62 Other Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z Command format Steps s is a double word 6 Bit X Substitution destination R, L, M Y { Word TD, SS, CU, CT 48 Condition Remark Average Maximum Number of steps d = s1 S<> s2 d Processing time (µs) R7F4 d = s1 S<> s2 Usable I/O Signed <> Relational expression d = s1 S<> s2 Name Arithmetic instructions-18 Double word WR, DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Other { s1 Comparand { { { { s2 Relational number { { { { Function z z Substitutes 1 when s1 is not equal to s2 and otherwise 0 into d, assuming s1 and s2 as signed binary data. s1 and s2 are both signed binary data. When the most significant bit is 0, the value is positive; when the most significant bit is 1, the value is negative. s1, s2 – 2147483648 to +2147483647 (decimal) H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF (hexadecimal) b31 b16 b15 b0 Sign bit: 0 - Positive; 1 - Negative Program example Y00100 = DR0000 S<> DR0002 [ Y00100 = DR0000 S<> DR0002 ] Program description z When the values of DR0000 and DR0002 are not equal, Y00100 is turned on. Otherwise, Y00100 is turned off. 5-63 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Arithmetic instructions-19 Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z d = s1 < s2 Instruction format Upper case: W d = s1 < s2 40 70 Lower case: DW Condition Steps s is a word 4 s is a double word 6 X Bit R, TD, SS, Y M CU, CT { { Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM d Substitution destination s1 Comparand { { { { { { { { s2 Relational number { { { { { { { { Function • Substitutes “1” when s1 is less than s2 and otherwise “0” into d, assuming s1 and s2 as binary data. Notes • The combinations of d, s1 and s2 are as follows: d s1 s2 Bit Word Word Bit Double word Double word Program example [ R0 = TC100 < TC101 ] R0 = TC100 < TC101 Program description • Remark Average Maximum Number of steps d = s1 < s2 Usable I/O < Relational expression Constant Item number When TC100 < TC101, R0 is set to “1.” Otherwise, R0 is reset to “0.” (TC n is the progress value of the no. n timer or counter.) 5-64 Other Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z Command format Steps s is a double word 6 Bit X Substitution destination R, L, M Y { Word TD, SS, CU, CT 50 Condition Remark Average Maximum Number of steps d = s1 S< s2 d Processing time (µs) R7F4 d = s1 S< s2 Usable I/O Signed < Relational expression d = s1 S< s2 Name Arithmetic instructions-20 Double word WR, DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Other { s1 Comparand { { { { s2 Relational number { { { { Function z z Substitutes 1 when s1 is less than s2 and otherwise 0 into d, assuming s1 and s2 as signed binary data. s1 and s2 are both signed binary data. When the most significant bit is 0, the value is positive; when the most significant bit is 1, the value is negative. s1, s2 – 2147483648 to +2147483647 (decimal) H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF (hexadecimal) b31 b16 b15 b0 Sign bit: 0 - Positive; 1 - Negative Program example [ R100 = DM000 S< DM002 ] R100 = DM000 S< DM002 Program description z When the value in DM000 is less than the value in DM002, 1 is set in R100. Otherwise, R100 is reset to 0. 5-65 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Arithmetic instructions-21 Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z d = s1 <= s2 Instruction format Remark Average Maximum Upper case: W d = s1 <= s2 40 71 Lower case: DW Number of steps Condition Steps s is a word 4 s is a double word 6 d = s1 <= s2 Usable I/O ≤ Relational expression X Bit R, TD, SS, Y M CU, CT { { Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number d Substitution destination s1 Comparand { { { { { { { { s2 Relational number { { { { { { { { Function • Substitutes “1” when s1 is less than or equal to s2 and otherwise “0” into d, assuming s1 and s2 as binary data. Notes • The combinations of d, s1 and s2 are as follows: d s1 s2 Bit Word Word Bit Double word Double word Program example [ Y00001 = WR10 <= WR100 ] Y00001 = WR10 <= WR100 Program description • When WR10 ≤ WR100, Y00001 is set to “1.” Otherwise, Y00001 is reset to “0.” 5-66 Other Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z Command format Steps s is a double word 6 Bit X Substitution destination R, L, M Y { Word TD, SS, CU, CT 50 Condition Remark Average Maximum Number of steps d = s1 S<= s2 d Processing time (µs) R7F4 d = s1 S<= s2 Usable I/O Signed ≤ Relational expression d = s1 S<= s2 Name Arithmetic instructions-22 Double word WR, DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Other { s1 Comparand { { { { s2 Relational number { { { { Function z z Substitutes 1 when s1 is less than or equal to s2 and otherwise 0 into d, assuming s1 and s2 as signed binary data. s1 and s2 are both signed binary data. When the most significant bit is 0, the value is positive; when the most significant bit is 1, the value is negative. s1, s2 – 2147483648 to +2147483647 (decimal) H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF (hexadecimal) b31 b16 b15 b0 Sign bit: 0 - Positive; 1 - Negative Program example [ Y00100 = DR10 S<= DR100 ] Y00100 = DR10 S<= DR100 Program description z When the value in DR10 is less than or equal the value in DR100, Y00100 is turned on. Otherwise, Y00100 is turned off. 5-67 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-1 Ladder format Bit set Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z BSET (d, n) Instruction format 3 Usable I/O BEST (d, n) X n Bit location to be set Upper case: W 26 35 Lower case: DW Steps BSET (d, n) I/O to be set the bit Remark Average Maximum Number of steps Condition d Processing time (µs) R7F4 Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { Constant Item number Other { { The constant is set in decimal. Function • • Sets the nth bit in the I/O (word or double word) specified by d to “1.” Other bit contents are unaltered. d .................. n+1 n n-1 ........................ 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 “1” is set. If d is a word: If d is a double word: Designates the bit location depending on the contents (0 to 15) of the lower 4 bits (b3 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 15 (decimal). Designates the bit location depending on the contents (0 to 31) of the lower 5 bits (b4 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 31 (decimal). 5-68 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-2 Ladder format Bit reset Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z BRES (d, n) 3 Usable I/O X Bit location to be reset 29 38 Lower case: DW Steps BRES (d, n) n Upper case: W Number of steps Condition I/O to be set the bit Remark Average Maximum Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { Other { { The constant is set in decimal. Function • • Sets the nth bit in the I/O (word or double word) specified by d to “0.” Other bit contents are unaltered. d .................. n+1 n n-1 ........................ 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Reset to “0”. If d is a word: If d is a double word: Designates the bit location depending on the contents (0 to 15) of the lower 4 bits (b3 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 15 (decimal). Designates the bit location depending on the contents (0 to 31) of the lower 5 bits (b4 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 31 (decimal). 5-69 BRES (d, n) Instruction format d Processing time (µs) R7F4 Constant Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-3 Ladder format Bit test Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z ↕ BTS (d, n) Instruction format Upper case: W 3 Usable I/O X BTS (d, n) n Bit location to be tested 38 Lower case: DW Steps BTS (d, n) I/O to be tested 31 Number of steps Condition d Remark Average Maximum Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { Constant Item number Other { { The constant is set in decimal. Function • • Checks the contents of the nth bit of the I/O (word or double word) specified by d, and if the result is “1,” '1' is set to C (R7F0). If the result is “0,” C (R7F0) is reset to “0.” The contents of d remains unaltered. d .................. n+1 n n-1 ........................ 5 4 3 2 1 0 C (R7F0) If d is a word: If d is a double word: Designates the bit location depending on the contents (0 to 15) of the lower 4 bits (b3 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 15 (decimal). Designates the bit location depending on the contents (0 to 31) of the lower 5 bits (b4 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 31 (decimal). Program example X00000 DIF200 BSET BRES BTS R000 LD AND [ BSET BRES BTS R000 ] (DR0100, WR0001) (DR0102, WR0001) (DR0104, WR0001) = R7F0 5-70 X00000 DIF200 (DR0100, WR0001) (DR0102, WR0001) (DR0104, WR0001) = R7F0 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Program description When WR0001 = H1234 at the leading edge of X00000 (WR0001 = 0001001000110100) 20 (decimal) If DR0100 = H00000000, DR0102 = HFFFFFFFF and DR0104 = H5555AAAA are set, the 20th bit of DR0100 is set to “1” by the BSET at the leading edge of X00000. b31 b20 b0 DR0100=00000000000000000000000000000000 This bit is set to “1.” Also, the 20th bit of DR0102 is reset to “0” by BRES. BTS (d, n) b31 b20 b0 DR0102=11111111111111111111111111111111 This bit is set to “0.” Also, the 20th bit of DR0104 is checked by BTS. b31 b20 b0 DR0104=01010101010101011010101010101010 This bit is checked. Since the 20th bit is “1,” C (R7F0) = “1” is set. 5-71 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-4 Ladder format Shift right Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z ↕ SHR (d, n) Instruction format SHR (d, n) I/O to be shifted n Number of bits to be shifted Upper case: W 38 46 Lower case: DW Steps SHR (d, n) 3 Usable I/O Remark Average Maximum Number of steps Condition d Processing time (µs) R7F4 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { Constant Item number Other { { The constant is set in decimal. Function • • • Shifts the contents of d to the right (toward the lower digits) by n bits. Sets n bits of SD (R7F2) contents starting with the most significant bit. Sets the content of the nth bit from the least significant bit in C (R7F0). Before execution d n bits B SD SD (R7F2) C (R7F0) After execution SD B SD SD SD SD n bits Most significant bit (MSB) If d is a word: If d is a double word: Least significant bit (LSB) Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 15) of the lower 4 bits (b3 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 15 (decimal). Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 31) of the lower 5 bits (b4 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 31 (decimal). Notes • If n is equal to “0,” the shifting is not performed. The previous state is retained in C. 5-72 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Program example X00000 R7F2 X00000 . . . . . Defective unit input To SD X00001 . . . . . Conveyor movement X00001 DIF1 SHR (DR0000,1) R7F0 Y00100 Defective unit output Carry Y00001 . . . . . LD OUT X00000 R7F2 LD X00001 AND DIF1 [ SHR ] (DR0000,1) LD OUT R7F0 Y00100 • • • There exists a conveyor that has 16 stands and is moving to the right. Each time the conveyor moves one stand to the right, a pulse input enters X1. There is a sensor on the left end of the conveyor, and when a defective unit is placed on the conveyor, X00000 turns on. X00000 (sensor input) and X00001 (conveyor movement) signals are as follows: X00000 X00001 • As the conveyor moves to the right, the data is also shifted one bit at a time, and when data exits to the carry (on the right end of the conveyor), the (Y00100) solenoid valve turns on and rejects the defective unit. Sensor (X00000) b16 b0 X00001 X00000 Conveyor movement b16 0 b0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 (Y00100) Solenoid valve Y00000 0 C (R7F0) SD (R7F2) Shifts one bit at a time 5-73 SHR (d, n) Program description Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-5 Ladder format Shift left Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z ↕ SHL (d, n) Instruction format 3 Usable I/O X SHL (d, n) n Number of bits to be shifted Upper case: W 38 46 Lower case: DW Steps SHL (d, n) I/O to be shifted Remark Average Maximum Number of steps Condition d Processing time (µs) R7F4 Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { Constant Item number Other { { The constant is set in decimal. Function • • • Shifts the contents of d to the left (toward the upper digits) by n bits. Sets n bits of SD (R7F2) contents starting with the least significant bit. Sets the content of the nth bit from the most significant bit in C (R7F0). d Before execution n bits B SD C (R7F0) SD (R7F2) After execution B SD SD Most significant bit (MSB) If d is a word: If d is a double word: SD SD SD n bits Least significant bit (LSB) Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 15) of the lower 4 bits (b3 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 15 (decimal). Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 31) of the lower 5 bits (b4 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 31 (decimal). Notes • If n is equal to “0,” the shifting is not performed. The previous state is retained in C. Program example R7F2 X00000 X00001 DIF1 R7F0 SHL (DR0000 ,1 ) Y00100 LD OUT LD AND [ SHL ] LD OUT X00000 R7F2 X00001 DIF1 (DR0000,1) R7F0 Y00100 Program description • • • The R7F2 value is determined by the on/off of X00000. The content of DR0000 is shifted to the left by one bit when X00001 rises. At this time, the value of R7F2 is set in b0 and the value of b31 (b15 of WR1) in R7F0. The Y00100 turns on/off depending on the b31 value of DR0000 (b15 of WR1) prior to the shift. 5-74 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-6 Ladder format Rotate right Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z ↕ ROR (d, n) 3 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, • • • • 75 Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM I/O to be rotated Number of bits to be rotated Function n 47 Lower case: DW Steps ROR (d, n) d Upper case: W Number of steps Condition Usable I/O Average Maximum { { { { { { { { Other { { The constant is set in decimal. Rotates the contents of d to the right (toward the lower digits) by n bits. The content of the least significant bit is input to C (R7F0) while the content of C (R7F0) is input to the most significant bit. This is repeated n times. The content of C (R7F0) is set in the nth bit from the most significant bit. The content of the nth bit from the least significant bit is set in C (R7F0). Before execution d n bits Bn B3 B2 B1 C (R7F0) After execution Bn-1 Most significant bit (MSB) If d is a word: If d is a double word: Bn B3 B2 B1 C n bits Least significant bit (LSB) Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 15) of the lower 4 bits (b3 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 15 (decimal). Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 31) of the lower 5 bits (b4 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 31 (decimal). Notes • If n is equal to “0,” the rotation is not performed. The previous state is retained in C. Program example R000 DIF0 LD R000 AND DIF0 [ R0R (WR0000,1) ] R0R (WR0000 ,1 ) Program description • When R000 rises, WR0000 is shifted to the right by one bit. At this time, the value of the least significant bit, b0, is set in R7F0, and the value of R7F0 immediately prior to the shift is set in the most significant bit, b15. 5-75 ROR (d, n) Instruction format Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 Constant Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-7 Ladder format Rotate left Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z ↕ ROL (d, n) Instruction format Upper case: W 3 X ROL (d, n) I/O to be rotated n Number of bits to be rotated 54 Lower case: DW Steps ROL (d, n) d 46 Number of steps Condition Usable I/O Remark Average Maximum Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { Constant Item number Other { { The constant is set in decimal. Function • • • Rotates the contents of d to the left (toward the upper digits) by n bits. The content of C (R7F0) is set in the nth bit from the least significant bit. The content of the nth bit from the least significant bit is set in C (R7F0). Before execution d n bits B1 B2 B3 Bn C (R7F0) After execution Bn C Bn-1 B1 B2 B3 n bits Most significant bit (MSB) If d is a word: If d is a double word: Least significant bit (LSB) Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 15) of the lower 4 bits (b3 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 15 (decimal). Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 31) of the lower 5 bits (b4 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 31 (decimal). Notes • If n is equal to “0,” the rotation is not performed. The previous state is retained in C. 5-76 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Program example X00001 DIF1 LD AND [ R7F0 ROL ROL ] R7F0= 0 ROL(DR0000,1) ROL(DR0002,1) X00001 DIF1 =0 (DR0000,1) (DR0002,1) Program description When X00001 rises, the 64-bit data is shifted one bit at a time. The space after the shift is filled with “0.” Overall movement C b31 DR0002 b0 C b31 DR0000 b0 C (R7F0) 0 0 DR0000 b31 5-77 ROL (d, n) • Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-8 Ladder format Logical shift right Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z ↕ LSR (d, n) Instruction format Average Maximum Upper case: W 3 X LSR (d, n) I/O to be shifted n Number of bits to be shifted 45 Lower case: DW Steps LSR (d, n) d 36 Number of steps Condition Usable I/O Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { Constant Item number Other { { The constant is set in decimal. Function • • • Shifts the contents of d to the right (toward the lower digits) by n bits. “0” is set from the most significant bit to the nth bit. The content of the nth bit from the least significant bit is set in C (R7F0). d Before execution n bits B C (R7F0) After execution 0 0 0 0 B (R7F0) 0 n bits Most significant bit (MSB) If d is a word: If d is a double word: Least significant bit (LSB) Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 15) of the lower 4 bits (b3 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 15 (decimal). Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 31) of the lower 5 bits (b4 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 31 (decimal). Notes • If n is equal to “0,” the shifting is not performed. The previous state is retained in C. Program example X00001 DIF1 LSR LD X00001 AND DIF1 [ LSR (WR0000 ,1) ] (WR0000 ,1 ) Program description • When X00001 rises, the content of WR0000 is shifted to the right by one bit. At this time, “0” is set in b15 and the value of b0 immediately prior to the shift is set in R7F0. 5-78 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-9 Ladder format Logical shift left Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z ↕ LSL (d, n) n Number of bits to be shifted 45 3 X I/O to be shifted 36 Lower case: DW Steps LSL (d, n) d Upper case: W Number of steps Condition Usable I/O Average Maximum Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { Other { { The constant is set in decimal. Function • • • Shifts the contents of d to the left (toward the upper digits) by n bits. “0” is set from the least significant bit to the nth bit. The content of the nth bit from the most significant bit is set in C (R7F0). Before execution d n bits B C (R7F0) After execution 0 B 0 0 0 0 n bits Most significant bit (MSB) If d is a word: If d is a double word: Least significant bit (LSB) Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 15) of the lower 4 bits (b3 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 15 (decimal). Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 31) of the lower 5 bits (b4 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 31 (decimal). Notes • If n is equal to “0,” the shifting is not performed. The previous state is retained in C. Program example X00001 DIF1 LSL LD X00001 AND DIF1 [ LSL (WR0000 ,1) ] (WR0000 ,1 ) Program description • When X00001 rises, the content of WR0000 is shifted to the left by one bit. At this time, “0” is set in b0 and the value of b15 immediately prior to the shift is set in R7F0. 5-79 LSL (d, n) Instruction format Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 Constant Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-10 Ladder format BCD shift right Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z BSR (d, n) Instruction format Average Maximum Upper case: W 3 Usable I/O X BSR (d, n) n Number of digits to be shifted 40 Lower case: DW Steps BSR (d, n) I/O to be shifted 32 Number of steps Condition d Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Y Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { Constant Item number Other { { The constant is set in decimal. Function • • • Shifts the contents of d to the right (toward the lower digits) by n digits (1 digit is equivalent to 4 bits). “0” is set from the most significant bit to the nth digit. The digits from least significant bit to the nth digit are discarded. Before execution n digits After execution Discarded 0 0000 0000 n digits Least significant bit (LSB) Most significant bit (MSB) If d is a word: If d is a double word: Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 3) of the lower 2 bits (b1, b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 3 (decimal). Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 7) of the lower 3 bits (b2 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 7 (decimal). Notes • If n is equal to “0,” the shifting is not performed. Program example X00001 DIF1 BSR LD X00001 AND DIF1 [ BSR (WR0000 ,1) ] (WR0000 ,1 ) Program description • When X00001 rises, the content of WR0000 is regarded as BCD code and shifted to the right by four bits. At this time, the values in the lower 4 bits (b3 to b0) are deleted and “0000” is set in the upper four bits (b12 to b15). Before the shift H After the shift 1 2 3 4 0001 0010 0011 0100 H Deleted 0 1 0000 0001 Set to “0” 5-80 2 3 0010 0011 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-11 Ladder format BCD shift left Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z BSL (d, n) 3 Usable I/O X n Number of digits to be shifted 32 39 Lower case: DW Steps BSL (d, n) I/O to be shifted Upper case: W Number of steps Condition d Average Maximum Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { Other { { The constant is set in decimal. Function • • • Shifts the contents of d to the left (toward the upper digits) by n digits (one digit is equivalent to 4 bits). “0” is set from the least significant bit to the nth digit. The digits from the most significant bit to the nth digit are discarded. d Before execution n digits Discarded After execution 0000 0000 Most significant bit (MSB) If d is a word: If d is a double word: 0 n digits Least significant bit (LSB) Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 3) of the lower 2 bits (b1, b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 3 (decimal). Designates the shift amount, depending on the contents (0 to 7) of the lower 3 bits (b2 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC). (Upper bits are ignored and considered as “0.”) The n (constant) can be set to 0 to 7 (decimal). Notes • If n is equal to “0,” the shifting is not performed. Program example X00001 DIF1 BSL LD X00001 AND DIF1 [ BSL (WR0000 ,1) ] (WR0000 ,1 ) Program description • When X00001 rises, the content of WR0000 is regarded as BCD code and shifted to the left by four bits. At this time, the data of the lower four bits are deleted and “0000” is set in the upper four bits. Before the shift H Deleted 1 2 0001 0010 3 After the shift 4 0011 0100 H 2 3 4 0010 0011 0100 5-81 0 0000 Set to “0” BSL (d, n) Instruction format Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 Constant Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-12 Ladder format Block transfer (MOVE) Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z MOV (d, s, n) Instruction format Number of steps Condition As per the table below. Steps MOV (d, s, n) Remark Average Maximum 4 Usable I/O MOV (d, s, n) X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM d Transfer destination head I/O { { s Transfer source head I/O { { n Number of bits (words) to be transferred { { { { Constant Item number { Other The constant is set in decimal. Function • • Transfers n bits (words) between s and s + n − 1 to d + n − 1. The values between s and s + n − 1 are retained. However, if the transfer source and transfer destination ranges overlap, the transferred values will be used. Before execution n bits (words) s+n-1 s After execution d d+n-1 If n is a word: If n is a constant: The contents (0 to 255) of the lower 8 bits (b7 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC) are set to the number of bits (words) to be transferred. 0 to 255 (decimal) can be designated for the number of bits (words) to be transferred. Notes • • Use this instruction so that d + n − 1 and s + n − 1 do not exceed the I/O range (R7BF, M3FFF, WRFFF, and WM3FF). If the I/O range is exceeded, DER is equal to '1' and the transfer is performed to the maximum range. If n is equal to “0,” the block transfer is not performed and DER (R7F4) will be set to “0.” n 1 16 32 64 128 255 Processing time (µs) (Average) Bit Word 153 124 165 154 166 197 175 282 199 430 226 780 5-82 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Program example • The data in WM000 to WM01F is transferred to the area WR020 to WR03F. R001 DIF0 MOV (WR020,WM000,32) Y00100 R7F4 SET LD R001 AND DIF0 [ MOV (WR020,WM000,32) ] R7F4 Y00100 MOV (d, s, n) LD SET Program description • 32 words of data are transferred. Transfer source area Transfer destination area WM000 WR010 WM020 WR01F WM03F 5-83 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-13 Ladder format Copy Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z COPY (d, s, n) Instruction format Number of steps Condition As per the table below. Steps COPY (d, s, n) Remark Average Maximum 4 COPY (d, s, n) Usable I/O X d Copy destination head I/O s Copy source head I/O n Number of bits (words) to be copied Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { Double word DR, Constant Item number Other { { { { { { { { { { { { The constant is set in decimal. Function • • • The value of s (bit, word) is copied from d to d + n - 1. The value of s is retained. A bit is copied to bits and a word is copied to words. s s s s s s s s s s s d d+n-1 n bits (words) If n is a word: If n is a constant: The contents (0 to 255) of the lower 8 bits (b7 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC) are set to the number of bits (words) to be copied. 0 to 255 (decimal) can be designated for the number of bits (words) to be copied. Notes • • Use this instruction so that d + n - 1 does not exceed the I/O range (R7BF, M3FFF, WRFFF, and WM3FF). If it exceeds the I/O range, DER is equal to '1' and transfers to the maximum range. If n is equal to “0,” the block copy is not be performed and DER (R7F4) will be set to “0.” n 1 16 32 64 128 255 Processing time (µs) (Average) Bit Word 80 73 83 114 83 148 88 224 95 381 109 785 5-84 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Program example The default value (H2020) is set in the range of WR0100 to WR01FE. R7E3 LD R7E3 [ COPY (WR0100, H2020,255) COPY (WR0100, H2020, 255) ] Program description WR0100 Not fixed WR0100 Not fixed • • • • • • H20 H20 H20 H20 • • • • • • • • • • H20 H20 H20 H20 After RUN WR01FE Not fixed Not fixed WR01FE 5-85 255 words (510 bytes) COPY (d, s, n) WR0100 to WR01FE is considered as the communication data area and is filled with space code (H20) as the default value during the first scan after RUN starts. R7E3: The first scan ON after RUN Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-14 Ladder format Block exchange (EXCHANGE) Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z XCG (d1, d2, n) Instruction format Number of steps Condition 4 XCG (d1, d2, n) Usable I/O X Exchange destination head I/O Exchange source head I/O d1 d2 Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { Number of bits (words) to be exchanged n Average Maximum As per the table below. Steps XCG (d1, d2, n) Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 { { { { Constant Item number { Other The constant is set in decimal. Function • • Exchanges the contents of the n bits from d1 to d1 + n - 1 and the contents between d2 and d2 + n - 1. Bits are exchanged with bits and words are exchanged with words. d1+n-1 d2+n-1 If n is a word: If n is a constant: n bits (words) d1 d2 The contents (0 to 255) of the lower 8 bits (b7 to b0) of n (WX, WY, WR, WM, TC) are set to the number of bits (words) to be exchanged. 0 to 255 (decimal) can be designated for the number of bits (words) to be exchanged. Notes • • Use this instruction so that d1 + n − 1 and d2 + n - 1 do not exceed the I/O range (R7BF, M3FFF, WRFFF, and WM3FF). If they exceeds the I/O range, DER is equal to '1' and the exchange is performed up to the maximum range with respect to the smaller number of bits (words) specified in d1 and d2. If n is equal to “0,” the block exchange is not performed and DER (R7F4) will be set to “0.” Program example X00001 DIF1 LD X00001 AND DIF1 [ XCG (WM000, WM100, 256) ] XCG (WM000, WM100, 256) Program description • When X00001 rises, the contents of WM000 to WM0FF are exchanged with the contents of WM100 to WM1FF. Processing time (µs) (Average) n Bit Word 1 139 120 16 338 159 32 528 207 64 918 284 128 1899 449 255 3695 779 5-86 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Ladder format NOT Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z NOT (d) Instruction format Number of steps Condition Steps NOT (d) 2 Usable I/O d X I/O to be reversed Bit R, TD, SS, Y M CU, CT { { Word WR, 27 22 28 Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { Function • Reverses the contents of d. Before execution 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 After execution Notes • Use edge trigger as the startup condition for this instruction. Program example R000 DIF0 NOT (WR0000) LD R000 AND DIF0 [ NOT WR0000 ] Program description • When R000 rises, the content of WR0000 is reversed. Example) If WR0000 is H1234, WR0000 = HEDCB after the instruction is executed; WR0000 = H1234 when executed again 5-87 Remark Average Maximum { Upper case: B Middle case: W Lower case: DW Other NOT (d) Application instructions-15 Constant Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-16 Ladder format Two's complement (NEGATE) Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z NEG (d) Instruction format Upper case: W 22 29 Lower case: DW Number of steps Condition Steps NEG (d) 2 Usable I/O NEG (d) d Remark Average Maximum X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { I/O to take complement { { Constant Item number Other { Function • Calculates two's complements of d (Reverses each bit contained in d and adds “1.” However, C (R7F0) remains unchanged). Before execution 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 + After execution 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Notes • Use edge trigger as the startup condition for this instruction. Program example R000 DIF0 NEG (WR0000) LD R000 AND DIF0 [ NEG WR0000 ] Program description • When R000 rises, 2's complement of the content of WR0000 is obtained. Example) If WR0000 is H1234, WR0000 = HEDCC after the instruction is executed; WR0000 = H1234 when executed again 5-88 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-17 Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z ↕ Upper case: W 30 4 Lower case: DW Number of steps Condition Steps Word 3 Double word 4 ABS (d, s) X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT I/O after absolute value is taken I/O before absolute value is taken s Remark Average Maximum Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { { { { Other { Function • • • • Given s is signed, set the absolute value of s in d. If s is positive or 0: The content of s is set to d. C (R7F0) is set to “0.” If s is negative: Two's complements of the contents of s are set in d. C (R7F0) is set to “1.” Perform with d and s as both words or both double words. Example: R000 DIF0 ABS (WR0000, WM0000) (When the value of WM is positive or 0) WM0000 = H4C1A d (When the value of WM is negative) WM0000 = HCC1A s R7F0 WM0000 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 s d s+1 WM0000 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 s R7F0 0 0011001111100101 1 + WR0000 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 d • When s is a word: • When s is a double word: 0 WR0000 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 d 0 to 32767 (decimal) correspond to H000 to H7FFF (hexadecimal). −32768 to −1(decimal) correspond to H8000 to HFFFF (hexadecimal). 0 to 2147483647 (decimal) correspond to H00000000 to H7FFFFFFF (hexadecimal). −2147483648 to −1 (decimal) correspond to H80000000 to HFFFFFFFF (hexadecimal). Notes • 1 Use edge trigger as the startup condition for this instruction. 5-89 ABS (d, s) Instruction format Usable I/O Processing time (µs) R7F4 ABS (d, s) d Absolute value Constant Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Binary → BCD conversion Name Application instructions-18 Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z BCD (d, s) Instruction format Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 Average Maximum Upper case: W 79 89 Lower case: DW Number of steps Condition Steps Word 3 Double word 4 BCD (d, s) Usable I/O BCD (d, s) X d I/O after conversion (BCD) s I/O before conversion (BIN) Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { { { { Constant Item number Other { Function • • The result of the content conversion of s from binary to BCD is output to d. If the conversion result of s exceeds the number of BCD data digits in d, DER (R7F4) is set to '1' and the instruction will not be executed. If s is a word: set s so that H0000 ≤ s ≤ H270F (0 to 9999). If s is a double word: set s so that H00000000 ≤ s ≤ H5F5E0FF (0 to 99999999). Before execution s 1 0 0 B 0 1 1 0 4 1 1 0 1 F 0 0 1 1 1 1 (Binary) 1B4FH=6991 After execution d 6 0 1 9 1 0 1 0 9 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 (BCD) Combinations of d and s. d s Word Word Double word Double word Notes • If a data error occurred, the previous contents of d are retained. Program example X00000 BCD (WM0010, WR000 LD [ BCD ] ) X00000 (WM0010, WR000) Program description • When X00000 turns on, the content of WR000 is converted from binary to BCD and output to WM0010. WR000 H1B4F After conversion WM0010 H6691 5-90 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications BCD → Binary conversion Name Application instructions-19 Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z BIN (d, s) Usable I/O X I/O after conversion (BIN) s I/O before conversion (BCD) Upper case: W 49 75 Lower case: DW Number of steps Condition Steps Word 3 Double word 4 BIN (d, s) d Average Maximum Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Y Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { { { { { { { { { { { Other { Function • • The result of the content conversion of s from BCD to binary is output to d. If the contents of s are not BCD data (if A through F is included in the data), DER (R7F4) is set to '1' and the conversion will not be executed (d remains unchanged). Before execution s 6 0 1 After execution d 9 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 9 0 1 1 0 B 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 4 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 (BCD) F 0 0 1 1 (Binary) Combinations of d and s. d s Word Word Double word Double word Notes • If a data error occurred, the previous contents of d are retained. Program example X00000 BIN (WM0010, WR000 LD X00000 [ BIN (WM0010, WR000) ] ) Program description • When X00000 turns on, the content of WR000 is converted from BCD to binary and output. WR000 H6691 After conversion WM0010 H1B4F 5-91 BIN (d, s) Instruction format Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 Constant Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-20 Ladder format Decode Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z DECO (d, s, n) Instruction format Number of steps Condition As per the table below. Steps DECO (d, s, n) Remark Average Maximum 4 DECO (d, s, n) Usable I/O X d Decode destination head I/O s Word I/O to be decoded n Number of bits to be decoded Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Other { { { { { { { 1 to 8 (decimal) Function • • Decodes the lower n bits of s to 2n and outputs '1' to the decoded bits in the bit rows between d and d + 2n – 1 (where n = 1 to 8). Note that the value “0” is output for bits other than the decoded bits in the bit row d + 2n – 1. If n is “0,” the instruction will not be executed, and the contents of d to d + 2n – 1 remain unchanged. b15 b7 s b0 0BH d+2 n-1 d+B 0 1 d 0 0 n n bits (n = 1 to 8) 2 Notes • • Use this instruction so that d + 2n– 1 does not exceed the I/O range (R7BF and M3FFF). If it exceeds the I/O range, DER is equal to '1' and the decoding is performed at the maximum range starting from d. Use 1 to 8 for n. Program example R100 DIF1 DECO (R000, WX0000, 4) LD R100 AND DIF1 [ DECO (R000, WX0000, 4) ] Program description • When WX0000 = H000F, R00F, which is the 15th bit from R000 among the bits indicated by the lower four bit values of WX0000, is set to “1” upon leading of R100. n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Processing time (µs) Average Maximum 105 – 115 – 195 – 195 – 317 – 481 – 829 – 1586 – 5-92 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-21 Ladder format Encode Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z ↕ ENCO (d, s, n) Instruction format Number of steps Condition As per the table below. Steps 4 Usable I/O X d Decode destination head I/O s Word I/O to be encoded n Number of bits to be encoded Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { Other { { { 1 to 8 (decimal) Function • • • • Encodes the bit location 2n in the range between s and s + 2n – 1 where the bit is “1,” and outputs the result to d (n = 1 to 8). Upper bits (16-n) of d are set to “0.” If n is “0,” the instruction will not be executed and the contents of d retain the original values. If there are more than one bits that are set to “1” between s and s + 2n – 1, the upper bit location will be encoded. If all the bits from s to s + 2n – 1 are '0', '0' is output to d, and C (R7F0) is equal to '1.' In other cases, C (R7F0) is set to '0.' n s+2 -1 s+B 0 1 s 0 0 b15 b7 b0 0BH d n n bits (1 to 8) 2 Notes • • Use this instruction so that s + 2n− 1 does not exceed the I/O range (R7BF and M3FFF). If it exceeds the I/O range, DER is set to '1' and the encoding is performed at the maximum range starting from s. Use 1 to 8 for n. Program example X00001 DIF1 ENCO (WR0000, R000, 4) LD X00001 AND DIF1 [ ENCO (WR0000, R000, 4) ] Program description • Upon the leading of X00001, the most significant bit that is set to “1” is detected within the row of bits R000 to R00F (24 –1 = 15 bits), and a four-bit binary number is set in the word I/O of d. Example) If “1” is set in the 7th and 6th bits of R000 to R00F, H0007 is set in WR0000. n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Processing time (µs) Average Maximum 128 – 128 – 128 – 187 – 126 – 126 – 126 – 126 – 5-93 ENCO (d, s, n) ENCO (d, s, n) Remark Average Maximum Constant Item number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Item number Name Application instructions-22 Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z Instruction format X BCU (d, s) s Upper case: W 33 42 Lower case: DW Condition Steps Word 3 Double word 4 Y Bit R, TD, SS, Word WR, Double word DR, M CU, CT WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Usable I/O Number of bits set to 1 Remark Average Maximum Number of steps BCU (d, s) I/O that counts the bits set to 1 Processing time (µs) R7F4 BCU (d, s) d Bit count { { { { { { { { { { Other Function • Of the contents of s (16 bits for word and 32 bits for double word), the number of bits that are set to “1” are output to d (0 to 32). 15 15(32) 0 5 d s 0 to 32 • • • 1 0 • • • 1 1 • • • 1 • • • 1 • • • • • 1 1 1 • • • 1 Number of bits that are set to "1" Program example X00002 DIF2 BCU (WR0000, DR0020) LD X00002 AND DIF2 [ BCU (WR0000, DR0020) ] Program description • At the leading edge of X00002, the number of bits that are set to “1” among the data input to DR0020 is counted, and set to WR0000. Example) In the case of A 7 1 4 F 1 5 3 DR0020 = 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 the number of bits set to "1" is 16 (decimal). Therefore, the result is WR0000 = H0010. 5-94 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-23 Ladder format Swap Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z SWAP (d) Instruction format Number of steps Condition Remark Average Maximum 25 Steps SWAP (d) 2 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { I/O to be exchanged Other SWAP (d) Usable I/O d Processing time (µs) R7F4 Constant Item number { Function • Swaps the upper 8 bits and lower 8 bits contained in d. (Before execution) d 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 (After execution) d 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 Notes • Use edge trigger as the startup condition for this instruction. Program example X00000 DIF0 LD X00000 AND DIF0 [ SWAP (WR0010) ] SWAP (WR0010 ) Program description • The upper and lower bits of WR0010 are swapped at the leading edge of X00000, and are stored in WR0010. WR0010 H1234 Before execution WR0010 H3412 After execution Note: Since a scan is executed when there is no leading edge DIF0, the upper and lower bits of WR0010 are swapped every time a scan is executed. 5-95 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-24 Ladder format Unit Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z UNIT (d, s, n) Instruction format Number of steps Condition Steps UNIT (d, s, n) UNIT (d, s, n) X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, As per the table below. Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Unity result write destination I/O Unity destination head I/O s { Other { { Numbers of words to be united n Remark Average Maximum 4 Usable I/O d Processing time (µs) R7F4 Constant Item number { n=0 to 4 Function • • • • Sets the values in the lower four bits of each of the n (1 to 4) words starting from s to the lower four bits of each word in d. If n is 1 to 3, the bits not set in d will be “0.” The data stored in s to s + n – 1 will be retained even if UNIT is executed. Use this instruction so that s + n - 1 does not exceed the I/O range (WRFFF and WM3FF). If it exceeds the I/O range, DER is equal to '1' and the lower four bits within the range between s and I/O will be set in d. Upper digits When n=4 4 bits s B1 s+1 B2 s+2 B3 s+3 d B4 Lower digits B3 B4 Ignored Notes • • When n=0, it is not executed. When n>5, it is not executed. n 0 1 2 3 4 Processing time (µs) Average Maximum 75 – 100 – 103 – 106 – 109 – 5-96 B2 B1 When n is 1 : B2 to B4 of d are 0 When n is 2 : B3 to B4 of d are 0 When n is 3 : B4 of d is 0 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Program example X00001 DIF0 UNIT (WY0010, WR0000, 3) LD X00001 AND DIF0 [ UNIT (WY0010, WR0000, 3) ] Program description 3-digit BCD input display device Input Line No. 28-point type Conveyor No. Product No. Output 3 Y111 to Y108 2 Y107 to Y104 WR0002 (Line No.) Data “3” WR0001 (Conveyor No.) Data “2” WR0000 (Product No.) Data “7” 5-97 7 Y103 to Y100 UNIT (d, s, n) A 3-digit BCD input display device is connected to the WY0010, and each digit displays WR0000 to WR0002 data independently. (Only the lower four bits are considered the valid data for WR0000 to WR0002.) Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Application instructions-25 Ladder format Distribute Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z DIST (d, s, n) Instruction format 4 Usable I/O DIST (d, s, n) X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Distribution result write destination head I/O I/O to be distributed s As per the table below. Steps DIST (d, s, n) Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Other { { { { { { Number of words to be distributed n Remark Average Maximum Number of steps Condition d Processing time (µs) R7F4 Constant Item number { n=0 to 4 Function • • • • Distributes s into four bit sections and sets to the lower four bits of the n words starting from d. The upper 12 bits of the range d to d + n – 1 will be “0.” The value of s will be retained even if DIST is executed. Use this instruction so that d + n - 1 does not exceed the I/O range (WRFFF and WM3FF). If it exceeds the I/O range, DER is equal to '1' and the distribution data for s will be set in the lower four bits within the range between d and the I/O. Upper digits When n = 4: 4 bits d 0 0 B1 d+1 0 0 B2 d+2 0 0 B3 d+3 0 0 B4 s B4 Lower digits B3 Notes • When n=0, it is not executed. n 0 1 2 3 4 Processing time (µs) Average Maximum 62 – 87 – 90 – 92 – 94 – 5-98 B2 B1 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Program example X01001 DIF0 DIST (WR0000, WX0000, 4) LD X00001 AND DIF0 [ DIST (WR0000, WX0000, 4) ] Program description Input 28-point type Output 9 7 4 6 X015 to X012 X011 to X008 X007 to X004 X003 to X000 WR0003 =H0009 WR0002 =H0007 WR0001 =H0004 WR0000 =H0006 5-99 DIST (d, s, n) A 4-bit 4-digit Digit switch is connected to the WX0000, and the data for each digit is stored in WR0000 to WR0003 as independent data. Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Control instructions-1 Ladder format Normal scan end Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z END Instruction format Number of steps Condition Remark Average Maximum 714 Steps END 1 Usable I/O X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Other Function • END • • • Indicates the end of a normal scan program. (The execution of this instruction returns to the beginning of the program, and a normal scan is executed.) This instruction is not required when there are no subroutine programs or interrupt scan programs. If there is a subroutine program or interrupting program, write this instruction at the end of the normal scan program. This instruction is used only once in a program. Do not use any startup conditions with this instruction. Notes • The END instruction is checked prior to the execution, and if there is an error, the following error codes are set in the special internal output WRF001. Also, the CPU error code '34' is set to special internal output WRF000. CPU error code 34 Special internal output Error code WRF001 H0010 There is no END instruction. H0022 There are two or more END instructions. H0032 A startup condition is used with the END instruction. Instruction for use Normal scan program END instruction END SB n Subroutine program INT n Interrupt program Error description 5-100 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Control instructions-2 Ladder format Scan conditional end Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z CEND (s) Instruction format s Scan end condition Upper case : 5 Conditions do not meet Steps CEND (s) 2 Bit R, TD, SS, CU, CT X Y M { { { Remark Average Maximum Number of steps Condition Usable I/O Processing time (µs) R7F4 Word WR, WX WY WM TC Lower case : 707 Double word DR, DX DY DM Conditions meet Constant Item number Other • • • • If the scan end condition (s) is on, the execution of this instruction returns to the head of the scan program and executes the program. If (s) is off, the next instruction is executed. This instruction can only be used in normal scan programs, and can be used as many times as desired. This instruction can specify a startup condition. In this case, if the startup condition and (s) are both on, this instruction is executed. Notes • The CEND instruction is checked prior to the execution, and if there is an error, the following error codes are set in the special internal output WRF001. Also, the CPU error code '34' is set to special internal output WRF000. CPU error code Special internal output Error code 34 WRF001 H0023 Instruction for use Program head Normal scan program When R000 is on, to program head CEND (R000) Normal scan program CEND (R001) When R000 is off, the next instruction is executed. When R001 is on, to program When R001 is off, the next instruction is executed. Normal scan program END 5-101 Error description The CEND instruction is found after the END instruction. CEND (s) Function Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Control instructions-3 Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z 1] z z z Instruction format Number of steps Condition Remark Average Maximum 32 Steps JMP n n Processing time (µs) R7F4 JMP n Usable I/O Unconditional jump (JUMP) 2 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number { Code number Other 0 to 255 (Decimal) Function • JMP n • • • • If the startup condition of JMP n switches on, the control jumps the program from this instruction to the LBL n of the same code number. Always use JMP n and LBL n in pairs. If the startup condition is not established, the next instruction will be executed. To set this instruction in conjunction with other instructions in the same arithmetic-operation box, insert this instruction at the end of the box. The JMP n instruction is valid only within the same scan program. (A jump to a subroutine or interrupt scan cannot be performed from a normal scan, nor vice versa.) Nesting of JMP n instructions is possible, but note so that an overload error does not occur. Notes • This instruction is checked prior to the execution, and if there is an error, the following error codes are set in the special internal outputs R7F3 and WRF015. In this case, jump is not performed and the next instruction will be executed. Special internal output R7F3=1 WRF015 Error code Error description H0015 There is no LBL n. H0040 A jump is attempted to a different program area. Instruction for use JMP n Program • When the startup condition turns on, it jumps to LBL n. • If there is a timer within the program it jumped to, the progress value is updated, but since instructions are not executed, output will not be turned on even if the ON conditions are met. LBL n Program 5-102 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Control instructions-4 Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z 1] z z z Instruction format s Jump condition 3 Conditions do not meet 3 Usable I/O Upper case : Steps CJMP n (s) X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Lower case : 32 Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Conditions meet { { { Remark Average Maximum Number of steps Condition Code number Processing time (µs) R7F4 CJMP n (s) n Conditional jump Constant Item number Other 0 to 255 (Decimal) { • • • • • If the jump condition (s) of CJMP n(s) switches on, the control jumps the program from this instruction to the LBL n of the same code number. Always use CJMP n(s) and LBL n in pairs. If the startup or jump condition is not established, the next instruction will be executed. To set this instruction in conjunction with other instructions in the same arithmetic-operation box, caution must be used because the jump takes place without performing the operations specified after the instruction. The CJMP n(s) instruction is valid only within the same scan program. (A jump to a subroutine or interrupt scan cannot be performed from a normal scan, nor vice versa.) Nesting of CJMP n(s) instructions is possible, but note so that an overload error does not occur. Notes • This instruction is checked prior to the execution, and if there is an error, the following error codes are set in the special internal outputs R7F3 and WRF015. In this case, jump is not performed and the next instruction will be executed. Special internal output R7F3=1 WRF015 Error code Error description H0015 There is no LBL n. H0040 A jump is attempted to a different program area. Instruction for use R101 CJMP n (R000) Program • When the startup condition and the R000 jump condition bit I/O are both on, it jumps to LBL n. • If there is a timer within the program it jumped to, the progress value is updated, but since instructions are not executed, output will not be turned on even if the ON conditions are met. LBL n Program ????? 5-103 CJMP n (s) Function Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Syntax of JMP, CJMP 6] An overlap of JMP instructions with the same code number is valid. 1] LBL n with the same code number as the code number n of the JMP instruction is required. JMP 5 JMP 5 CJMP 5 • If JMP 1 is executed when there is no LBL 1, an LBL undefined error occurs. JMP 1 will do nothing and execute the next processing of program A. JMP 1 Program A LBL 2 Program B LBL 5 2] Jump is not permitted to outside the area in which the JMP instruction resides. Program head Normal scan area JMP 1 LBL 7 JMP 2 LBL 3 END Subroutine area CJMP n (s) Subroutine area Interrupt scan area SB JMP 3 LBL 2 JMP 4 RTS SB LBL 4 JMP 5 LBL 6 PTS 7] A startup condition can be programmed with respect to JMP instructions. Startup condition • When the JMP 1 instruction is executed, since LBL 1 is not in the normal scan area, a "jump outside the area" error will be generated. The JMP 1 instruction will do nothing and execute the next processing of program. X00000 X00001 X00002 JMP 0 Program A Program B • JMP 2 to JMP 7 perform similar processing. X00003 Program C LBL 0 INTO JMP 6 LBL 5 JMP 7 8] The CJMP instruction also follows the same syntax as 1] through 7]. LBL 1 RTI 3] Code number n of the JMP instruction and the LBL n with the same code number may not be overlapped. JMP 5 A] LBL 5 B] LBL 5 Note 1: When a JMP instruction jumps to LBL, the status of each I/O between JMP and LBL is retained. However, the timer progress value will be updated. X00000 • In the pre-operation process, the label instructions A] and B] have 5 as the code numbers, so a duplicate definition error will occur. X00001 JMP 0 JMP 1 JMP 2 LBL 1 LBL 0 JMP 3 LBL 2 JMP 4 LBL 3 LBL 4 X00000 Program X00001 LBL 1 JMP 1 MCS0 Program LBL 2 X00002 CJMP1(X00000) TD0 • If X00000 turns on after X00001 turns on, the progress value of TD0 will 0.1s 100 be updated even if a jump is performed from JMP 1 to LBL 1. If X00000 remains on, TD0 will not turn on even if its progress value exceeds 100. Note 2: If the JMP instruction is used in conjunction with the MCS or MCR instruction, the following actions will result, so exercise caution when programming. 5] The JMP instruction can jump to a location before the instruction itself. LBL 0 JMP 1 LBL 1 4] Nesting of JMP instructions is allowed. JMP 0 • If a jump is performed from JMP 0 to LBL 0, programs A, B and C will not be executed. • JMP 0 will jump to LBL 0, which is a location before the JMP instruction. • When input X00000 turns on, the loop between LBL 0 and JMP 0 is escaped by jumping from CJMP 1 (X00000) to LBL 1. Note 3: • If there is no instruction as CJMP 1 (X00000) to escape from the loop, the loop from LBL 0 to JMP 0 will continue endlessly. 5-104 Y00100 MCR0 • When JMP 2 does not jump, Y00100 will turn on when X00001 and X00002 are both on. When JMP 2 does jump, if • X00000 is on, Y00100 will follow the on/off of X00002 regardless of the on/off of X00001. Do not create a circuit that jumps to outside from between MCS and MCR. Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Control instructions-5 Ladder format Label Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z LBL n Instruction format Number of steps Condition n Average Maximum 0.5 Steps LBL n Usable I/O Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 1 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number { Code number Other 0 to 255 (Decimal) • • • • This instruction indicates the destination of the jump when the JMP n or CJMP n instruction is executed (n is always used in pairs). The n in the LBL n cannot be used multiple times in the same program. This instruction itself does not perform any operation. Even if a startup condition is used with LBL n, it will be ignored. Notes • This instruction is checked prior to execution, and when there is an error, the following error code is set in the special internal output WRF001. Also, the CPU error code '34' is set to special internal output WRF000. CPU error code Special internal output Error code 34 WRF001 H0001 Error description Duplicate definition of LBL Instruction for use R100 WR0000 = WR0000 R100 (00001) JMP 0 (00002) +1 LBL 0 (00003) JMP 1 (00004) WR0000 = WR0000 (00005) -1 (00006) LBL 1 • • When R100 is on, JMP 0 will be executed but JMP 1 will not be executed. Therefore, the content of WR0000 will decrement by one during each scan. When R100 is off, JMP 0 will not be executed but JMP 1 will be executed. Therefore, the content of WR0000 will increment by one during each scan. 5-105 LBL n Function Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Control instructions-6 Ladder format FOR Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z 1] z z z FOR n (s) Instruction format Number of steps Condition Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 Average Maximum 33 Steps FOR n (s) 3 Usable I/O X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number { n Code number s Number of times repeated { Other 0 to 49 (Decimal) { Function FOR n (s) • • • • • • • Jumps from the NEXT n of the same code number to this instruction. If the number of times repeated (s) is greater than 0, the instruction following the FOR n (s) is executed. If the number of times repeated (s) is equal to 0, it jumps to the instruction following the NEXT n. Use FOR n (s) and NEXT n in pairs. Also, place the NEXT n after FOR n. The FOR n (s) may not be used more than once. Use the FOR n (s) and NEXT n in the same program area. (It is not allowed to include FOR n (s) in the normal scan and NEXT n in the subroutine area.) The FOR n (s) to NEXT n nesting can be made up to five levels. Notes • • This instruction is checked prior to execution, and when there is an error, the following error code is set in the special internal output WRF001. Also, the CPU error code '34' is set to special internal output WRF000. CPU error code Special internal output Error code 34 WRF001 H0001 Duplicate definition of FOR If an error is generated during the execution of the instruction, an error code will be set in the special internal outputs R7F3 and WRF015, and the following program will be executed. Special internal output R7F3=1 WRF015 Error code Error description H0017 NEXT undefined H0043 FOR to NEXT error H0044 Area error for NEXT H0045 FOR to NEXT nesting error H0046 FOR nesting overflow Instruction for use • Error description For the instruction instruction, see NEXT n. 5-106 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Control instructions-7 Ladder format NEXT Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z 1] z z z NEXT n Instruction format Number of steps Condition Average Maximum 38 Steps NEXT n 2 Usable I/O n Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number { Code number Other 0 to 49 (Decimal) Function Subtracts 1 from the number of times repeated (s) for the FORn (s) instruction of the same code number, then jumps to FORn (s). NEXT n • Notes • • This instruction is checked prior to execution, and when there is an error, the following error code is set in the special internal output WRF001. Also, the CPU error code '34' is set to special internal output WRF000. CPU error code Special internal output Error code 34 WRF001 H0003 Error description Duplicate definition of NEXT If an error is generated during the execution of the instruction, an error code will be set in the special internal outputs R7F3 and WRF015, and the following program will be executed. Special internal output R7F3=1 WRF015 Error code Error description H0016 FOR undefined H0046 FOR nesting overflow Instruction for use R000 DIF0 When WR0000 > 0 WR0000 = 512 WR0001 = 0 FOR 0(WR0000) TC0(WR0001) = 0 WR0001 = WR0001 + 1 NEXT 0 When WR0000 = 0 • When R000 is turned on, the progress value (TC n) of the timer or counter is cleared with 0 for 512 points. • Once the FOR to NEXT starts, the instruction keeps executing until (s) is “0.” • FOR0 (WR0000) performs instructions after TC0 (WR0001) = 0 while WR0000>0, subtracts “1” from WR0000 at NEXT0, then jumps to FOR0 (WR0000). • FOR0 (WR0000) jumps to the next instruction within the current box upon WR0000 = 0. To the next program 5-107 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Syntax of FOR to NEXT 1] A NEXT instruction with the same code number as the code number n of the FOR instruction is required after the FOR instruction. 5] It is possible to escape from a FOR to NEXT loop using a jump instruction. FOR 1 (WM001) FOR 1 (WR0010) Program NEXT 2 Program Program NEXT 5 • NEXT undefined error The NEXT instruction with respect to the FOR instruction does not exist within the user program. CJMP 10 (X00000) NEXT 1 LBL10 • FOR undefined error The FOR instruction does not exist before the NEXT instruction. 6] FOR to NEXT may be nested up to 5 levels. When a subroutine is included, the FOR to NEXT within the subroutine is counted. Program FOR 1(WR0001) FOR 2(WR0002) FOR 3(WR0003) FOR 4(WR0004) FOR 5(WR0005) FOR 6(WR0006) FOR 5 (WM04F) Program • NEXT to FOR error The NEXT instruction exists before the FOR instruction. 2] An overlap of FOR and NEXT instructions with the same code number n is not allowed. NEXT n FOR 3 (WR10) Program NEXT 3 Program FOR 3 NEXT 3 • FOR duplicate-definition error A FOR instruction with the same code number n is programmed. • NEXT duplicate-definition error A NEXT instruction with the same code number n is programmed. 7] Do not include a startup condition between FOR and NEXT. If a startup condition is required, create a circuit as shown below: X00000 3] FOR and NEXT must be within the same area. JMP 1 FOR 1(WM001) Program head Normal scan Program C FOR 1(WR0001) FOR 2(WR0002) END NEXT 1 Subroutine SB1 Subroutine SB2 LBL 1 SB1 NEXT 2 FOR 3(WR0003) RTS WR0010=20 FOR 1(WR0010) INT0 Program A Interrupt scan NEXT 4 NEXT 1 RT1 R005 Program NEXT 1 FOR3 Program NEXT 2 WR0010=1 NEXT1 4] Use FOR to NEXT as a nest. Program FOR 2 (WM002) [Operation description] When X00000 is off, program C is repeatedly executed for the number of WM 1 times. When X00000 is on, program C is not executed since a jump is performed from JMP 1 to LBL 1. 8] The number of repeats may be modified within the program. SB2 NEXT 3 FOR 4(WR0004) RTS FOR 1 (WM001) • Nesting overflow error NEXT 6 NEXT 5 NEXT 4 NEXT 3 NEXT 2 NEXT 1 Note: FOR and NEXT duplicatedefinition errors will occur during operation pre-processing. Program The FOR 1 to NEXT 1 loop is escaped when X00000 turns on before the loop has been repeated for the set number of repeats (content of WM001). FOR 1(WM001) to NEXT 1 will execute normally. • Nesting error When WM002=0 Since FOR 1(WM001) to NEXT 1 is prioritized, jump will not be performed over NEXT 1 from FOR 2 to NEXT 2. At this time, NEXT 2 generates a FOR 2 undefined error. When WM002 ≠ 0 FOR 2 will not do anything. Therefore, NEXT 2 will generate a FOR 2 undefined error. 5-108 Program B The content of WR0010 decrements by 1 and a jump is performed to FOR 1 (WR0010). • When R005 is off Program B is executed after program A is repeated 20 times. • When R005 is on The repeat counter WR0010 changes to 1, and since the NEXT 1 processing subtracts 1 from it, the content of WR0010 becomes 0. Therefore, the repeating of program A is terminated and program B is execute Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Control instructions-8 Ladder format Call subroutine Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z 1] z z z CAL n Instruction format Number of steps Condition n Remark Average Maximum 24 Steps CAL n Usable I/O Processing time (µs) R7F4 2 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number { Code number Other 0 to 99 (Decimal) • If the startup condition of CAL n is on, this instructions executes the subroutine program (the program sandwiched by SB n and RTS) of the same code number. • If the startup condition is off, the next program is executed. • Up to 5 levels of CAL (nesting) for another subroutine can be performed within a subroutine. • It is possible to call a subroutine from within an interrupt scan program. Notes • If an error is generated during the execution of the instruction, an error code will be set in the special internal outputs R7F3 and WRF015, and the following program will be executed. Special internal output R7F3=1 WRF015 Error code Error description H0013 SB undefined H0041 Nesting error Instruction for use R000 CAL n Other program R000 turns ON R000 turns OFF • When R000 is on, a subroutine program is executed by CAL n. After the execution, the program is re-executed from the code following the CAL n. • When R000 is off, the subroutine program is not executed, and the next program is executed. END SB n Subroutine program RTS 5-109 CAL n Function Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Control instructions-9 Ladder format Start subroutine program Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z 1] z z z SB n Instruction format Remark Average Maximum Number of steps Condition 0.5 Steps SB n 1 Usable I/O n Processing time (µs) R7F4 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number { Code number Other 0 to 99 (Decimal) Function SB n • • • • • This instruction indicates the start of a subroutine program (processing is not performed). The n in the SB n cannot be used more than once in the same program. Even if a startup condition is used for SB n, it will be ignored. Always use SB n and RTS in pairs. Code the SB n to RTS subroutine program after the END instruction. Notes • This instruction is checked prior to execution, and when there is an error, the following error code is set in the special internal output WRF001. Also, the CPU error code '34' is set to special internal output WRF000. CPU error code Special internal output Error code Error description 34 WRF001 H0004 Duplicate definition of SB H0013 SB undefined Instruction for use • When CAL 0 is executed, SB 0 to RTS is executed as a subroutine. • When CAL 1 is executed, SB 1 to RTS is executed as a subroutine. END SB 0 Subroutine 0 program SB 1 Subroutine 0.1 program RTS SB 0 SB 1 5-110 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Control instructions-10 Ladder format End of subroutine program (RETURN SUBROUTINE) Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z RTS Instruction format Number of steps Condition Remark Average Maximum 25 Steps RTS 1 Usable I/O X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Other • • • This instruction declares the end of a subroutine program. When this instruction is executed, the program is resumed starting from the line following the CAL n instruction that called the subroutine. Do not set a startup condition with this instruction. Notes • This instruction is checked prior to execution, and when there is an error, the following error code is set in the special internal output WRF001. Also, the CPU error code '34' is set to special internal output WRF000. CPU error code Special internal output 34 WRF001 Error code Error description H0011 SB undefined H0020 SB area error H0030 RTS startup condition error Instruction for use 1] 2] R000 CAL 0 3] 1] 2] END Subroutine 0 R001 program SB 0 CAL 1 Subroutine 0 program RTS SB 1 Subroutine 1 program RTS 3] The program is executed when R000 and R001 are both off The program is executed when R000 is on and R001 is off CAL 0 is executed, then the subroutine 0 program is executed. CAL 1 is not executed, the subroutine 0 program is terminated and the execution is returned to the code following the CAL 0. The program is executed when R000 and R001 are both on CAL 0 is executed, then the subroutine 0 program is executed. CAL 1 is executed, then the subroutine 1 program is executed. The subroutine 1 program is completed and execution is returned to the code following the CAL 1. The subroutine 0 program is completed and execution is returned to the code following the CAL 0. 5-111 RTS Function Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Control instructions-11 Ladder format Start interrupt scan program (INTERRUPT) Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z INT n Instruction format Number of steps Condition Average Maximum 0.5 Steps INT n 1 Usable I/O n Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number { Interrupt priority Other 0 to 2 , 16 to 19, 20 to 27 (Decimal) Function • • INT n • • • • • • This instruction declares the start of an interrupt scan program. n = 0 to 2 indicates a periodical interrupt scan. n = 16 to 19 indicates interrupt input. n = 20 to 27 indicates an interrupt scan when the counter input exceeds the preset value. It is set to the 10 ms periodic scan when n = 0, 20 ms periodic scan when n = 1, and 40 ms periodic interrupt scan when n = 2. The smaller the number n, the higher the interrupt priority. Always use INT n and RTI in pairs. Even if a startup condition is used for INT n, it will be ignored. Code the INT n to RTI subroutine program after the END instruction. The n in INT n cannot be used more than once within the same program. Notes • This instruction is checked prior to execution, and when there is an error, the following error code is set in the special internal output WRF001. Also, the CPU error code '34' is set to special internal output WRF000. CPU error code Special internal output Error code Error description 34 WRF001 H0005 Duplicate definition of INT H0014 INT undefined Instruction for use • The program between INT0 and RTI is started and executed every 10 ms. END INT 0 10 ms interrupt scan program INT 0 scan RTI 5-112 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name Control instructions-12 Ladder format End interrupt scan program (RETURN INTERRUPT) Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C z z z z z RTI Instruction format Number of steps Condition Remark Average Maximum 0.5 Steps RTI 1 Usable I/O X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Other • • • This instruction declares the end of an interrupt scan program. When this program is executed, the processing is returned to the program that was executing before the interrupt scan was performed. Do not set a startup condition with this instruction. Notes • This instruction is checked prior to execution, and when there is an error, the following error code is set in the special internal output WRF001. Also, the CPU error code '34' is set to special internal output WRF000. CPU error code Special internal output 34 WRF001 Error code Error description H0012 RTI undefined H0021 RTI area error H0031 RTI startup condition error Instruction for use • A 0.01s timer is created using 10 ms interval interrupt. • WM000, WR0000 and R000 are used for the set value, progress value and timer coil, respectively. • When X00000 is off, the progress value and timer coil are cleared. • When X00000 is on, the progress value increments by 1 every 10 ms. • The timer coil is turned on upon WM000 is less than or equal to WR0000. INT 0 X00000 X00000 WR0000=0 R000=0 WR0000=WR0000+1 WM000 R000 <= SET WR0000 RTI 5-113 RTI Function Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Syntax of SB n, RTS, INT n and RTI 1] A subroutine can be programmed between a normal scan and interrupt scan, between two interrupt scans, or after the final interrupt scan. 5] It is also possible to program a subroutine with multiple entry points and one exit. SB 1 SB 1 Program head Normal scan END Subroutine area Interrupt scan INT 1 RTI Subroutine area Interrupt scan INT 2 RTI Subroutine area Program end SB 1 Subroutine 1 RTS SB 2 Subroutine 2 RTS SB 3 JMP 1 JMP 1 SB 2 JMP 1 SB 3 LBL 1 RTS SB 10 Subroutine 10 RTS LBL 1 RTS SB 11 Subroutine 11 RTS SB 12 Subroutine 12 RTS 6] It is also possible to program a interrupt scan with many entry points and one exit. 2] Program the subroutine start (SB n) and subroutine end (RTS) instructions without specifying startup conditions. RTI Startup condition SB 2 JMP 1 INT 0 INT 1 INT 2 JMP 1 INT 0 JMP 1 JMP 1 INT 2 JMP 1 INT 1 LBL 1 SB n RTI LBL 1 RTI Program Startup condition • The RTS startup condition error will occur during operation preprocessing. RTS 7] Nesting of subroutines is allowed up to 5 levels. 1st level 2nd level 3rd level 4th level 5th level 3] Program the interrupt scan start (INT n) and scan complete (RTI) instructions without specifying startup conditions. SB 1 SB 20 CAL 30 CAL 20 Startup condition INT n RTS RTS SB 30 CAL 40 RTS SB 40 CAL 50 RTS SB 50 RTS Program Startup condition RT1 Program head END SB 20 RTS 4] The same subroutine can be called from a normal scan, interrupt scan or subroutine. SB 1 RTS INT 0 RTI Program head Normal scan CAL 1 SB 40 RTS CAL 1 SB 30 RTS END SB 2 SB 50 RTS Subroutine 2 CAL 1 Subroutine 1 RTS SB 1 RTS INI 0 Interrupt scan CAL 1 RTI 5-114 (1) As shown to the left, the subroutine program order and nesting order have no relationship. Chapter 5 Instruction specifications Name Transfer command-1 Ladder format General purpose port communication command R7F4 Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z TRNS 0 (d, s, t) Command format Average Number of steps Condition Steps - 5 TRNS 0 (d, s, t) Bit Usable I/O Processing time (µs) R7F0 X Y R, L, M Word Remark Maximum 80 2,078 Double word TD, SS, WR, DR, CU, CT WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Others { d Dummy s Parameter area t Communication control { s to s+14 { t to t+11 (1) This is a command to send data via general purpose port. It is also possible to receive data after data sending. (2) Parameter "d" is dummy. Assign WY10. (Actual data in Y100 to Y115 is not influenced.) (3) Parameter "s" is starting address of parameter table for communication setting. (4) Parameter "t" is starting address of bit table for communication control. (5) "s" parameter s [0] Return code s+1 [1] System area (Do not use this area.) s+3 [2] Timeout s+4 [3] Address of sending area s+6 [4] Reserve area for data sending (word) s+7 [5] Address of receiving area s+9 [6] Reserve area for data receiving (word) s+A [7] Receiving data length (byte) s+B [8] Start code s+C [9] End code s+D [10] Communication speed s+E [11] Communication format [0] Return code : Result of TRNS 0 command is set in lower 8 bits. Completed 0 Error ≠ 0 [1] System area : This area is used by system (CPU) while TRNS 0 operation. It is not allowed for users to use this area. If this area is written, CPU might stop operation due to system error. ! [2] Timeout : : Access forbidden : User setting area 5-115 Timeout setting from command executed to completed. =0 : Timeout disabled ≠0 : Timeout enabled [×10ms] Max. HFFFF TRNS 0 (d, s, t) Function Chapter 5 Instruction specifications [3] Address of sending area : Address number and address type are configured in 2 words as below. Type : WR → H000A s+4 WM → H000C s+5 I/O No.: H0000 - [4] Reserved data size for data sending. : This is not actual data size but reserved size. Set it by "Word". [5] Address of receiving area : Address number and address type are configured in 2 words as below. (Data format is as same as sending area.) [6] Reserved data size for data receiving. : This is not actual data size but reserved size. Set it by "Word". *1 [7] Receiving data length : If receiving data is found by data length, set this parameter by "Byte". The maximum size is 1,024 byte. If data is more than 1,024 bytes or reserved area, TRNS command fails with DER="1". *1 [8] Start code : If receiving data is found by start code, set this parameter. b15 b7 b0 TRNS 0 (d, s, t) Start code (H00 - HFF) = 0 : Start code disabled. = 1 : Start code enabled. *1 [9] End code : If receiving data is found by end code, set this parameter. b15 b7 b0 End code (H00 - HFF) = 0 : End code disabled. = 1 : End code enabled. [10] Communication speed : [11] Communication format Baud rate Value Format Value 300 bps H0000 7 bits, even parity, 2 stop H0000 600 bps H0001 7 bits, odd parity, 2 stop H0001 1,200 bps H0002 7 bits, even parity, 1 stop H0002 2,400 bps H0003 7 bits, odd parity, 1 stop H0003 4,800 bps H0004 8 bits, non parity, 2 stop H0004 9,600 bps H0005 8 bits, non parity, 1 stop H0005 19,200 bps H0006 8 bits, even parity, 1 stop H0006 38,400 bps H0007 8 bits, odd parity, 1 stop H0007 57,600 bps H0008 5-116 Chapter 5 Instruction specifications *1 Received data is defined by either of following 4 ways depending on setting in [7] s+A to [9] s+C. (a) *2 Start code and data size Data length s+A : Data length (Byte) s+B : H80 (=Start code) Start code s+C : H0000 (b) Start and end code *2 s+A : H0000 s+B : H80 (=Start code) Start code s+C : H80 (=End code) (c) End code End code s+A : H0000 s+B : H0000 End code s+C : H80 (=End code) (d) Data length Data length s+A : Data length (Byte) s+B:H0000 s+C:H0000 (6) In case of start code used, CPU can fail to receive due to buffer size full if data with wrong start code is sent. "t" parameter t+B t [B] [A] [9] [8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] [0] : Set by user [0] Execution bit: Set "1" by user program to send data. This bit is reset after communication completed. [1] Communication completed : This bit is set "1" when communication completed without error, and reset at communication starting. [2] Communication failed : This bit is set "1" when communication fails, and reset at communication starting. [3] Initialize : Set "1" by user program to initialize TRNS 0 command. If this bit is on while communication, the communication is forced to be stopped. [4] Initialize completed : This bit is set "1" when initializing completed without error. Initialize bit [3] is reset at this timing. [5] Receive enabled : Set "1" by user program if CPU needs to receive data after data sending. This bit is reset after communication completed. [6] Parity error flag : This bit is set "1" when parity error detected. [7] Framing error : This bit is set "1" when framing error detected. [8] Overrun error : This bit is set "1" when overrun error detected. 5-117 TRNS 0 (d, s, t) *2 Chapter 5 Instruction specifications [9] Timeout : This bit is set "1" when timeout detected. [A] Input buffer full : This bit is set "1" when input buffer full [B] Conflict error : This bit is set "1" when TRNS 0 or RECV 0 commands are duplicated. Bit [6] to [B] is reset at initializing and TRNS 0 executed. (7) Sending/receiving data format Set sending data as follows, and Receiving data is set as follows. [1] Sending/receiving data byte is even. [2] Sending/receiving data byte is odd. Sending/Receiving data byte (N) 1st byte Sending/Receiving byte (N) 2nd byte rd 1st byte th 2nd byte 3 byte 4 byte 3 byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 7th byte 8th byte rd … … th N-1 byte N-2th byte N-1th byte Nth byte (ignored) Reserve area for data sending/receiving th N byte TRNS 0 (d, s, t) Caution z z z z z z z Be sure to switch port type at first from dedicated port to general purpose port by FUN 5 command in user program. If CPU receives data by RECV command after data sending, received data could be failed depending on timing. In such a case, TRNS command with "receive enabled" is recommended. No contact nor condition is allowed to use with TRNS 0 command. Be sure to set [0] Execution bit high in 2nd scan or later. (Not in 1st scan) If parameter setting is wrong, error code H52 (TRNS/RECV command error) is set in WRF000 in some cases. ER signal is set on in the following condition. Communication executed properly. ER signal is set off in the following condition. Initialized bit being set "1" while communication. CPU status changed RUN→STOP→RUN while communication Timeout while communication. s, t parameters overwritten and range error while communication. 5-118 Chapter 5 Instruction specifications Sample program R7E3 R7E3 WR0 Reserve area for data sending : 16 words from WR0 WR100 Reserve area for data receiving : 256 words from WR100 Data receiving definition Start code : H02, End code : H0D Communication speed : 19.2k bps Format : 7 bits, even, 2 stop Port 2 configured as general purpose port. Sent data : 9 bytes Inverter (SJ300/L300P) command FWD RUN for station No.18 02 31 38 30 30 31 33 38 0D (STX 18 00 1 38 CR) [38=BCC] WR100 = 9 WR101 = H0231 WR102 = H3830 WR103 = H3031 WR104 = H3338 WR105 = H0D00 Switch DIF0 R0 S When the switch is ON, execution bit R0 is ON, and data is sent out from CPU port. R5 S R5 enables data receiving from the other device. TRNS 0 (WY10, WM100, R0) Description TRNS 0 parameter and sent data are configured at 1st scan by R7E3 contact. When the switch is ON, execution bit R0 is ON, and data is sent out from CPU port. 5-119 TRNS 0 (d, s, t) WM103 = 0 WM104 = H000A WM105 = H0000 WM106 = 16 WM107 = H000A WM108 = H0100 WM109 = 256 WM10A = 0 WM10B = H8002 WM10C = H800D WM10D = 6 WM10E = 0 WR10 = H0200 FUN 5 (WR10) R7E3 : 1st scan ON Timeout = 0 Chapter 5 Instruction specifications TRNS/RECV command return code table Return code Name H00 H21 Completed properly Range error Reserve area for sending setting error Reserve area for sending range error Reserve area for receiving setting error Reserve area for receiving range error Sending data error Receiving data error Area overlapping error *2 Operation completed without error Parameter "s" and "t" is out of available I/O range. H30 Timeout *1 Communication is not completed within configured time. H40 H41 H42 H43 H44 H45 H46 Receiving area over *3 Parity error *4 Framing error *4 Overrun error detected Conflict error Parameter error Port type error Received data is beyond reserved area Parity error detected Framing error detected Overrun error detected TRNS 0/RECV 0 duplicated Baud rate or format setting is wrong Port type is not general purpose port. H22 H23 H24 H25 H26 H27 H28 *2 Description Countermeasure - Parameter setting is wrong. Parameter is out of available I/O range. Parameter setting is wrong. Set right value. Parameter is out of available I/O range. Configured sending data length is beyond reserve area Configured receiving data length is beyond reserve area Parameter s, t, or reserve area is overlapped. Set longer timeout or check the program. Configure bigger size Check wiring and data format. Execute one by one Set right value. Configure general purpose port. Area overlapping error (H28) is not detected in the following case. TRNS n (d,s,t) b15 TRNS 0 (d, s, t) t+1 b0 t t+2 Data overlapping If starting area of "s" parameter and "t" parameter is overlapped, error code H21 can be set instead of H28. *3 Received data is stored as long as reserved area. (1,024 bytes) *4 Data is not guaranteed. 5-120 Chapter 5 Instruction specifications Name Transfer command-2 Ladder format General purpose port communication command R7F4 Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z RECV 0 (d, s, t) Command format Average Number of steps Condition Steps - 5 RECV 0 (d, s, t) Bit Usable I/O Processing time (µs) R7F0 X Y R, L, M Word 80 Remark Maximum 2,064 Double word TD, SS, WR, DR, CU, CT WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant Item number Others { d Dummy s Parameter area t Communication control { s to s+14 { t to t+11 (1) This is a command to send data via general purpose port. It is also possible to receive data after data sending. (2) Parameter "d" is dummy. Assign WX0. (Actual data in X00 to X15 is not influenced.) (3) Parameter "s" is starting address of parameter table for communication setting. (4) Parameter "t" is starting address of bit table for communication control. (5) "s" parameter s [0] Return code s+1 [1] System area (Do not use this area.) s+3 [2] Timeout s+4 [3] Address of sending area s+6 [4] Reserve area for data sending (word) s+7 [5] Address of receiving area s+9 [6] Reserve area for data receiving (word) s+A [7] Receiving data length (byte) s+B [8] Start code s+C [9] End code s+D [10] Communication speed s+E [11] Communication format [0] Return code : Result of RECV 0 command is set in lower 8 bits. Completed 0 Error ≠ 0 [1] System area : This area is used by system (CPU) while RECV 0 operation. It is not allowed for users to use this area. If this area is written, CPU might stop operation due to system error. ! [2] Timeout : : Access forbidden : User setting area 5-121 Timeout setting from command executed to completed. =0 : Timeout disabled ≠0 : Timeout enabled [×10ms] Max. HFFFF RECV 0 (d, s, t) Function Chapter 5 Instruction specifications [3] Address of sending area : Address number and address type are configured in 2 words as below. Type : WR → H000A s+4 WM → H000C s+5 I/O No.: H0000 - [4] Reserved data size for data sending. : This is not actual data size but reserved size. Set it by "Word". [5] Address of receiving area : Address number and address type are configured in 2 words as below. (Data format is as same as sending area.) [6] Reserved data size for data receiving. : This is not actual data size but reserved size. Set it by "Word". *1 [7] Receiving data length : If receiving data is found by data length, set this parameter by "Byte". The maximum size is 1,024 byte. If data is more than 1,024 bytes or reserved area, RECV command fails with DER="1". *1 [8] Start code : If receiving data is found by start code, set this parameter. (See TRNS command) *1 [9] End code : If receiving data is found by end code, set this parameter. (See TRNS command) RECV 0 (d, s, t) [10] Communication speed (See TRNS command) [11] Communication format (See TRNS command) *1 Received data is defined by either of following 4 ways depending on setting in [7] s+A to [9] s+C. *2 In case of start code used, CPU can fail to receive due to buffer size full if data with wrong start code is sent. 5-122 Chapter 5 Instruction specifications (6) "t" parameter t+B t [B] [A] [9] [8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] [0] : Set by user [0] Execution bit: Set "1" by user program to send data. This bit is reset after communication completed. [1] Communication completed : This bit is set "1" when communication completed without error, and reset at communication starting. [2] Communication failed : This bit is set "1" when communication fails, and reset at communication starting. [3] Initialize : Set "1" by user program to initialize RECV 0 command. If this bit is on while communication, the communication is forced to be stopped. [4] Initialize completed : This bit is set "1" when initializing completed without error. Initialize bit [3] is reset at this timing. [5] Send enabled : Set "1" by user program if CPU needs to send data after data receiving. This bit is reset after communication completed. [6] Parity error flag : This bit is set "1" when parity error detected. [7] Framing error : This bit is set "1" when framing error detected. [9] RECV 0 (d, s, t) [8] Overrun error : This bit is set "1" when overrun error detected. Timeout : This bit is set "1" when timeout detected. [A] Input buffer full : This bit is set "1" when input buffer full [B] Conflict error : This bit is set "1" when TRNS 0 or RECV 0 commands are duplicated. Bit [6] to [B] is reset at initializing and RECV 0 executed. (7) Sending/receiving data format (See TRNS 0 command) Caution z z z z z z z Be sure to switch port type at first from dedicated port to general purpose port by FUN 5 command in user program. If CPU receives data by RECV command after data sending, sent data could be failed depending on timing. In such a case, RECV command with "send enabled" is recommended. No contact nor condition is allowed to use with RECV 0 command. Be sure to set [0] Execution bit high in 2nd scan or later. (Not in 1st scan) If parameter setting is wrong, error code H52 (TRNS/RECV command error) is set in WRF000 in some cases. ER signal is set on in the following condition. Communication executed properly. ER signal is set off in the following condition. Initialized bit being set "1" while communication. CPU status changed RUN→STOP→RUN while communication Timeout while communication. s, t parameters overwritten and range error while communication. 5-123 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name FUN instructions-1 Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z FUN 5 (s) Instruction format X Y 114 Condition Steps — 3 Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM s Argument { s+1 (system area) { s+2 (system area) { Remark Average Maximum Number of steps FUN 5 (s) Usable I/O General purpose port switching - Constant Item number Other Function This command is to switch dedicated port (programming port) to general purpose port. S Port number Current setting S+1 System area S+2 System area Port number H01 : Port 1 H02 : Port 2 * Error with the other values Current setting H00 : Dedicated port (Programming port) H01 : Port 1 is general purpose port H02 : Port 2 is general purpose port FUN 5 (s) Notes • • • • General purpose port can be configured only one port. If either port is configured general purpose port, FUN 5 command for the other port is ignored with DER=1. General purpose works only when CPU is in RUN mode. When CPU status is in STOP, the port is automatically switched back to dedicated port (programming port). It is impossible to switch from general purpose to dedicated port while CPU is in RUN status. FUN 5 does not work if port 1 is configured as modem mode. Program example X00000 DIF0 LD X00000 AND DIF0 [ WR0100 = H0200 FUN 5 (WR0100) ] WR0100 = H0200 FUN 5 (WR0100) Program description Port 2 is switched to general purpose port at rising edge of X0000 input. 5-124 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Item number Name FUN instructions-2 Ladder format I/O refresh (All points) Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 FUN 80 (s) DER ERR SD V C * (ALREF (s)) ↕ z z z z Instruction format Number of steps 432 Condition Steps — 3 FUN 80 (s) Remark Average Maximum Usable I/O s X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant * (ALREF (s)) Other { Argument (dummy) Function • * This instruction performs I/O refresh of all data in the external I/Os (including link area) during scanning. ( ) indicates the display when the Ladder Editor is used. Notes • • • This instruction performs I/O refresh of all external I/Os. If refresh of certain area is to be performed, use FUN81 or FUN82. If the argument s exceeds the maximum I/O number, DER is set to “1” and no processing will be performed. Assign argument s as a one-word dummy. The I/O specified for argument s (WR and WM) will not be affected. Program example FUN 80 (WR0) Y100 FUN 80 (WR0) 3] Program description 1 scan 1 scan I/O refresh FUN 80 1] FUN 80 3] Program execution 2] 2] I/O refresh 5-125 FUN 80 (s) X0 1] Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Item number Name FUN instructions-3 Ladder format I/O refresh (Input/output) Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 FUN 81 (s) DER ERR SD V C * (IOREF (s)) ↕ z z z z Instruction format Number of steps 244 Condition Steps — 3 FUN 81 (s) Remark Average Maximum Usable I/O s X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant * (IOREF (s)) Other { Type Function s Input type H00: Input refresh H01: Output refresh • • • * Depending on the I/O type of the area specified by s, refresh is performed with respect to I/O modules only, output modules only. Refresh is performed by each slot assignment according to the I/O assignment. If the refresh processing is completed normally, DER is set to '0.' ( ) indicates the display when the Ladder Editor is used. Notes • • If the I/O type is other than H00 or H01, DER is set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the argument s exceeds the maximum I/O number, DER is set to “1” and no processing will be performed. FUN 81 (s) Program example R000 R001 DIF0 DIF1 LD AND [ WR0004 FUN 81 ] LD AND [ WR0004 FUN 81 ] WR0004 = 0 FUN 81 (WR0004 ) WR0004 = 1 FUN 81 (WR0004 ) Program description • • Upon leading of R000, the input module is refreshed. Upon leading of R001, the output module is refreshed. 5-126 R000 DIF0 =0 (WR0004) R001 DIF1 =1 (WR0004) Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Item number Name FUN instructions-4 Ladder format I/O Refresh (slot) Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 FUN 82 (s) DER ERR SD V C * (SLREF (s)) ↕ z z z z Instruction format Number of steps Average Maximum 311 Condition Steps — 3 FUN 82 (s) Remark Processing time (µs) R7F4 Usable I/O s X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Constant * (SLREF (s)) Other { Number of points s+1 and Slot location number beyond Designate the slot location. { Function s Number of points to be refreshed n ≤ 64 Refresh slot location number is designated by unit and slot number. s+1 Refresh slot location number s+2 Refresh slot location number : : : : • • • • • * Performs refresh of the designated module for the number of points specified by s, starting with area s+1. Refresh is performed by slot. The slot location numbers stored in areas s+1 and subsequent are designated by the unit number and slot number. The maximum number of points to be refreshed (n) is 64 points. The points exceeding 64 points are not refreshed. If refresh processing is completed normally, DER is set to “0.” ( ) indicates the display when the Ladder Editor is used. Program example R000 DIF0 LD AND [ WR0000 WR0001 WR0002 FUN82 ] WR0000 = H0002 WR0001 = H0000 WR0002 = H0010 FUN 82 (WR0000) R000 DIF0 = H0002 = H0000 = H0010 (WR0000) Program description • Upon leading of R000, the two slots designated after WR0001 (unit 0, slot 0) and (unit 1, slot 0) are refreshed. 5-127 FUN 82 (s) s+n Refresh slot location number Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Notes • • • • Set the unit number (0 to 3) and slot number (0 to 1) after s+1. For other set values, DER is set to “1” and that slot will not be processed. If there is no I/O assignment to the designated slot, DER is set to “1” and that slot will not be processed. If the number of s+n points exceeds the maximum I/O number, DER is set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the number of points exceeds 64, DER is set to “1” and the points exceeding 64 will not be processed (refresh will be performed for up to 64 points). Slot location number The slot locations are designated using the unit number and slot number. The unit number and slot number are set as follows in one word units: b15 b12 0 to 0 b7 0 to 0 b3 Unit number b0 Slot number FUN 82 (s) 5-128 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name FUN instructions-5 Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z Instruction format X Y 147 Condition Steps — 3 Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Argument (Counter number, operation control value) Remark Average Maximum Number of steps FUN 140 (s) s Processing time (µs) R7F4 FUN 140 (s) Usable I/O High-speed Counter Operation Control Constant Item number Other { Function 15 S • 87 Counter number 0 Operation instruction Counter number: H01 to H04 Operation instruction: H00 – Stop, H01 – Start Performs the starting and stopping of the count operation for the specified counter. • • • • • • • • If a value other than H01 to H04 is specified for the counter number and the operation instruction is set to a value other than H00 or H01, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is set to a function other than a corresponding external I/O counter (single-phase counter, two-phase counter), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. Since Counter 4 is invalid when a 10-point CPU is used, if Counter 4 is specified, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is unable to make an output (PI/O function setting result by R7F5), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. This instruction is only used to start and stop the counter operation. Other counter settings will not be changed. The counter operation will start after the power is turned back on even if the power is turned off when the count operation is stopped by this instruction. The operation of the high-speed counter will be stopped only when this instruction specifies the stop instruction. The counter operation will continue when the CPU operation is stopped. When the count operation stops, the progress value update also stops. When starting the count operation, the progress value is cleared and then the operation starts. Program example R0 DIF0 LD AND [ WR0 FUN ] WR0 = H0101 FUN 140 (WR0) R0 DIF0 = H101 140 ( WR0 ) Program description • Prior to starting a counter operation, various settings required for the counter operation are reflected in the special internal outputs, and the PI/O function setting flag (R7F5) is turned on while the CPU is being stopped. For details on the special internal output settings, see Chapter 8. Starts the counter No. 1 operation. 5-129 FUN 140 (s) Notes Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name FUN instructions-6 Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z Instruction format Steps — 3 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT 138 Condition Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Argument (Counter number, output instruction) Remark Average Maximum Number of steps FUN 141 (s) s Processing time (µs) R7F4 FUN 141 (s) Usable I/O High-speed Counter Coincidence Output Control Constant Item number Other { Function 15 S • • 87 Counter number 0 Operation instruction Counter number: Output instruction: H01 to H04 H00 – Coincidence output disable, H01 – Coincidence output able Performs the enabling and disabling of the coincidence output for the specified counter. Output is turned off when the coincidence output disabling instruction is issued while coincidence output is being performed (while coincidence output is on). Notes • • FUN 141 (s) • • • • • • If a value other than H01 to H04 is specified for the counter number and the output instruction is set to a value other than H00 or H01, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is set to a function other than a corresponding external I/O counter (single-phase counter, two-phase counter), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. Since Counter 4 is invalid when a 10-point CPU is used, if Counter 4 is specified, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is unable to make an output (PI/O function setting result by R7F5), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. This instruction is only used to enable and disable the coincidence output. Other counter settings will not be changed and it will not affect the count operation. When coincidence output is enabled by this instruction when the coincidence conditions are already established, coincidence output will be turned on when the instruction is issued. The control contents of this instruction will be reflected in the output control flag (R7FC to R7FF) of the corresponding counter number. When the CPU is not operating, the counter coincidence output continues/stops according to the setting of the special internal output (output selection at R7DC stop). Program example R1 DIF1 LD AND [ WR1 FUN ] WR1 = H0101 FUN 141 (WR1) R1 DIF1 = H101 141 ( WR1 ) Program description • Sets the coincidence output validity for the counter No. 1. Because the counter coincidence output Yxxx cannot be used in the ladder program (including the monitor, etc.), do not use it for the coil such as a contact. 5-130 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z Instruction format X Y 156 Condition Steps — 3 Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Remark Average Maximum Number of steps FUN 142 (s) Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Other { Argument (Counter number, Up/Down instruction) s Processing time (µs) R7F4 FUN 142 (s) Usable I/O High-speed Counter Up-Count/Down-count Control (Single phase counter only) Name FUN instructions-7 Constant Item number Function 15 S • • 87 Counter number 0 Up/Down instruction Counter number: H01 to H04 Up/down instruction: H00 – Up-count, H01 – Down-count This controls the up-count/down-count of the specified counter. Up-count and down-count control can be performed during the count operation. • • • • • • If a value other than H01 to H04 is specified for the counter number and the up/down instruction is set to a value other than H00 or H01, DER will be set to “1”and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is set to a function other than single-phase counter, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. Since Counter 4 is invalid when a 10-point CPU is used, if Counter 4 is specified, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is unable to make an output (PI/O function setting result by R7F5), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. This instruction is only used to control the up-count and down-count. Other counter settings will not be changed and it will not affect the count operation. The control contents of this instruction will be reflected in bits 11 to 8 of the special internal output WRF07E of the corresponding counter number. Program example R2 DIF2 LD AND [ WR2 FUN ] WR2 = H0101 FUN 142 (WR2) R2 DIF2 = H101 142 ( WR2 ) Program description • Switches the counter operation of the counter No. 1 to down count. The count edges (leading/trailing) will follow the specification of the special internal output (WRF07E). 5-131 FUN 142 (s) Notes Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name FUN instructions-8 Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z FUN 143 (s) Instruction format X Y 175 Condition Steps — 3 Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Argument (counter number) Argument s+1 (Replacement value storage area) Remark Average Maximum Number of steps FUN 143 (s) Usable I/O High-speed Counter Current Value Replacement Constant Item number Other { s { Function 15 S 8 7 Counter number S+1 • 0 ** Counter number: **: H01 to H04 Disable area Replacement value storage area The counter value of the specified counter number will be replaced by the data stored in the replacement value storage area. Notes FUN 143 (s) • • • • • • If a value other than H01 to H04 is specified for the counter number, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is set to a function other than a corresponding external I/O counter (single-phase counter, two-phase counter), DER will be set to “1”and no processing will be performed. Since Counter 4 is invalid when a 10-point CPU is used, if Counter 4 is specified, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is unable to make an output (PI/O function setting result by R7F5), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. This instruction is only used to rewrite the count value. Other counter settings will not be changed and will not affect the count operation. If the range for S exceeds the valid range of the I/O, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. Program example R3 DIF3 LD AND [ WR30 WR31 FUN ] WR30 = H0100 WR31 = 1000 FUN 143 (WR30) Program description • Rewrite the count value of the counter No. 1 to 1000. 5-132 R3 DIF3 = H100 = 1000 143 (WR30) Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name FUN instructions-9 Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z FUN 144 (s) Instruction format X Y 132 Condition Steps — 3 Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Argument (counter number) Argument s+1 (Current value storage area) Remark Average Maximum Number of steps FUN 144 (s) Usable I/O High-speed counter current value reading Constant Item number Other { s { Function 15 S 8 7 Counter number S+1 • 0 ** Counter number: **: H01 to H04 Disable area Current value storage area This function reads the count value of the specified counter number and writes it to the current value storage area. • • • • • • • If a value other than H01 to H04 is specified for the counter number, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is set to a function other than a corresponding external I/O counter (single-phase counter, two-phase counter), DER will be set to “1”and no processing will be performed. Since Counter 4 is invalid when a 10-point CPU is used, if Counter 4 is specified, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is unable to make an output (PI/O function setting result by R7F5), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. This instruction is only used to read the count value. Other counter settings will not be changed and it will not affect the count operation. The execution of this instruction will not change WRF07A to WRF07D (strobe area) and WRF056 (strobe complete flag). If the range for S exceeds the valid range of the I/O, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. Program example R4 DIF4 WR41 < 2000 WR40 = H0100 FUN 144 (WR40) R144 LD AND [ WR40 FUN ] R4 DIF4 LD OUT (WR41 < 2000) R144 Program description • Load the count value of the counter No. 1 to WR41. If the count value of the counter No. 1 is less than 2000, R144 is turned on. 5-133 = H100 144 ( WR40 ) FUN 144 (s) Notes Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name FUN instructions-10 Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z Instruction format X Y 157 Condition Steps — 3 Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Argument (counter number) Remark Average Maximum Number of steps FUN 145 (s) s Processing time (µs) R7F4 FUN 145 (s) Usable I/O High-speed counter current value clear Constant Item number Other { Function 15 S • 87 Counter number 0 ** Counter number: **: H01 to H04 Disable area The output value will be changed according to the output condition (on-preset value, off-preset value settings) if the count value of the specified counter number is cleared and coincidence output is possible. Notes • • • FUN 145 (s) • • If a value other than H01 to H04 is specified for the counter number, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is set to a function other than a corresponding external I/O counter (single-phase counter, two-phase counter), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. Since Counter 4 is invalid when a 10-point CPU is used, if Counter 4 is specified, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is unable to make an output (PI/O function setting result by R7F5), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. This instruction is used only to clear the count value. Other counter settings will not be changed and it will not affect the count operation. Program example R5 DIF5 LD AND [ WR5 FUN ] WR5 = H0100 FUN 145 (WR5) Program description • The count value of the counter No. 1 is cleared. 5-134 R5 DIF5 = H100 145 ( WR5 ) Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name FUN instructions-11 Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z FUN 146 (s) Instruction format Number of steps Steps — 3 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Argument (counter number, preset specification) Argument s+1 (on-preset value) Argument s+2 (off-preset value) Remark Average Maximum 162 Condition FUN 146 (s) Usable I/O High-speed counter preset Constant Item number Other { s { { Function S 8 7 Counter number 0 Preset specification S+1 On-preset specification S+2 Off-preset specification • • Counter number: Preset specification: H01 to H04 H00 – Specification of on-preset value and off-preset value H01 – Specification of on-preset value only H02 – Specification of off-preset value only The on-preset value and off-preset value will be set according to the preset specifications for the specified counter number. The coincidence output value will remain unchanged even when coincidence output is possible. Notes • • • • • • • If a value other than H01 to H04 is specified for the counter number and a value other than H00 to H02 is set for the preset specification, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. Since Counter 4 is invalid when a 10-point CPU is used, if Counter 4 is specified, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is set to a function other than a corresponding external I/O counter (single-phase counter, two-phase counter), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. The specified preset value will be checked using the criteria shown below. If an error occurs, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If there is no error, the bit respective to the setting error detail information WRF057 will be set to “0” and releases the operation disabled status. 1] When the preset specification is 00H If S+1 (on-preset) and S+2 (off-preset) values are equal, and error is generated. 2] When the preset specification is 01H If S+1 (on-preset) and the off-preset value of WRF076 to WRF079 are equal, an error is generated. 3] When the preset specification is 02H If S+2 (on-preset) and the off-preset value of WRF072 to WRF075 are equal, an error is generated. This instruction is used only to set the on-preset value and off-preset value. Other counter settings will not be changed and it will not affect the count operation. The settings made using the instruction will be reflected in the special internal output (WRF072 to WRF075 and WRF076 to WRF078). However, it is not reflected if DER becomes equal to “1.” If the range for S exceeds the valid range of the I/O, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. 5-135 FUN 146 (s) 15 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Program example R6 DIF6 LD R6 AND DIF6 [ WR60 = H100 WR61 = 5000 WR62 = 10000 FUN 146 ( WR60 ) ] WR60 = H0100 WR61 = 5000 WR62 = 10000 FUN 146 (WR60) Program description • Sets both the on-preset value and off-preset value in the counter No. 1. Sets 5000 for the on-preset value and 10000 for the off-preset value. FUN 146 (s) 5-136 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name FUN instructions-12 Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z FUN 147 (s) Instruction format Number of steps Steps — 3 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Argument (PWM output number) s Remark Average Maximum 135 Condition FUN 147 (s) Usable I/O PWM operation control Constant Item number Other { Function 15 S • PWM output number 87 0 Operation instruction PWM output number: H01 to H04 Operation instruction: H00 – Stop, H01 - Start Starts/stops the PWM output of the specified PWM output number. • • • • • If a value other than H01 to H04 is specified as the PWM output number, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the external I/O corresponding to the PWM output number is set to a function other than PWM output, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If PWM output is activated with this instruction, the output control flag (R7FC to R7FF) corresponding to the specified PWM output number will turn on and off. The PWM output operation does not stop, even when CPU operation is stopped. When the CPU is not operating, the PWM output continues/stops according to the setting of the special internal output (output selection at R7DC stop). Program example R7 DIF7 LD R7 AND DIF7 [ WR7 = H101 FUN 147 ( WR7 ) ] WR7 = H0101 FUN 147 (WR7) Program description • Prior to starting a PWM output operation, various settings required for the PWM output operation are reflected in the special internal outputs, and the PI/O function setting flag (R7F5) is turned on while the CPU is being stopped. For details on the special internal output settings, see Chapter 8. Starts the PWM output No. 1 (Y100) operation. 5-137 FUN 147 (s) Notes Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name FUN instructions-13 Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z FUN 148 (s) Instruction format Number of steps Steps — 3 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Argument (PWM output number) Argument (Frequency s+1 value) Argument (On-duty s+2 value) Remark Average Maximum 173 Condition FUN 148 (s) Usable I/O PWM Frequency on-duty changes Constant Item number Other { s { { Function 8 15 S PWM number S+1 S+2 FUN 148 (s) • • • • 7 0 ** Frequency values On-duty value PWM output number: H01 to H04 **: Disable area Frequency: 10 to 2000 (Hz) *: If the frequency value is set to less than 10 Hz, it is internally changed to 10 Hz. The S parameter is also rewritten. On-duty value: With auto correction – Depends on the frequency used. Without auto correction – 0 to 100 (%) Auto correction is executed when the value corresponding to the CPU model is specified in WRF06B. Caution: There will be a slight error even if correction setting is performed Sets the frequency value and on-duty value of the PWM output number specified by the on-duty value and the specified frequency value. Sets the frequency value in Hz. Example: To set a frequency of 1 kHz, set 1000 (H3B8) as internal output. Sets the on-duty value in %. Example: To set an on-duty of 80 %, set 80 (H50) as internal output. When the on-duty is set to be auto-corrected, the effective range of the on-duty is calculated using the following expressions. On-duty lower limit value (%) = Hardware delay time (µs) x Frequency used (Hz) x 10-4 On-duty upper limit value (%) = 100 − Hardware delay time (µs) x Frequency used (Hz) x 10-4 If the CPU model is EH-***DRP and the PWM output is 2 kHz, On-duty lower limit value = 50 x 2000 x 10-4 = 10 % On-duty upper limit value = 100 − (50 x 2000 x 10-4) = 90 % Thus, the effective range of the on-duty will be 10 % to 90 %. 5-138 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Notes • • • • • • If a value other than H01 to H04 is specified as the PWM output number, and if the on-duty value is outside the effective range, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the external I/O corresponding to the PWM output number is set to a function other than PWM output, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. The settings made using the instruction will be reflected in the special internal output (WRF072 to WRF075 and WRF076 to WRF079). However, it is not reflected if DER becomes equal to “1.” The minimum frequency that can be supported is 10 kHz. If a frequency value smaller than 10 kHz is specified, it will be changed to 10 kHz internally by the system. The maximum frequency that can be supported is 2 kHz. Do not set to more than 2 kHz. Operation above 2 kHz is not guaranteed. If the range for S exceeds the valid range of the I/O, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. Program example R8 DIF8 LD AND [ WR80 WR81 WR82 FUN ] WR80 = H0100 WR81 = 2000 WR82 = 30 FUN 148 (WR80) R8 DIF8 = H100 = 2000 = 30 148 ( WR80 ) Program description Sets both the frequency and on-duty value of the PWM output No. 1 (Y100). Sets 2000 (Hz) for the frequency and 30 (%) for the on-duty value. FUN 148 (s) • 5-139 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name FUN instructions-14 Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z Instruction format X Y 149 Condition Steps — 3 Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Argument (Pulse output number) Remark Average Maximum Number of steps FUN 149 (s) s Processing time (µs) R7F4 FUN 149 (s) Usable I/O Pulse output control Constant Item number Other { Function 15 S • Pulse output number 0 Operation instruction Pulse output number: H01 to H04 Operation instruction: H00 – Stop, H01 - Start Starts pulse output of the specified pulse number and the output is stopped once the specified number of pulses are output. Notes • • • FUN 149 (s) • • • • • • • If the pulse output number is set to a value other than H01 to H04 and the pulse output number is set to “0,” DER will be set to “1”and no processing will be performed. If the external I/O corresponding to the pulse output number is set to a function other than pulse output, DER will be set to “1”and no processing will be performed. If the specified counter number is unable to make an output (PI/O function setting result by R7F5), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. The pulse that is output with this instruction will be a pulse having a duty of 30 to 50 %. (To output a pulse having a duty ratio of 50 %, set the value corresponding to the CPU model in the special internal output WRF06B, by referring to Section 8.1.4.) When pulse output is commenced with this instruction, the output control flag (R7FC to R7FF) that corresponds to the pulse output number will turn on while the pulse is output. It will turn off when the specified number of pulses have been output. When the CPU is not operating, the pulse output continues/stops according to the setting of the special internal output (output selection at R7DC stop). This instruction does not have an acceleration/deceleration function. Only pulse output stop operation can be executed for the I/O that is outputting a pulse with the acceleration/deceleration function. If this instruction is executed while the backup memory is being written (R7EF=1), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. The backup memory will not be written during pulse output. Be extremely careful when you change a program during RUN. Program example R9 DIF9 LD AND [ WR9 FUN ] WR9 = H0101 FUN 149 (WR9) R9 DIF9 = H101 149 ( WR9 ) Program description • Prior to starting a pulse output operation, various settings required for the pulse output operation are reflected in the special internal outputs, and the PI/O function setting flag (R7F5) is turned on while the CPU is being stopped. For more details on the special internal output settings, see Chapter 8. Starts the pulse output No. 1 (Y100) operation. 5-140 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Name FUN instructions-15 Ladder format Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z FUN 150 (s) Instruction format Number of steps Steps — 3 X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, Double word DR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Argument (Pulse number) Argument (Frequency s+1 value) Argument (Number of s+2 output pulses) Remark Average Maximum 217 Condition FUN 150 (s) Usable I/O Pulse frequency output setting changes Constant Item number Other { s { { Function S 0 Pulse output number Change specification S+1 Frequency value S+2 Number of pulse output Pulse output number: Change specification: H01 to H04 H00: Sets the frequency value and number of pulse output, H01: Sets the frequency value only, H02: Sets the number of pulse output Frequency: 10 to 5000 (Hz) * The maximum frequency of 5000 Hz represents the total of all pulse output frequencies. * If the frequency value is set to less than 10 Hz, it is internally changed to 10 Hz. The S parameter is also rewritten. Number of output pulses: H0000 – HFFFF (0 to 65535) Auto correction is executed when the value corresponding to the CPU model is specified in WRF06B. Caution: There will be a slight error even if correction setting is performed. • • • Pulse output is commenced at the specified frequency. Output is stopped once the number of pulses specified have been output. Sets the frequency value in Hz. Example: To set a frequency of 3 kHz, set 3000 (HBB8) as internal output. Sets the count for the number of output pulses. Example: To set output of 10,000, set 10,000 (H2710) as internal output. 5-141 FUN 150 (s) 15 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Notes • • • • • • • • • If the pulse output number is set to a value other than H01 to H04, DER will be set to “1”and no processing will be performed. If the external I/O corresponding to the pulse output number is set to a function other than pulse output, DER will be set to “1”and no processing will be performed. The minimum frequency that can be supported is 10 kHz. If a frequency value smaller than 10 kHz is specified, it will be changed to 10 kHz internally by the system. If the specified frequency value is greater than 5 kHz, or even when it is 5 kHz or less, and if the total sum with other set pulse output frequencies becomes greater than 5 kHz, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the specified frequency value is 5 kHz or less, and the total sum with other set pulse output frequencies is also 5 kHz or less, the bit corresponding to the setting error detail WRF057 will be set to “0” and the operation enable state becomes active. The settings by this instruction will be reflected in the special internal output (WRF072 to WRF075 and WRF07A to WRF07D). If the range for S exceeds the valid range of the I/O, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. If the pulse output number is set to “0,” pulse output will not be performed even when the pulse output start (R7FC to R7FF is set to “1” or FUN149) is set. If this instruction is executed for the I/O that is outputting a pulse with the acceleration/deceleration function, DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. Program example R10 DIF10 LD AND [ WR100 WR101 WR102 FUN ] WR100 = H0100 WR101 = 219 WR102 = 1000 FUN 150 (WR100) Program description • FUN 150 (s) Sets both the frequency and pulse output count of the pulse output No. 1 (Y100). Sets 500 (Hz) for the frequency and 3,000 for the number of pulse outputs. 5-142 R10 DIF10 = H100 = 219 = 1000 150 ( WR100 ) Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Item number Name FUN instructions-16 Ladder format Pulse output with acceleration/deceleration Processing time (µs) Condition code R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 DER ERR SD V C ↕ z z z z FUN 151 (s) Instruction format Number of steps Condition Remark Average Maximum 919 Steps Bit Word Double word TD, SS, R, WDT, MS, WR, DR, L, TMR, CU, M RCU, CT WX WY WM TC DX DY DM { Usable I/O X s Y Pulse output No. Total No. of output pulses Maximum frequency s+2 (Hz) s+3 Initial frequency (Hz) Other { s+1 s+4 Constant FUN 151 (s) { { Acceleration/deceleration time (ms) { Function s 8 7 0 Pulse output No. ** s+1 Total No. of output pulses N s+2 Maximum frequency F (Hz) s+3 Initial frequency F0 (Hz) s+4 Acceleration/deceleration time T (ms) Pulse output No.: **: Total No. of output pulses: Maximum frequency (Hz): Initial frequency (Hz): Acceleration/deceleration time (ms): H01 to H04 Invalid area H0000 to HFFFF (0 to 65535) HA to H1388 (10 to 5000) HA to H1388 (10 to 5000) H0000 to HFFFF (0 to 65535) This instruction outputs pulses with the acceleration/deceleration function. It outputs pulses from the pulse output terminal set with the pulse output number s until the total number of output pulses set with s+1 is reached. Since the output of pulses starts from the one having the frequency set with s+3, set the parameters so that the stepping motor and other devices will not become out of tune. Acceleration is performed at the acceleration time set with s+4 in 10 steps until the maximum frequency set with s+2 is reached. Deceleration is performed at the deceleration time set with s+4 until the total number of output pulses set with s+1 is reached. The ratio of frequency change for the deceleration is the same as for the acceleration. Pulse frequency (Hz) F:S+2 T / 10 9 1 8 2 7 3 6 (F-F0) / 10 4 5 5 4 6 3 7 2 F0:S+3 8 1 9 0 10 Time (sec) Deceleration time Acceleration time T:S+4 T:S+4 5-143 FUN 151 (s) 15 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Notes When this instruction is executed, the maximum frequency is stored in the special internal output’s pulse output frequency (WRF072 to WFR075), and the number of output pulses is stored in the special internal output’s number of output pulses (WRF07A to WRF07D) respectively. This instruction will not be executed if the specified pulse output is generating pulse output. If the output that corresponds to the specified pulse output number has not been set for pulse output, DER will be set to “1” and pulse output will not be generated. If the total of the frequency set with this instruction and the frequency set for another pulse output exceeds 5 kHz, DER will be set to “1” and pulse output will not be generated. If the maximum frequency is larger than the initial frequency, DER will be set to “1” and pulse output will not be generated. If the same value is specified for the maximum frequency and initial frequency, pulses will be output for the number of pulses set with the maximum cycle without acceleration/deceleration. If the maximum frequency and initial frequency are set to a value smaller than 10 Hz, the specified values will be changed to 10 Hz by the system. If the total number of output pulses is small, deceleration will be performed without accelerating up to the maximum frequency. In this case, the specified acceleration/deceleration time will not be used as the acceleration/deceleration time; it will be accelerated (or decelerated) for each pulse. For the acceleration/deceleration time, set a value equal to or larger than (1 / maximum frequency + 1 / initial frequency) x 5. If an acceleration/deceleration time smaller than this value is specified, the specified acceleration/deceleration will not be set. Acceleration and deceleration are performed in 10 steps, and at least one or more pulses are always output. Thus, if a small initial frequency value is specified, an error in the acceleration/deceleration time will become large. Pulse frequency (Hz) Pulse frequency (Hz) F:S+2 F:S+2 Equivalent to one pulse Equivalent to one pulse (F-F0) / 10 (F-F0) / 10 F0:S+3 F0:S+3 0 0 Time (sec) FUN 151 (s) Specified acceleration time T:S+4 Specified acceleration time T:S+4 Actual acceleration time • • Specified deceleration time set T:S+4 Actual deceleration time Pulse output at abnormal setting If this instruction is executed while the backup memory is being written (R7EF=1), DER will be set to “1” and no processing will be performed. The backup memory will not be written during pulse output. Be extremely careful when you change a program during RUN. Program example R7E3 WR0100 = H0200 WR0101 = H1000 WR0102 = 1000 WR0103 = 500 WR0104 = 300 X00001 DIF0 FUN 151(WR0100) LD R7E3 [ WR0100 = H0200 WR0101 = H1000 WR0102 = 1000 WR0103 = 500 WR0104 = 300 ] LD X00001 AND DIF0 [ FUN 151 (WR0100) ] Program description Sets the required parameters in the special internal outputs at the first scan after RUN start. At the leading edge of X00001, pulses are output starting from Y101 using the following settings: acceleration/deceleration time of 300 (Hz), initial frequency of 500 (Hz), maximum frequency of 1000 (Hz), and number of output pulses of 4,096 pulses. 5-144 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications Item number Name FUN instructions-17 Ladder format BOX comment Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 FUN 254 (s) DER ERR SD V C * (BOXC (s) ) z z z z z Instruction format Number of steps Condition Remark Average Maximum Steps FUN 254 (s) 3 Usable I/O X Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Y Word WR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Argument (dummy constant) s Double word DR, Constant * (BOXC (s) ) Other { Function • * This instruction does not perform any operations. It is used to print comments on the right side of the calculation box in conjunction with the Ladder Editor. A comment can contain a maximum of 32 characters. ( ) indicates the display when the Ladder Editor is used. Item number Name FUN instructions-18 Ladder format Memo comment Condition code Processing time (µs) R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7F0 FUN 255 (s) DER ERR SD V C * (MEMC (s) ) z z z z z Instruction format Condition Average Maximum Number of steps Remark FUN 254 (s) FUN 255 (s) • Steps FUN 255 (s) 3 Usable I/O X Y Bit R, TD, SS, M CU, CT Word WR, WX WY WM TC DX DY DM Argument (dummy constant) s Double word DR, Constant * (MEMC (s) ) Other { Function • • * This instruction does not perform any operations. It is used to print comments on the right side of the calculation box in conjunction with the Ladder Editor. A comment can contain a maximum of one screen (66 characters × 16 lines). ( ) indicates the display when the Ladder Editor is used. 5-145 Chapter 5 Instruction Specifications 5-146 Chapter 6 I/O Specifications Chapter 6 I/O Specifications Table 6.1 lists the input/output classifications and input/output point types that can be used with the MICRO-EH Internal I/O 2 Others 3 Analog input Analog output Counter input Interrupt input Counter output Pulse/PWM output Bit 10/16 External I/O External I/O* 1 Size Function Symbol Item Table 6.1 Usable I/O classifications and point types X WX DX Y WY DY WX WY X X Y B W D B W D W W B B B 10 16 16 10 16 16 16 16 10 10 10 Y B 10 B B W D W D B W D B B B B B 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 10 10 10 10 10 Bit external input Word external input Double-word external input Bit external output Word external output Double-word external output Analog input Analog output High-speed counter input Interrupt input High-speed counter synchronized output Pulse output PWM output Bit internal output Bit special internal output Word internal output Double-word internal output Word special internal output D.-word special internal output Bit internal output Word internal output Double-word internal output Rising edge Falling edge Master control set Master control reset On delay timer SS B 10 Single-shot timer CU B 10 Up counter CTU B 10 Up-down counter up input CTD B 10 Up-down counter down input CL B 10 Clear progress value R R Word WR DR WR DR Sharing of M bit / word WM DM Edge detection DIF DFN Master control MCS MCR Timer counter TD Name 10-point type Number of points 14-point type Number of points 23-point type Number of points 28-point type Number of points 6 points 1 word 8 points 1 word 13 points 1 word 16 points 2 words 4 points 1 word 6 points 1 word 10 points 1 word 12 points 1 word 3 points total 3 points 4 points total 4 points 2 words 1 word 4 points total 4 points 4 points total 4 points 3 point 4 points 4 point 4 points 1984 points 64 points 4096 words 512 words 16384 points 1024 words 512 points 512 points 50 points Timer 256 points (0.01 s timer has only 0 to 63) Counter 256 points (The same area as the timer is used.) (The same timer counter number cannot be used more than once.) *: The external I/O, counter I/O, interrupt input, pulse/PWM outputs use the same area by specifying the operation I/O operation mode (WRF070). See Chapter 8 for further information. Note: The MICRO-EH does not support CPU link area (L/WL). Note: B and W in the Size column represent bit and word (16 bits), respectively. 6-1 Chapter 6 I/O Specifications 6.1 I/O Assignment I/O assignment and I/O address are listed below. Table 6.2 I/O assignment and I/O address Type I/O assignment Digital Basic Analog 10-point 14-point 23-point 28-point type type type type Slot 0 : X48 X0-5 X0-7 X0-12 X0-15 Slot 1 : Y32 Y100-103 Y100-105 Y100-109 Y100-111 Slot 2 : Empty - - Slot 3 : X4W - - WX30-31 - Slot 4 : Y4W - - WY40 - Digital Unit 1 / Slot 0 : B1/1 Analog Unit 1 / Slot 0 : FUN0 Digital Unit 2 / Slot 0 : B1/1 Analog Unit 2 / Slot 0 : FUN0 Digital Unit 3 / Slot 0 : B1/1 Analog Unit 3 / Slot 0 : FUN0 Digital Unit 4 / Slot 0 : B1/1 Analog Unit 4 / Slot 0 : FUN0 Exp.1 Exp.2 Exp.3 Exp.4 - - - X1000-1007 / 1015 (14 / 28 pts.) - Y1016-1021 / 1027 (14 / 28 pts.) - WX101-104 (WX100 is for command function under development) - WY106-107 (WY105 is for command function under development) - X2000-2007 / 2015 (14 / 28 pts.) - Y2016-2021 / 2027 (14 / 28 pts.) - WX201-204 (WX200 is for command function under development) - WY206-207 (WY205 is for command function under development) - X3000-3007 / 3015 (14 / 28 pts.) - Y3016-3021 / 3027 (14 / 28 pts.) - WX301-304 (WX300 is for command function under development) - WY306-307 (WY305 is for command function under development) - X4000-4007 / 4015 (14 / 28 pts.) - Y4016-4021 / 4027 (14 / 28 pts.) - WX401-404 (WX400 is for command function under development) - WY406-407 (WY405 is for command function under development) 6-2 Chapter 6 I/O Specifications 6.2 External I/O Numbers When starting an operation of the MICRO-EH, a user program is executed (scanned) after the input refresh processing (receiving external input data) is performed. Operations are performed according to the contents of the user program, and the next input refresh processing and output refresh processing (operation results are reflected in the external output) are performed. After that, the next user program is executed (scanned). This series of operations is continually repeated until the operation is stopped or until a problem occurs in which the operation can no longer continue. When the operation is stopped or if a problem interrupting the operation occurs, the CPU performs output refresh processing making all output data as off data and then stops the operation, regardless of the execution status of the user program. Figure 6.1 shows a diagram outlining this series of operations. Input refresh processing Input refresh processing Output refresh processing Time RUN start Execute (scan) user program System processing Output refresh processing (off data) Time RUN stop Execute (scan) user program Figure 6.1 Overview of user program execution and refresh processing The user programs are executed in sequence, normally beginning with the program in the beginning of the scan area till the last program, or until the END instruction. Then, I/O data is refreshed prior to the execution of the next user program. As shown above, external I/O data is updated in batch mode in the refresh processing after the user program is executed. If it is necessary to update (refresh) the I/O data while the user program is being executed, use the refresh instruction. When designing a system, take into account the above refresh operation from when the input data is received and operated until output data is obtained. 6-3 Chapter 6 I/O Specifications The following explains the external I/O assignment. The external I/O numbers for the MICRO-EH system are expressed with the following conventions. Classification X WX DX Y WY DY Table 6.6 List of external I/O classification and data type I/O classification Data type Remarks External input Bit type Corresponds to the signal of each terminal block. Word type (16-bit) Data in the range 0 to 15 is batch processed. 16-bit synchronicity guaranteed. Double-word type (32-bit) Two word data are batch expressed. Lower 16-bit and upper 16-bit synchronicity are not guaranteed. External output Bit type Corresponds to the signal of each terminal block. Word type (16-bit) Data in the range 0 to 15 is batch processed. 16-bit synchronicity guaranteed. Double-word type (32-bit) Two word data are expressed as one batch. Lower 16-bit and upper 16-bit synchronicity are not guaranteed. Table 6.7 List of I/O number conventions for external I/O Numbering convention Data type Bit type (basic) X Input Output Bit number Slot number (X:0 Unit number (0) Y Bit type (expansion) EH-A23DRP X0~X12, WX30,WX31 Y:1) Y100~Y109, WY40 X Input Output Bit number (X:00-07/15 Y:16-21/27) Slot number (0) Unit number (1-4) Y Word type (basic/expansion) Example EH-A28EDR X1000~X1015 Y1016~Y1021 WX EH-A6EAN (Analog exp.) WY WX201~WX204 Word number Slot number Unit number (1-4) WY206, WY207 6-4 Chapter 6 I/O Specifications 6.3 Internal Output Numbers Memory is available as an internal output area in the CPU module. There are three areas: bit dedicated area (R), word dedicated area (WR), and bit/word shared area (M/WM). Table 6.8 List of I/O number conventions for external I/O Numbering convention Data type Bit-dedicated type Example R0 R105 R23C R7E7 R Normal area H000 to H7BF Special area H7C0 to H7FF Both are expressed as hexadecimals. Word dedicated type WR0 WR11 WR123 WRF004 WR Normal area H0000 to Special area HF000 to Both are expressed as hexadecimals. DR0 DR11 DR123 DRF004 DR Normal area H0000 to Special area HF000 to Both are expressed as hexadecimals. Expresses WR for 2 words in continuation. Bit/word shared type M WM H0000~ M0 M11 M123 H000~ WM0 WM11 WM123 ........... M120F M1200 WM120 DM0 DM11 DM234 DM H0000 to Expresses as hexadecimals. Expresses DM for 2 words in continuation. • Internal outputs R, WR and DR are completely separate areas. Bit-based operations cannot be performed in the WR. (Example) Relationships among R100, WR10, and DR10 R area R100 WR/DR area Another area WR10 WR11 DR10 DR11 • Because internal outputs M, WM and DM share the same area, bit-based operations are allowed. (Example) Relationships among M100, WM10, and DM10 M11F ....... M110 M10F WM11 M10A M109 WM10 DM10 DM11 6-5 ....... M100 Chapter 7 Programming Chapter 7 7.1 Programming Memory Size and Memory Assignment Table 7.1. Lists the programming specifications for the MICRO-EH. Table 7.1 Programming specifications 10/14-point type 23/28-point type Program size 3 k steps (3072 steps) Instruction size 32 bits/1 step Memory specification SRAM Backup with a battery is not possible Backup is possible by installing the since a battery cannot be installed. battery. FLASH Backup using flash memory is possible. 4 Programming language H-series ladder/instruction language 5 Program creation Created with H-series programming devices 6 Program modification During STOP Can be done as desired from the programming devices. During RUN Can be done using the modify during RUN operation (except control instructions). Control instructions can be changed with special operations. *1 (When a change is made during RUN, control operation stops while the program is being modified.). 7 Program protection Programs can only be modified when write is enabled. (The enable status is automatically controlled by the programming device). 8 Password A password can be set from the programming device (the program cannot be displayed when setting the password. The programs can be downloaded to the programming device). 9 Check function A sum check function for the program is always executing. An address check with the I/O assignment table is executed when RUN operation starts. 10 Program name The program names are set from the programming device and stored along with the programs. *1: Refer to the peripheral unit manual for details. Notes: • Comment data that has been created with the peripheral unit is not stored in the CPU. • Save the user programs to a floppy disk or other media for backup. • If a program exceeding 3072 steps is created by setting 4 K steps in the LADDER EDITOR, no error occurs in the LADDER EDITOR, but a “writing outside memory range” error will occur when writing the program to the CPU. • Unlike the conventional H series, the MICRO-EH series backup user programs in the FLASH memory. In order to shorten the program transfer time, the user programs are transferred once to the operation execution memory, at which point the transfer is completed. The backup to the FLASH memory is performed afterward; therefore, be sure to turn off the power to the main unit after approximately two minutes have passed since the program transfer. If the power is turned off within two minutes, a user memory error (31H) may occur. Note that the transfer completion to the FLASH memory can be confirmed by the special internal output (R7EF). No. 1 2 3 Item 7-1 Chapter 7 Programming 7.2 Programming Devices The following methods are used to create the user programs. No. 1 2 Table 7.2 Programming methods Programming device used Concept of operation Remarks Personal computer software [For off-line/on-line operation] • I/O assignment information (LADDER EDITOR, etc.) Creates an I/O assignment table, inputs the program to be can be read. created, and transfers the program to the CPU in online • Initialize the CPU when mode. starting up for the first time [For direct operation] after the unit is unpacked or As each program is entered one by one, it is directly when a battery error occurs. written to the CPU. Change operation can be performed during RUN operation. Note: This mode is not available for Windows version. [During on-direct operation] When programs are input one by one, the input programs are written into the CPU’s memory and personal computer’s memory. Change operation can be performed during RUN operation. Note: To enter the on-direct mode, match the contents in the CPU’s memory and personal computer’s memory. Dedicated programming [For off-line/on-line operation] console (GPCL01H, etc.) Creates an I/O assignment table, inputs the program to be created, and transfers the program to the CPU in online mode. [For direct operation] As each program is entered one by one, it is directly written to the CPU. Change operation can be performed during RUN operation. Note: This mode is not available for Windows version. [During on-direct operation] On-direct operation cannot be performed. Portable graphic programmers and instruction language programmers can not be used. 7-2 Chapter 7 Programming 7.3 Programming Methods The following shows the system configuration using a personal computer and the procedures for creating a user program using personal computer software. Please note that cables differ depending on the personal computer and software used. Table 7.3 System configuration using a personal computer Personal computer No. software used 1 LADDER EDITOR (Windows version) DOS/V PC PC9800 series personal computer Install Install LADDER EDITOR for Windows (HLW-PC3, (Windows 95/98/NT) HLW-PC3E) system disks (Japanese, English) DOS/V PC CPU setting Memory assignment Cable (MICRO-EH side) Cable (personal computer side) 10-point type 14/23/28-point type 10/14-point type Port 2 2 23/28-point type LADDER EDITOR for Windows® (HLW-PC3) system disks (Japanese) Specify H-302. Specify RAM-04H (4 K memory). EH-VCB02 EH-RS05 EH-RS05 WVCB02H WPCB02H There are no DIP switches (fixed to 4800 bps). DIP SW Port 1 *1, *2 PC9800 series PC (Windows® 95/98/NT) Status 1 ON ON OFF OFF 2 3 4 OFF ON OFF 38.4 kbps OFF OFF OFF 19.2 kbps OFF ON OFF 9600 bps OFF OFF OFF 4800 bps Same as left Port 2 does not exist. Cannot be connected with the above configuration since the RS-422/485 are used (RS232C/422 converters are required.) Set the transmission speed in the special internal output (WRF03D). LADDER EDITOR (DOS version) Install Install DOS/V PC (MS-DOS®) LADDER EDITOR DOS version (HL-AT3E) system disks (English) PC9800 series PC (MS-DOS®) LADDER EDITOR DOS version (HL-PC3) system disks (Japanese) CPU setting Specify H-302. Memory assignment Specify RAM-04H (4 k memory). Cable (MICRO-EH side) EH-RS05 EH-VCB02 Cable PCCB02H (personal computer side) 10-point type There are no DIP switches (fixed to 4800 bps). Port 1 DIPSW 1 2 3 4 *1, *2 14/23/28-point type Same as left Status OFF OFF OFF OFF 4800 bps 10/14-point type Port 2 does not exist. Cannot be connected with the above configuration since the RS-422/485 are used (RSPort 2 23/28-point type 232C/422 converters are required.) Set the transmission speed in the special internal output (WRF03D). *1: Settings of the port 1 can be changed when the DR signal is off. When the DR signal is on, the setting is fixed. *2: Set the port 1 to the transmission control procedure 1 by the special internal output (WRF01A). (The default is the transmission control procedure 1.) Note: Refer to the manual of the applicable software on how to install and operate each software (LADDER EDITOR). 7-3 Chapter 7 Programming Item Create new program Off-line Start Start Select off-line Select off-line Out-line of opera-ting procedure Initialize PLC CPU type: Specify H-302 Memory type: Specify RAM-04H Create I/O assignment Create program Program check NG Situation Start Select on-line Select on-line Regenerate from FD, etc. Regenerate from FD, etc. When utilizing a program created in another H-series CPU type: Specify H302 Memory type: Specify RAM-04H Initialize the CPU when running it for the first time(right after purchase, etc.) Modify I/O assignment Modify program Program check NG Transfer program (CPU → PLC) Select on-direct Conduct test operation Transfer program (PLC → CPU) *1 NG OK Conduct test operation Modify program (modify during RUN, etc.) Operation check OK NG OK OK OK End Point Start CPU error check Save in FD, etc. *1: Table 7.4 List of procedures for creating a program Modify Test operation, adjustment Off-line On-line On-direct Operation check OK Change the name and save in FD, etc. OK NG To modification Enter in FD, etc. End End End When creating a new program When modifying a program When transferring a created program to the CPU for the first time When modifying a program during test operation A program can be created without executing MICROEH. When using a program that was used in another H-series, specify H-302 as the CPU type. When performing CPU error check, make sure the I/O assignment matches the loaded module. (The loading read function can be used to match them forcibly.) To enter the on-direct mode, match the contents in the CPU’s memory and personal computer’s memory. The modified contents will be reflected in both the computer memory and CPU memory. Set the flow size to 0 for memory assignment. If a program transfer is performed by specifying the flow size, the message “Cannot execute: Operation error” is displayed, and a peripheral unit remain as WRITE occupied. In this case, either cancel the occupy state from LADDER EDITOR of the peripheral unit or by re-entering the CPU power. 7-4 Chapter 7 Programming The user program is managed in circuit units. One circuit can describe nine contact points (a-type contact point or b-type contact point) and seven coils as shown in the figure below. Figure 7.1 Size of one circuit Or, one relational box can be described using the width of three contact points. The relational box can be considered as an a-type contact point that turns on when the conditions in the box are established (Figure 7.2). Figure 7.2 Example when using a relational box 7-5 Chapter 7 Programming In addition, if loop symbols are used, a circuit containing up to 57 contact points and one coil can be entered within seven lines. However, an OR circuit cannot be input after a loop. * * * * * * * * * * * * Figure 7.3 Example when using loop symbols A processing box can be placed at the coil position. The processing instructions, application instructions, control instructions, transfer instruction and fun instructions can be described in a processing box. A maximum of 19 instructions can be described in one processing box. The processing box is executed when the conditions in the contact section to be connected directly in advance is established. The processing box is not executed if the condition is not established. See the chapter on the “Instruction Specifications” for details on each instruction. WR0 = WR0 + WR1 WR1 = WR1 * 3 WR2 = WR2 / 4 WR0 = WX0 AND HFF00 . . . . . . . Up to a maximum of 19 lines . . . . . . . . . A maximum of 4 lines can be described Figure 7.4 Example when using a processing box Note: For the LADDER EDITOR for Windows, a processing box can be displayed in one contact point width, so a circuit of nine contact points and one processing box can be entered. For more details, refer to the user's manual for the LADDER EDITOR for Windows. 7-6 Chapter 7 Programming 7.4 Program Transfer The MICRO-EH stores the user programs written from the peripheral units in the execution memory (RAM). Then, it transfers the user programs to the FLASH memory (backup memory) utilizing the idle time of the MPU in the internal area of the MICRO-EH. This is performed regardless of operation status of the CPU. Therefore, the programs may not be written into the backup memory (FLASH memory) even though the peripheral units display that program transfer has been completed. If the power is turned off before the programs are written to the FLASH memory, the customer’s programs may be lost. In order to prevent such crisis, it is necessary to monitor the Backup Memory Writing Progress Flag (R7EF) after the programs are transferred. When this bit special internal output is ON, it indicates that the data (programs, etc.) are being transferred to the backup memory. When is it OFF, it indicates that the data is not being written to the backup memory. Turning off the power after making sure that the Backup Memory Writing Progress Flag (R7EF) turns off after the program is transferred from the peripheral unit to the MICRO-EH will ensure that the program is backed up properly. (The transfer to the backup memory takes approximately two minutes.) If a new program is written from a peripheral unit while a user program is being transferred to the backup memory (FLASH memory), the user program transfer to the backup memory will be stopped and the new program will be transferred to the backup memory. Therefore, the program that is stored in the backup memory will be the program that is written last. In addition to the user programs, the settings to be stored in the special internal outputs can be transferred to the backup memory. The transfer of the special internal outputs for various settings (Note 1) can be executed by turning ON the Memory Request for Various Settings Flag (R7F6). As with the transfer of the user programs, the Backup Memory Writing Progress Flag (R7EF) will be turned ON during this transfer. Figure 7.5 below shows the operation of the Backup Memory Writing Progress Flag (R7EF) during the backup of the special internal output for various settings and the backup of the user programs. Note that when one is being transferred, the next transfer will not start until the current transfer is complete. Backup memory writing R7EF progress flag Special internal output write request for various R7F6 settings 1] 3] 2] 6] 4], 5] When there is no conflict between the user program write and the setting memory request of the special internal output 1] 2] 3] 4] 5] 6] 4], 5] 1] 6] 3] 2] When a setting memory request of the special internal output is generated during the transfer of the user program 1] 4] 2] 5] 6] 3] When a user program write is generated during the transfer of the special internal output R7F6 ON due to forced set or reset Special internal output transfer start for various settings Special internal output transfer end for various settings Write from the peripheral unit is complete. User program transfer start User program transfer end Figure 7.5 Operation of the bit special internal output when backup memory is being accessed Note: • The backup memory cannot be written during pulse output. If a program is changed during RUN with respect to the CPU during pulse output, turn off the power supply approximately two minutes after pulse output stops. • Pulses cannot be output while the backup memory is being written. Commence pulse output once again after the Backup Memory Writing Progress Flag turns off. 7-7 Chapter 7 Programming Note 1) The following lists the special internal outputs for various settings that can be transferred to the backup memory by the Memory Request for Various Settings Flag (R7F6). 1 Table 7.5 List of special internal outputs that can be stored Special internal output Function that can be stored WRF01A Dedicated port 1 Communication settings 2 WRF03C Dedicated port 1 Modem timeout time 3 WRF03D Dedicated port 2 Communication settings No. 4 WRF06B Pulse/PWM automatic correction settings 5 WRF06C Potentiometer 1 Filtering time 6 WRF06D Potentiometer 2 Filtering time 7 WRF06E Analog input type selection 8 WRF06F Phase counting mode 9 WRF070 I/O operation mode 10 WRF071 I/O detailed function settings Output frequency On-preset value 11 WRF072 12 WRF073 13 WRF074 14 WRF075 15 WRF076 16 WRF077 17 WRF078 18 WRF079 19 WRF07A 20 WRF07B 21 WRF07C 22 WRF07D 23 WRF07E Input edge 24 WRF07F Input filtering time On-duty value Off-preset value Pre-load value Pulse output value 7-8 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O The MICRO-EH operates in four operation modes. By selecting the proper operation mode, input/output points can be assigned to the counter input, interrupt input, pulse output, and PWM output functions, instead of the normal input/output function. The 14-point type model or higher are equipped with two potentiometers. The values of internal outputs can be changed externally using these potentiometers, without peripheral units. The 23-point type model is equipped with two points of analogue input and one point of analogue output. This chapter explains how to set various functions mentioned above, together with simple usage examples. 8.1 Input/Output Function The normal input/output points can not only be used as they are, but can also be assigned special functions. In order to assign these special functions, it is necessary to select the right operation mode; the following briefly explains the procedure for selecting the operation modes. Refer to the section corresponding to each item for the details. 8.1.1 Initial Setting for Special Input/Output Function Figure 8.1 shows a flowchart for the setting procedures. First, select an operation mode. There are 5 operation modes, mode 0 to 3 and 10. By selecting an operation mode the input number to be used for high-speed counter input and the type of counter is determined, along with the output number for the corresponding output. Next, the desired input/output function for each point of input/output should be selected, because the function assigned to input/output varies depending on the operation mode selected. Lastly, set the operating conditions for each input/output function selected. Furthermore, performing the settings mentioned above does not in itself make the settings valid for the actual operation. The settings become valid only after turning on the special internal output for individual setting (R7F5). After making the settings valid, it is possible to make changes for each function using the special internal output for individual setting. Turning the special internal output (R7F6) on also stores the settings performed above in the FLASH memory. From the next time the power supply is turned on, the settings stored in the FLASH memory are automatically read; it is not necessary to perform the settings every time. Set the number 0 to 3 corresponding to the mode you want to set in WRF070. Refer to Table 8.1 for the details of each mode. 1] Set the operation mode Note 1) Note 2) Note 3) If nothing is set, the settings stored in the FLASH memory become valid. If a number larger than 4 is set, mode 0 will be selected. After the settings are stored in the FLASH memory, it is not necessary to perform the settings after step 1] from the next time. Set the function of each input/output terminal in WRF071. Refer to the section about detailed function settings for the details. 2] Set input/output terminal Note 4) 3] Set the operating conditions for each function If nothing is set, the initial value will become 0. Set the operating conditions for each function in WRF072 to WRF07E. Refer to the section about detailed operating condition settings for the details. Note 5) If nothing is set, the initial value will become 0. The settings performed in steps 1] to 3] become valid by turning R7F5 on. Note 6) 4] Make the settings valid 5] Change individual setting 6] Store the settings in the memory. The settings performed in steps 1] to 3] do not become valid unless R7F5 is turned on while output is turned off. Moreover, if R7F5 is turned on while the CPU is running, the settings do not become valid even though R7F5 is turned on. The settings become valid at the point when the CPU is stopped. The settings performed in steps 1] to 3] are stored in the FLASH memory by turning R7F6 on. It is not necessary to perform the settings again when the power supply is turned on for the next time. Note 7) Note 8) Note 9) If R7F6 is not turned on, the settings will be changed to the ones stored in the FLASH memory when the power supply is turned on for the next time (if nothing is stored in the FLASH memory, the initial values will be set). When the CPU is operating, the settings are not stored in the FLASH memory by turning R7F6 on. R7EF turns on while the settings are transferred to the FLASH memory. If the power supply to the main unit is turned off while R7EF is on, the settings are not properly stored in the FLASH memory; there is a possibility that the parameter settings are initialized when the power supply is turned on for the next time. Figure 8.1 Flow of operation mode setting procedure 8-1 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.1.2 Operation Mode Select one mode from the 5 modes shown in Table 8.1 (mode 10 described in following pages.) and set the mode number in the special internal output WRF070 when the CPU is in STOP status. *1: *2: If parameter in WRF070 is not saved by R7F6, the value will be 0 at the next power on. The operation mode setting can be changed only when CPU is in STOP status. Each input and output terminal setting is configured in WRF071. Mode 0 Standard X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Y100 Standard input Standard input Interrupt input 1 Standard input Standard input Interrupt input 2 Standard input Standard input Interrupt input 3 Standard input *3 Standard input *3 Interrupt input 4 *3 Standard output PWM output 1 Pulse output 1 Standard output PWM output 2 *5 Pulse output 2 *5 Standard output PWM output 3 *5 Pulse output 3 *5 Standard output Table 8.1 Operation mode list Mode 1 Mode 2 Single-phase counter ×2 Single-phase counter ×4 Counter input 1 Counter preload 1 Counter strobe 1 Standard input *6 Counter input 2 Counter preload 2 Counter strobe 2 Standard input *6 Standard input Standard input Interrupt input 3 Standard input *6 Standard input *3 Standard input *3 Interrupt input 4 *3 Standard input *6 Counter output 1 Standard output *6 Counter input 1 Counter preload 1 Counter strobe 1 Standard input *6 Counter input 2 Counter preload 2 Counter strobe 2 Standard input *6 Counter input 3 Counter preload 3 Counter strobe 3 Standard input *6 Counter input 4 *3 Counter preload 4 *3 Counter strobe 4 *3 Standard input *6 Counter output 1 Standard output *6 Counter output 2 Standard output *6 Counter output 2 Standard output *6 Mode 3 2-phase counter ×1, Single-phase counter ×1 Counter input 1A Counter preload 1 Counter strobe 1 Standard input *6 Counter input 1B Counter input (marker) 1Z Standard input Standard input Interrupt input 3 Counter input 4 *3 Counter preload 4 *3 Counter strobe 4 *3 Standard input *6 Counter output 1 Standard output *6 Standard output PWM output 2 *5 Pulse output 2 *5 Standard output Counter output 3 Standard output Y102 PWM output 3 *5 Standard output *6 PWM output 3 *5 Pulse output 3 *5 Pulse output 3 *5 Standard output Counter Standard Counter Standard output 4 *4 output output 4 *4 output Y103 PWM output 4 *5 PWM output 4 *5 Std. output *6 PWM out 4 *5 Std. output *6 PWM out 4 *5 Pulse output 4 *5 Pulse out 4 *5 Pulse out 4 *5 Pulse output 4 *5 *3: Modes 0 to 3 can be set regardless of the type of CPU however, note that the 10-point type does not have X6 and X7. *4: It is only possible to select either Standard output, PWM output, or pulse output for the 10- point type CPU. (A counter corresponding output cannot be set because there is no counter input that can correspond to it.) *5: It is possible to set for the relay output type, but the expected output waveform cannot be obtained. Moreover, care must be taken because it may cause an relay error. *6: This assignment is supported by Ver.1.11 (WRF051=H0111) or newer. Y101 8-2 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.1.3 Input/Output Setting Configure each I/O setting in the special internal output (WRF071) and make it effective by setting R7F5 ON in CPU STOP status. This information is normally reset at every power on, but this can be saved in the FLASH memory by setting R7F5 ON after that. 15 a 0 Bit: WRF071: Initial value: 14 b 0 13 c 0 12 d 0 11 e 0 10 f 0 9 g 0 8 h 0 7 i 0 6 j 0 5 k 0 4 l 0 3 m 0 2 n 0 1 o 0 0 p 0 Figure 8.2 Special internal output for setting detailed function Mode 1 Mode 0 Name Bit Value Bit Value X0 - - - X1 a 0 b X2 - - - X3 c 0 d 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 X4 - - - X5 e 0 f X6 - - - X7 g 0 h Name Bit Value Bit 0 Y100 i j 1 0 Y101 k l 1 0 Y102 m n 1 0 Y103 o p 1 Function Standard input (Fixed) Standard input Interrupt input Standard input (Fixed) Standard input Interrupt input Standard input (Fixed) Standard input Interrupt input Standard input (Fixed) Standard input Interrupt input Value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Value Bit Value - - - X1 a 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 X3 Function Standard output PWM output Pulse output Standard output PWM output Pulse output Standard output PWM output Pulse output Standard output PWM output Pulse output - c 0 1 0 b d X4 - 1 - X5 e 0 f X6 - - - X7 g 0 h Name Bit Value Bit - Function Counter input (Fixed) Counter preload Counter strobe Standard input *1 Counter input (Fixed) Counter preload Counter strobe Standard input *1 Standard input (Fixed) Standard input Interrupt input Standard input (Fixed) Standard input Interrupt input Value Function 0 Counter output 1 Standard output *1 Y100 i j 0 1 1 0 Counter output 0 1 Standard output *1 Y101 k l 0 1 1 0 Standard output 0 1 PWM output Y102 m n 0 Pulse output 1 1 0 Standard output 0 1 PWM output Y103 o p 0 Pulse output 1 1 *1 : Supported by software version.1.11 or newer. 0 Mode 3 Name Bit Value Bit Value X0 - - - X1 a 0 1 0 - 0 1 0 - 0 1 0 - 0 1 0 X2 - X3 c X4 - X5 e X6 - g 0 1 - 0 1 - 0 1 - 0 b - d - f - h 1 Name Bit X0 X2 Mode 2 X7 Name Bit Value Bit Function Counter input (Fixed) Counter preload Counter strobe Standard input *1 Counter input (Fixed) Counter preload Counter strobe Standard input *1 Counter input (Fixed) Counter preload Counter strobe Standard input *1 Counter input (Fixed) Counter preload Counter strobe Standard input *1 Value 0 Counter output 1 Standard output *1 Y100 i j 0 1 1 0 Counter output 0 1 Standard output *1 Y101 k l 0 1 1 0 Counter output 0 1 Standard output *1 Y102 m n 0 1 1 0 Counter output 0 1 Standard output *1 Y103 o p 0 1 1 *1 : Supported by software version 1.11 or newer. *2 : Configuration for 10 point type. Name Bit Value Bit Value X0 X1 - a - 0 - b X2 X3 X4 X5 - c - e 1 - 0 - 0 - d - f X6 X7 - g - 0 - h - 0 1 0 - 0 - 0 1 - 0 1 0 1 Name Bit Value Bit Function 2 phase Counter 1A (Fixed) Counter preload Counter strobe Standard input *1 2 phase counter 1B (Fixed) Counter input 1Z (Fixed) Standard input (Fixed) Standard input Interrupt input Counter input (Fixed) Counter preload Counter strobe Standard input *1 Value 0 Counter output 1 Y100 i j 0 Standard output *1 1 1 0 Standard output 0 1 PWM output Y101 k l 0 Pulse output 1 1 0 Standard output 0 1 PWM output Y102 m n 0 Pulse output 1 1 0 Counter output 0 1 Y103 o p 0 Standard output *1 1 1 *1 : Supported by software version 1.11 or newer. Function 0 Function 0 Std. output *2 PWM output *2 Pulse output *2 8-3 *2 : Configuration of 10 point type. Standard output *2 PWM output *2 Pulse output *2 - Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.1.4 Input/Output Setting (Mode 10) Mode 10 had been added since Ver. 01.13. I/O assignment of mode 10 is very flexible as follows. Parameter setting is compatible with existing mode 0 to 3 except for WRF071. Operation of FUN command (FUN 140 150) is same for all the mode 0 to 10. Outline Input and output are configured in every group as below. X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Y100 Y101 Y102 Y103 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Fig. 8.4 Group of mode 10 Mode setting Set "H10" to the special internal output WRF070. In/output setting Set parameter according to the following table to the special internal output WRF071. Bit : 15 13 12 11 Group 1 WRF071 : Default : 14 0 0 0 10 9 8 7 Group 2 0 0 0 0 Fig. 8.5 6 5 4 3 Group 3 0 0 0 2 1 0 Group 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit table of WRF071 Select one of below combinations and set in WRF071 for every group. Fig. 8.2 Parameter for in/output setting Parameter H0 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 HA HB Others X0 / 2 / 4 / 6 Standard input X1 / 3 / 5 / 7 Standard input Interrupt input Counter input Standard input Preload input Strobe input Standard input Standard input Y100/101/102/103 Standard output PWM output Pulse output Standard output PWM output Pulse output Standard output Counter output Standard output Counter output Standard output Counter output Standard output Since 10 points type does not have input X6 and X7, possible value for group 4 is 0 to 2. Example Group 1 2 3 4 X0 : Standard input X2 : Counter 2 X4 : Counter 3 X6 : Standard input Function X1 : Standard input X3 :Preload input 2 X5 : Standard input X7 : Interrupt input 4 Î WRF071 = H2873 8-4 Y100 : Pulse output 1 Y101 : Standard output Y102 : Counter output 3 Y103 : Standard output Value Î H2 Î H8 Î H7 Î H3 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.1.5 Special Output Operation in CPU STOP Status Generally the counter output, PWM output and pulse output are not generated if the CPU is in the STOP state. To output these outputs when the CPU is in the STOP state, turn on the special internal output R7DC. By turning on the special internal output R7DC for controlling the special outputs in the STOP state, the operation of the special outputs at the time of test operation can be checked, and the outputs that are independent of the RUN and STOP states of the CPU can be output. Note that the R7DC is set to 0 when the power is turned on. Also, if the output control flag (R7FC to R7FF) is turned on while the CPU is in the STOP state and the R7DC is off, the output flag is turned off by the system. R7DC 5] R7FC toR7FF 1] RUN STOP ON Counter output OFF RUN/STOP 5] 5] PWM output 5] Pulse output 2] 3] 4] Figure 8.4 Operation of special outputs when the CPU is in the RUN/STOP states 1] 2] 3] 4] 5] When the R7DC is off, the output control flag is turned off by the system. When the R7DC is on, the corresponding special output turns on by turning on the output control flag. * The counter output of the counter turns on when the condition is satisfied. The special outputs turn on and off according to the user program. The special outputs are being output while the output condition is satisfied or the R7DC is on. The special outputs turn on and off according to the RUN/STOP states of the CPU. The output control flag is turned off by the system when the CPU operation stops. * The special outputs continue to be output as long as the CPU operation continues, even if an error has occurred when the operation is set to be continued when I/O assignments do not match or when a congestion error occurs. 8.1.6 Pulse / PWM Output adjustment The transistor output that generates the pulse output and PWM output contains a hardware delay time. This delay time affects the on-duty significantly as the frequency increases. In addition, this delay time is slightly different depending on the CPU model. By setting the value that corresponds to the CPU model in the special internal output WRF06B for setting the PWM/pulse output correction, both the PWM output and pulse output with no load in the system can be corrected. Caution: There will be a slight error even if correction setting is performed. These special internal outputs are stored in the FLASH memory by turning on the various setting write request (R7F6). Once the setting is stored in the FLASH memory, it is not necessary to make the setting again when the power is turned on next time. WRF06B: Setting value indicating the CPU model Figure 8.3 Special internal outputs for setting PWM/pulse output correction CPU model Setting value EH-***DTP H0001 EH-***DT H0002 EH-***DRP H0003 EH-***DRT H0004 Other than above Other than above Note: *** changes depending on the CPU. 8-5 Remark No correction Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.2 High-Speed Counter (Single-Phase) The high-speed counter settings are stored in the special internal outputs (WRF070 to 7E). It is only possible to perform the setting through the special internal output (WRF071) when the CPU is stopped and the output is turned off. Once all the input/output settings are completed, the settings of each counter can be changed using the special internal outputs for individual setting (WRF058 to 5B), regardless of whether the CPU is operating or stopped. In addition, the settings can be changed by a program using the FUN instruction (FUN140 to 142, and 146). Refer to the chapter about the FUN instruction for information about how to use the FUN instruction for setting. 8.2.1 Operation of Single-Phase Counter (1) Basic operation Figure 8.5 describes the basic operation of the high-speed counter. FFFFH 2] 3] 4] Off preset 1] 5] 7] On preset 6] 0000H U: Up counter D: Down counter U Coincidence output ON R7FC to R7FF ON U D U D D U D INT2n INT2m OFF OFF Coincidence interrupt ON n: Even number OFF m: Odd number INT2n INT2m INT2n 1] INT2n INT2m INT2n INT2n INT2m INT2n 4] Off preset On preset Each coincidence interrupt and INT number Coincidence interrupt occurrence Coincidence output On 2] Coincidence interrupt Counter 1 occurrence Coincidence output On Counter 2 5] Counter 3 On preset Off preset Coincidence interrupt occurrence Coincidence output Off Coincidence interrupt occurrence Coincidence output Off Counter 4 At on-preset At off-preset At on-preset At off-preset At on-preset At off-preset At on-preset At off-preset INT20 INT21 INT22 INT23 INT24 INT25 INT26 INT27 Figure 8.5 Basic operation of high-speed counter (single-phase) Up counter 1] The counter output turns on* when the current counter value becomes larger than the on-preset value. The interrupt process (INT2n) starts up if an interrupt program is used in the running user program. 2] The counter output turns off when the current counter value becomes larger than the off-preset value. The interrupt process (INT2m) starts up if an interrupt program is used in the running user program. 3] The counter values wrap around in a ring. That is, the current counter value goes back to 0h when one more pulse is counted after the maximum value (FFFFH) is reached. Down counter 4] The counter output turns on* when the current counter value becomes smaller than the off-preset value. The interrupt process (INT2m) starts up if an interrupt program is used in the running user program. 5] The counter output turns off when the current counter value becomes smaller than the on-preset value. The interrupt process (INT2n) starts up if an interrupt program is used in the running user program. 6] The counter values wrap around in a ring. That is, the current counter value becomes FFFFH when one more pulse is counted after the minimum value (0H) is reached. Note also that the initial value of the counter is 0H, and the value reaches FFFFH after the first pulse is counted after the start of operation. 8-6 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O Others 7] The user program can switch from using a counter as an up counter to a down counter, as well as from a down counter to an up counter while the counter is operating (using FUN142). * The counter output does not turn on unless the control output flag (R7FC to R7FF) is turned on. (2) Preload input operation When a preload signal is entered, the current counter value is reset to the preload value. The counter output is controlled only when the on-preset value or off-preset value is exceeded by the progress of the counter value. Because of this, the counter output maintains its status before the preload input when the on-preset or offpreset value is exceeded due to the preload value (when jumping from the Off area to the On area, or vice versa). Also, the status of the counter output is reflected in the data memory at the timing of the refresh process. Therefore, it should be noted that the status monitored by peripheral units, etc. and the actual output status may be different (by a delay of one scan). Preload input Preload input Preload input Preload input FFFFH Off preset Preload value On preset 0000H Coincidence ON output OFF Figure 8.6 Preload input operation of high-speed counter (single-phase) (3) Strobe input operation When a strobe signal is entered, the current counter progress value is stored in the strobe storage area (WRF07A to 7D) of the special internal output. (4) Current value clear instruction operation When the current value clear instruction (FUN144) is executed, the current counter value is reset (cleared) to zero. The counter output is controlled only when the on-preset value or off-preset value is exceeded by the progress of the counter value. Because of this, the counter output maintains its status before the execution of the current value clear instruction when either the on-preset or off-preset value is exceeded due to the execution of the current value clear instruction (when jumping from the Off area to the On area, or vice versa). Current value clear Current value clear FFFFH Off preset On preset 0000H Coincidence ON output OFF Figure 8.7 Current value clear instruction operation of high-speed counter (single-phase) 8-7 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.2.2 Setting of Single-Phase Counter If either one of operation modes 1, 2, or 3 is selected, the single-phase counter should be set using the special internal output (WRF072 to WRF07E). In order to make the contents of the various settings valid, it is necessary to turn on the special internal output R7F5. The settings can be changed using the FUN instruction during the CPU operation (some settings cannot be changed, however.) (1) Setting the counter input Bit: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 WRF07E: a b c d e f g h Initial value: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 Not used 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 8.8 Special internal output for setting counter input Setting Count edge value Counter 1 a 0 Rising edge 1 Falling edge Counter 2 b 0 Rising edge 1 Falling edge Counter 3 c 0 Rising edge 1 Falling edge Counter 4 d 0 Rising edge 1 Falling edge *1 Can also be made valid by executing FUN142. In case of mode 1, the settings for counter 3 and 4 are ignored. In case of mode 3, the settings for counter 1 to 3 are ignored. Bit Bit e f g h Setting value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Count operation Up count operation *1 Down count operation *1 Up count operation *1 Down count operation *1 Up count operation *1 Down count operation *1 Up count operation *1 Down count operation *1 (2) Setting the on-preset value Set the count value at which the counter output is turned on (the on-preset value) for every counter used. Any value in the range from 0 to FFFFH (0 to 65, 535) can be set. If the on-preset value is set to the same value as the off-preset value, the counter will not perform any counting operation (see (5)). WRF072: On-preset value for counter 1 WRF073: On-preset value for counter 2 WRF074: On-preset value for counter 3 WRF075: On-preset value for counter 4 Figure 8.9 Special internal outputs for setting the on-preset values In case of mode 1, WRF074 and WRF075 are used to set the frequency for the PWM/pulse outputs. In case of mode 3, WRF073 and WRF074 are used to set the frequency for the PWM/pulse outputs. (3) Setting the off-preset value Set the count value at which the counter output is turned off (the off-preset value) for every counter used. Any value in the range from 0 to FFFFH (0 to 65, 535) can be set. If the off-preset value is set to the same value as the on-preset value, or larger than the on-preset value, the counter will not perform any counting (see (5).). WRF076: Off-preset value for counter 1 WRF077: Off-preset value for counter 2 WRF078: Off-preset value for counter 3 WRF079: Off-preset value for counter 4 Figure 8.10 Special internal outputs for setting off-preset values In case of mode 1, WRF078 and WRF079 are used to set the on-duty for the PWM/pulse outputs. In case of mode 4, WRF077 and WRF078 are used to set the on-duty for the PWM/pulse outputs. 8-8 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O (4) Setting the counter preload When preloading is used, the value to be preloaded should be set for each counter used. Any value in the range from 0 to FFFFH (0 to 65,535) can be set. WRF07A: Preload value for counter 1 WRF07B: Preload value for counter 2 WRF07C: Preload value for counter 3 WRF07D: Preload value for counter 4 Figure 8.11 Special internal outputs for setting the preload values This special internal output becomes valid immediately after the setting. In case of mode 1, WRF07C and WRF07D are used to set the number of pulse outputs. In case of mode 4, WRF07B and WRF07B are used to set the number of pulse outputs. (5) At abnormal setting If the on-preset and off-preset settings contain the same values for one or more counters when the PI/O function setting flag (R7F5) is turned on, the corresponding bit in the error display special internal output turns on and the counters with error settings do not perform any counting. (It does not count even if a counter input is entered.) In addition, the setting abnormal flag (R7F7) turns on. Bit: 15 WRF057: a 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Not used 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 b c d e f g h i Figure 8.12 Special internal output for setting error display Bit a b c d e f g h i Description of abnormality Total pulse frequency abnormality Pulse 4 frequency abnormality Pulse 3 frequency abnormality Pulse 2 frequency abnormality Pulse 1 frequency abnormality Counter 4 preset value abnormality Counter 3 preset value abnormality Counter 2 preset value abnormality Counter 1 preset value abnormality Related terminal Y100 to Y103 Y103 Y102 Y101 Y100 X6 X4 X2 X0 (6) Individual counter setting The on-preset and off-preset values can be changed for each counter by the special internal outputs for individual setting regardless of whether the CPU is operating or stopped. Turn on the corresponding bit in the following special internal outputs when only the on-preset or the off-preset value should be changed for a certain counter input. (To change both settings at the same time, set the “H3” in the corresponding special internal outputs for individual setting.) Moreover, when the specified on-preset and off-preset values are the same, the corresponding bit of the error display special internal output is turned on and operation is performed using the preset value before the setting. (The set value for the special internal output also returns to the preset value before the setting was made) WRF058: Counter 1 15 Not used 2 1 a 0 b WRF059: Counter 2 Not used a b WRF05A: Counter 3 Not used a b WRF05B: Counter 4 Not used a b Figure 8.13 Special internal outputs for individual counter setting Bit a b Description Off-preset change request On-preset change request In case of mode 1, WRF05A and WRF05B are used to set individual PWM/pulse outputs. In case of mode 4, WRF059 and WRF05A are used to set individual PWM/pulse outputs. 8-9 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.3 High-Speed Counter (Two-Phase Counter) When operation mode 3 is selected, two-phase counters can be used. Four kinds of phase counting modes are available for two-phase counters. The settings of the two-phase counters are stored in the special internal outputs (WRF06F to 72, 76, 7A, and 7E). It is only possible to perform the settings through the special internal output (WRF071) when the CPU is stopped and the output is turned off. Once all the input/output settings are completed, the setting of each counter can be changed using the special internal outputs for individual setting (WRF058), regardless of whether the CPU is operating or stopped. In addition, the setting can be changed by a program using the FUN instruction (FUN140 to 142, and 146). Refer to the chapter about the FUN instruction for information about how to use the FUN instruction for setting. 8.3.1 Operation of Two-Phase Counters The phase counting mode settings are stored in the special internal output (WRF06F). The operation of the counter values is the same as for a single-phase counter and likewise wrap around from 0000H to FFFFH. In case of an up counter, the count value becomes 0000H if one more pulse is input while the current count value is FFFFH. In case of a down counter, the count value becomes FFFFH if one more pulse is input while the current count value is 0000H. Moreover, the preload input operation, strobe input operation, and executing operation of the current value clear instruction are run in the same manner as for a single-phase counter. The status of the counter output is stored in the data memory at the timing of the refresh process. Therefore, it should be noted that the status monitored by peripheral units, etc. and the actual output status may be different (by a delay of one scan). (1) Phase counting mode 0 The counter counts up when input 1A is ahead of input 1B, and down when input 1A is lagging behind input 1B. Input 1A Input 1B Count value Off preset value On preset value Coincidence output Figure 8.14 Counting operation of phase counting mode 0 Input 1A 1 (High) 0 (Low) ↓ (Falling edge) ↑ (Rising edge) 0 (Low) 1 (High) ↓ (Falling edge) ↑ (Rising edge) Input 1B ↑ (Rising edge) ↓ (Falling edge) 1 (High) 0 (Low) ↑ (Rising edge) ↓ (Falling edge) 0 (Low) 1 (High) 8-10 Operation Up count Down count Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O (2) Phase counting mode 1 In this mode the counter counts at the rising edge of input 1A. At this point, if input 1B is 0 (Low) it counts up, and if input 1B is 1 (High) it counts down. Input 1A Input 1B Count value Off preset On preset Coincidence output Figure 8.15 Counting operation of phase counting mode 1 Input 1A 1 (High) 0 (Low) ↓ (Falling edge) ↑ (Rising edge) 0 (Low) 1 (High) ↓ (Falling edge) ↑ (Rising edge) Input 1B ↑ (Rising edge) ↓ (Falling edge) 1 (High) 0 (Low) ↑ (Rising edge) ↓ (Falling edge) 0 (Low) 1 (High) Operation Do not count Up count Do not count Down count (3) Phase counting mode 2 In this mode, if input 1B is 0 (Low) at the rising edge of input 1A the counter counts up, and if input 1A is 0 (Low) at the rising edge of input 1B, the counter counts down. Input 1A Input 1B Count value Off preset On preset Coincidence output Figure 8.16 Counting operation of phase counting mode 2 Input 1A 1 (High) 0 (Low) ↓ (Falling edge) ↑ (Rising edge) 0 (Low) 1 (High) ↓ (Falling edge) ↑ (Rising edge) Input 1B ↑ (Rising edge) ↓ (Falling edge) 1 (High) 0 (Low) ↑ (Rising edge) ↓ (Falling edge) 0 (Low) 1 (High) 8-11 Operation Do not count Up count Down count Do not count Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O (4) Phase counting mode 3 In this mode the counter counts at the rising and falling edge of input 1B. It counts up when input 1A is more ahead of input 1B, and down when input 1A is lagging behind input 1B. Input 1A Input 1B Count value Off preset On preset Coincidence output Figure 8.17 Counting operation of phase counting mode 3 Input 1A 1 (High) 0 (Low) ↓ (Falling edge) ↑ (Rising edge) 0 (Low) 1 (High) ↓ (Falling edge) ↑ (Rising edge) Input 1B ↑ (Rising edge) ↓ (Falling edge) 1 (High) 0 (Low) ↑ (Rising edge) ↓ (Falling edge) 0 (Low) 1 (High) Operation Up count Do not count Down count Do not count (5) Clear input operation (common to all the phase counting modes) The count value is cleared at the rising edge of input 1Z. As an example, the clear operation of phase counting mode 4 is shown in Figure 8.18. (The clear operation works identically for all four phase counting modes.) Input 1A Input 1B Input 1Z Count value Off preset On preset Coincidence output Figure 8.18 Count value clear operation (phase counting mode 4) 8-12 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.3.2 Setting of Two-Phase Counter The setting of the two-phase counters are stored in the special internal outputs (WRF072 to WRF07E). (1) Phase counting mode Set the phase counting mode (0-3) in WRF06E. Please see the chapter 8.3.1 about phase counting mode. WRF06F: Phase counting mode Figure 8.19 Special internal output for phase counting mode (2) Setting the on-preset value Set the count value (the on-preset value) at which the counter output is turned on (or off). Any value in the range from 0 to FFFFH (0 to 65, 535) can be set. If the on-preset value is set to the same value as the off-preset value, or smaller than the off-preset value, the counter will not perform any counting (see (4).). WRF072: On-preset value for two-phase counter Figure 8.20 Special internal output for setting the on-preset value (3) Setting the off-preset value Set the count value (the off-preset value) at which the counter output is turned off (or on). Any value in the range from 0 to FFFFH (0 to 65, 535) can be set. If the off-preset value is set to the same value as the on-preset value, or larger than the on-preset value, the counter will not perform any counting (see (4).). WRF076: Off-preset value for two-phase counter Figure 8.21 Special internal output for setting the off-preset value (4) Setting the counter preload When preloading is used, the value to be preloaded should be set for each counter used. Any value in the range from 0 to FFFFH (0 to 65, 535) can be set. WRF07A: Preload value for two-phase counter Figure 8.22 Special internal output for setting the preload value This special internal output becomes valid immediately after the setting. (5) Diagnostic error If the on-preset and off-preset settings contain the same values for one or more counters when the PI/O function setting flag (R7F5) is turned on, the corresponding bit in the abnormality display special internal output turns on and the counters with abnormal settings do not perform any counting. (It does not count even if a counter input is entered.) In addition, the setting abnormal flag (R7F7) turns on. Bit: 15 WRF057: a 14 13 12 11 10 9 Not used 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 b c d e f g h I Figure 8.23 Special internal output for input/output function abnormality Bit a b c d e f g h i Description of abnormality Total pulse frequency abnormality Pulse 4 frequency abnormality Pulse 3 frequency abnormality Pulse 2 frequency abnormality Pulse 1 frequency abnormality Counter 4 preset value abnormality Counter 3 preset value abnormality Counter 2 preset value abnormality Two-phase counter 1 preset value abnormality 8-13 Related terminal Y100 to Y103 Y103 Y102 Y101 Y100 X6 X0 to X3 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O (5) Individual counter setting The on-preset and off-preset values can be changed for each two-phase counter by the special internal output for individual setting (WRF058) regardless of whether the CPU is operating or stopped. Turn on the corresponding bit in the following special internal outputs when only the on-preset or the off-preset value should be changed for a two-phase counter. (To change both settings at the same time, set the “H3” in the corresponding special internal outputs for individual setting.) Moreover, when the specified on-preset and off-preset values are the same, the corresponding bit of the error display special internal output is turned on and operation is performed using the preset value before the setting. (The set value for the special internal output also returns to the preset value before the setting was made) 15 WRF058: Two-phase counter 2 Not used 1 0 a b Figure 8.24 Special internal output for individual setting of counter setting values Bit a b Description Off-preset change request On-preset change request 8-14 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.4 PWM Output A PWM output can be set as an output by setting the operation mode and output terminal. By setting an output to a PWM output, a pulse with a duty ratio in the range that corresponds to the specified frequency can be output. 8.4.1 Operation of PWM Output The PWM output settings are stored in the special internal outputs. It is only possible to perform the settings through the special internal output when the CPU is stopped and the output is turned off. Once all the input/output settings are completed, the setting of each PWM output can be changed using the special internal outputs for individual setting, regardless of whether the CPU is operating or stopped. In addition, the settings can be changed by a program using the FUN instruction (FUN148). See the chapter about the FUN instruction for information about how to use the FUN instruction for setting. (1) Basic operation The special internal outputs R7FC to R7FF are used to control the output. When these special internal outputs are turned on, a pulse is output at the frequency and the on-duty set in the special internal outputs (WRF072 to 79). When the special internal output for output control is turned off, the PWM output is also turned off. The special internal outputs R7FC to R7FF correspond to PWM outputs 1 to 4 (Y100 to Y103); for example, if R7FD is turned on, a pulse train is output from PWM output 2 (Y101). The on/off status of the PWM outputs is not stored in the data memory. Therefore, the status of the terminals used for PWM output monitored by peripheral units, etc. may be different from the actual status of the PWM output terminals. When a fatal or serious error occurs in the CPU, there will be no output. The output is also stopped if a fatal or serious error occurs in the CPU during output. R7FC to R7FF Frequency On duty t Output pulse Figure 8.25 Basic operation of PWM output (2) Operation when setting values are changed The settings of each PWM output (frequency and on-duty) can be changed by the FUN instruction or the special internal outputs (WRF072 to 79) regardless of whether the CPU is operating or stopped. Change in both frequency and On duty R7FC to R7FF Change in On duty Change in frequency Frequency On duty t Output pulse Figure 8.26 Operation of PWM output when setting values are changed. (3) Operation at abnormal settings The PWM output is not output if the on-duty is set to a value other than the range in use. However, the FUN instruction does not execute setting change when the setting value is abnormal. R7FC to R7FF On-duty setting value: exceeding the range On-duty setting value: within the range Frequency On duty t Output pulse Normal settings Abnormal settings Normal settings Figure 8.27 Operation of PWM output at abnormal settings 8-15 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.4.2 Setting the PWM Output The settings of the PWM output operation are stored in the special internal outputs (WRF072 to WRF079). (1) Setting the PWM output frequency Set the frequency of output pulse for each PWM output to be used in special internal outputs. The setting values must be 10 to 2000 (HA to H7D0). If the frequency value is set to less than 10 Hz, it is changed to 10 Hz by the system. It should be noted that the maximum frequency of the PWM output is 2 kHz. Even if a value larger than the maximum frequency is set, an error flag, etc. will not be output, so be careful not to set a frequency that exceeds 2 kHz. (Example) If the output frequency is 1 kHz, set “1000” (H3E8) in the special internal outputs. WRF072: Output frequency for PWM output 1 WRF073: Output frequency for PWM output 2 WRF074: Output frequency for PWM output 3 Output frequency for PWM output 4 WRF075: Figure 8.28 Special internal outputs for setting the PWM output frequency In case of mode 1, WRF072 and WRF073 are used to set the on-preset value of a counter. In case of mode 4, WRF072 and WRF075 are used to set the on-preset value of a counter. (2) Setting the PWM output on-duty value Set the on-duty value in the corresponding special internal output for each PWM output to be used. The setting values are 0 to 100 (H0 to H64) when the auto correction of on-duty values is not performed. If an on-duty value exceeding this range is specified, PWM outputs will not be generated. When performing auto correction, the range of on-duty values that can be set differs depending on the frequency and CPU mode to be set. For more details on the auto correction, see Section 8.1.5. When a function other than PWM is assigned, this setting is not necessary. (Example) If the on-duty value is 70 %, set “70” (H46) in the special internal outputs. WRF076: On-duty value for PWM output 1 WRF077: On-duty value for PWM output 2 WRF078: On-duty value for PWM output 3 On-duty value for PWM output 4 WRF079: Figure 8.29 Special internal outputs for setting PWM output on-duty In case of mode 1, WRF076 and WRF077 are used to set the off-preset value of a counter. In case of mode 4, WRF076 and WRF079 are used to set the off-preset value of a counter. 8-16 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O (3) Effective range of PWM output on-duty values When correcting on-duty values by setting the value that corresponds to the CPU model in the special internal output (WRF06B) for setting PWM/pulse output correction, the effective range of the on-duty values differs depending on the frequency and CPU model to be used. The effective range of the on-duty values is calculated from the following expressions. For the hardware delay time in the expressions, see Table 6.2. Caution: There will be a slight error even if correction setting is performed. On-duty lower limit value (%) = Hardware delay time (µs) x Frequency used (Hz) x 10-4 On-duty upper limit value (%) = 100 - Hardware delay time (µs) x Frequency used (Hz) x 10-4 Table 8.2 Transistor output delay time for each CPU model CPU model EH-***DTP EH-***DT EH-***DRP EH-***DRT Hardware delay time (TYP) 50 µs 70 µs 75 µs 25 µs Remark Example: If the CPU model is EH-***DRP and the PWM output is 2 kHz, On-duty lower limit value = 50 x 2000 x 10-4 = 10 % On-duty upper limit value = 100 - (50 x 2000 x 10-4) = 90 % Thus, the effective range of on-duty values will be 10 % to 90 %. If correction is not performed (0 is set in WRF06B), on-duty values can be set in the range of 0 to 100 %. However, caution must be exercised since there will be an error for the period of transistor output delay time between the specified on-duty and the on-duty that is actually output. (4) Setting abnormality When the PI/O function setting flag (R7F5) is turned on, and a value exceeding the effective range of on-duty values is set for the on-duty setting value of each PWM output (WFR076 to WRF079), PWM outputs will not be generated. (Example of incorrect setting) PWM output 2 kHz On-duty setting value (WRF076) - 95 (5) Individual PWM output setting The frequency and on-duty can be set for each PWM output by the special internal outputs regardless of whether the CPU is operating or stopped. By setting “H1” in the special internal outputs listed below, it is changed to the frequencies set in the special internal outputs (WRF072 to WFR075) and the on-duty values set in the special internal outputs (WRF076 to WFR079). When changing the setting, if any of the on-duty setting values (WRF076 to WRF079) for PWM outputs is set to a value exceeding the effective range, PWM outputs will not be generated. 15 2 1 WRF058: PWM output 1 Not used 0 a WRF059: PWM output 2 Not used a WRF05A: PWM output 3 Not used a WRF05B: PWM output 4 Not used a Figure 8.30 Special internal outputs for setting individual PWM outputs Bit a Description PWM output: individual setting value change request 8-17 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.5 Pulse Train Output A pulse output can be assigned to an output by setting an output terminal. By setting an output to pulse output, a specified number of consecutive pulses with a duty ratio of 30 to 70 % can be output. ((To output a pulse having a duty ratio of 50 %, set the value corresponding to the CPU model in the special internal output WRF06B, by referring to Section 8.1.4.) A minimum of 10 Hz to a maximum of 5 kHz can be specified as frequency values. (The maximum frequency of 5 kHz represents the total of all pulse output frequencies.) 8.5.1 Operation of Pulse Output The settings of the pulse outputs are stored in the special internal outputs. It is only possible to perform the settings through the special internal output when the CPU is stopped and the output is turned off. Once all the input/output settings are completed, the setting of each chain output can be changed using the special internal outputs for individual setting, regardless of whether the CPU is operating or stopped. In addition, by using the FUN instruction, settings can be changed by a program (FUN150), or pulse outputs with the acceleration/deceleration function can be generated (FUN151). Refer to the chapter about the FUN instruction for information about how to use the FUN instruction for setting. (1) Basic operation The special internal outputs R7FC to R7FF are used to control the output. When these special internal outputs are turned on, a pulse train is output at the frequency set in the special internal outputs (WRF072 to 7D) for the set number of pulses. After the set number of pulses is output, the special internal outputs R7FC to R7FF for output control are turned off by the system. The special internal outputs R7FC to R7FF correspond to pulse outputs 1 to 4 (Y100 to Y103); for example, if R7FD is turned on, a pulse is output from pulse output 2 (Y101). If peripheral units, etc. forcefully turn these special internal outputs off, the pulse output is turned off even if the set number of pulses has not yet been output. The on/off status of the PWM output is not stored in the data memory. Therefore, the status of the terminals used for pulse output monitored by peripheral units, etc. may be different from the actual status of the pulse output terminals. When a fatal or serious error occurs in the CPU, there will be no output. The output is also stopped if a fatal or serious error occurs to the CPU during output. In addition, pulses are not output while the backup memory is being written (R7EF=1). Therefore, care should be taken when handling the pulse output immediately after a program transfer or after a program change while running. Number of output pulses 2 R7FC to R7FF Frequency Pulse output Turned off by the system Pulse output Forcefully turned off Pulse output Turned off by the system Frequency/2 t Output pulse Figure 8.31 Basic operation of pulse output (2) Operation when setting values are changed The settings of the pulse outputs (frequency and number of output pulses) can be changed by the FUN instruction or the special internal outputs (WRF072 to 7D) regardless of whether the CPU is operating or stopped. If the settings are made during the execution of a program in such way that the total frequency of all the pulse outputs exceeds 5 kHz, the frequency settings will not be changed. Also, the corresponding bit in the abnormality display special internal output is turned on, and the output will continue to operate at the previously set frequency. (The setting value of the special internal output also returns to the value set before the abnormal setting was made.) R7FC to R7FF Frequency change Frequency Frequency change Frequency change (set to exceed 5 kHz) Frequency change Frequency/2 t Output pulse In case the frequency becomes 5 kHz or more, the previous setting value is used for operation. Figure 8.32 Operation when the pulse output frequency is changed 8-18 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O To change the number of output pulses, the following operation will be performed: 1] When the number of pulses is to be changed to a value larger than the number of pulses currently being output, pulses will be output until the number of newly changed pulses is reached, and then the pulse output stops. 2] When the number of pulses is to be changed to a value smaller than the number of pulses currently being output, the pulse output stops when the current number of pulses is reached. R7FC to R7FF Frequency 1] Change of the number of pulses 2 → 4 2] Change of the number of pulses 6 → 3 Frequency/2 t Output pulse Figure 8.33 Operation for changing the number of pulse output 8.5.2 Setting of Pulse Output The settings of the pulse outputs are stored in the special internal outputs (WRF072 to WRF07D). (1) Setting the pulse output frequency Set the frequency of the output pulse for each pulse output to be used in all of the special internal outputs shown below. The setting values are 10 to 5000 (HA to H1388). If a value less than 10 Hz is set, it is internally changed to 10 Hz by the system. When setting the frequencies, make sure that the total value of all pulse output frequencies stays within 5 kHz. (Example 1) (Example 2) WRF072: Assuming there is one point of pulse output and the output frequency is 5 kHz: Setting value = 5000 (H1388) Assuming there are three points of pulse output and the output frequencies are 1 kHz, 1 kHz, and 3 kHz, respectively (the settings should be made so that the sum of the output frequencies set for each of the pulse outputs becomes 5 kHz or less.): Setting value = 1000 (H3E8) Setting value = 1000 (H3E8) Setting value = 3000 (HBB8) Output frequency for pulse output 1 WRF073: Output frequency for pulse output 2 WRF074: Output frequency for pulse output 3 WRF075: Output frequency for pulse output 4 Figure 8.34 Special internal outputs for setting output frequencies In case of mode 1, WRF072 and WRF073 are used for setting the on-preset value of a counter. In case of mode 4, WRF072 and WRF075 are used for setting the on-preset value of a counter. (3) Setting the number of output pulses Set the number of output pulses for each pulse output used. The setting values are 0 to 65535 (H0 to HFFFF). If the number of output pulses is set to “0,” no pulses will be output. WRF07A: Number of output pulses for pulse output 1 WRF07B: Number of output pulses for pulse output 2 WRF07C: Number of output pulses for pulse output 3 WRF07D: Number of output pulses for pulse output 4 Figure 8.35 Special internal outputs for setting number of output pulses In case of mode 1, WRF07A and WRF07B are used for setting the preload strobe value. In case of mode 4, WRF07A and WRF07D are used for setting the preload strobe value. 8-19 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O (4) At setting abnormality If the sum of the frequencies of the pulse outputs is set to exceed 5 k when the PI/O function setting flag (R7F5) is turned on, the bit for the total pulse frequency abnormality in the error display special internal output turns on, and none of the pulse outputs are output. In addition, individual setting of pulse outputs cannot be performed when the bit for the total pulse frequency abnormality is turned on. Bit: 15 WRF057: a 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Not used 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 b c d e f g h i Figure 8.36 Special internal output for input/output function abnormality Bit a b c d e f g h i Description of abnormality Total pulse frequency abnormality Pulse 4 frequency abnormality Related terminal Y100 to Y103 Y103 Pulse 3 frequency abnormality Pulse 2 frequency abnormality Pulse 1 frequency abnormality Counter 4 preset value abnormality Counter 3 preset value abnormality Counter 2 preset value abnormality Counter 1 preset value abnormality Y102 Y101 Y100 X6 X4 X2 X0 (5) Individual setting of pulse outputs It is possible to set the frequency and number of output pulses for each pulse output by the special internal outputs for individual setting, regardless of whether the CPU is operating or stopped. Turn on the corresponding bit in the following special internal outputs when only the pulse frequency or number of output pulses should be changed. If the total of frequencies exceeds 5 kHz as a result of performing individual setting of pulse outputs for pulse outputs that are working normally, the bit for the error display special internal output that corresponds to the changed pulse output will turn on, and that pulse output will work at the frequency before the setting change. (The value set in the special internal output also returns to the previous value before the setting was made.) 15 2 WRF058: Pulse output 1 Not used 1 a WRF059: Pulse output 2 Not used a b WRF05A: Pulse output 3 Not used a b WRF05B: Pulse output 4 Not used a b Figure 8.37 Special internal outputs for setting individual pulse outputs Bit a b Description Number of output pulse change request Output pulse frequency change request 8-20 0 b Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.6 Interrupt Input When either operation mode 0, 1, or 3 is selected, it is possible to assign an interrupt input to X1, X3, X5, and X7 by the special internal output (WRF07F). (The 10-point type CPU does not have X7.) It is only possible to set them by the special internal output under the conditions where the CPU is stopped and the output is off. When an interrupt input is entered, an interrupt process determined by a user program starts up. The INT numbers corresponding to the interrupt inputs are listed in Table 8.2. See the chapter about the instruction specifications for the interrupt input processing. Table 8.3 Interrupt input – correspondence table Interrupt input Terminal INT No. Interrupt input 1 X1 INT16 Interrupt input 2 X3 INT17 Interrupt input 3 X5 INT18 Interrupt input 4 X7 INT19 8.7 Digital Filter The input can set digital filter functions (when assigned normal input functions in X0 to X7 with operation mode 0, 1, or 3, be set to the input too). The sampling number of the digital filter is stored in the special internal output (WRF07F). The sampling number is set in 0.5ms unit (0 to 40, i.e., 0 to 20ms). When the value 0 is set, there is no filter, and when 41 or more is set, it is treated as a sampling number of 40 (20ms). This special internal output is stored in the FLASH memory by turning on the various setting write requests (R7F6). Once the setting is stored in the FLASH memory, it is not necessary to make the setting again when the power is turned on next time. The input status is maintained in the buffer for the maximum sampling number. When the input status is read, the status for the past set number of sampling numbers is looked up, and if there was no change, that status is read. If there were changes, the status before the change is read. WRF07F: Input sampling number Figure 8.38 Special internal output for setting normal input sampling number The above-mentioned setting is stored immediately upon the completion of the setting. Moreover, it is invalid for inputs assigned to counter input. 8-21 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.8 Potentiometers CPUs other than of the 10-point type are equipped with two potentiometers. Through the use of these potentiometers, it becomes possible to change values in the special internal outputs from the outside using a tool that looks like a screwdriver. The resolution is 10 bits, so it is possible to adjust the values from 0 to 3FFH (1 to 1,023). The potentiometers are found under the cover on the left side of the main unit. The value becomes larger when the dial is turned clockwise and smaller when turned counterclockwise. In addition, this value is always stored in the special internal output, regardless of whether the CPU is operating or stopped. VR1 L VR2 H L H Figure 8.39 Potentiometers (1) Values of the potentiometers The values entered by means of the potentiometers are stored in the following special internal outputs. WRF03E: Potentiometer 1 input value WRF03F: Potentiometer 2 input value Figure 8.40 Potentiometer input value storage special internal output (2) Setting a filter for the potentiometer The input values of the potentiometers fluctuate depending on the operating environment of the main unit etc. If the ratio of fluctuation is to be reduced, a sampling number can be set in the following special internal output. Once the sampling number is set, the average of the data obtained in the time period determined by the sampling number calculated by internal processing is set in WRF03E and WRF03F. The sampling number can be set between 0 and 40 (0 to 28H). If 0 is set, the data without average is stored in WRF03E and WRF03F. If a value greater than 41 is set, the sampling number is treated as 40. WRF06C: WRF06D: Potentiometer 1 data sampling number Potentiometer 2 data sampling number Figure 8.41 Special internal output for setting input data sampling number This special internal output is stored in the FLASH memory by turning on various setting write requests (R7F6). Once it is stored in the memory, it is not necessary to set the value again when the power is turned on for the next time. (3) Example The following shows a simple ladder program using the potentiometers: WR0 = WRF03E LSR(WR0,4) WR0 == 0 WR0 == 1F WR0 == 3F Y100 1] Always substitute the value of potentiometer 1 to WR0. 2] Delete the lower four bits of WR0 (because lower four bits are more prone to error due to changes in resistance caused by temperature, etc.) 3] If WR0 is “0,” Y100 is turned on. Y101 4] If WR0 is 1F, Y101 is turned on. Y102 5] If WR0 is 3F, Y102 is turned on. By turning potentiometer 1, one of flags Y100 to Y102 turns on. 8-22 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.9 Analogue Input The 23-point type CPU is equipped with two points of analogue input. The input to these two points can be set to voltage input or current input individually. The setting of current or voltage input is made in the special internal output WRF06E. This special internal output is stored in the FLASH memory by turning on various setting write requests (R7F6). Once it is stored in the memory, it is not necessary to set the value again when the power is turned on for the next time. Bit: 15 14 WRF06E: a b Initial value: 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Not used 0 0 Figure 8.42 Special internal output for selecting the analogue type WRF06E Setting value C000H 8000H 4000H 0000H Function Analogue CH0 (Bit a) Current input Current input Voltage input Voltage input Analogue CH1 (Bit b) Current input Voltage input Current input Voltage input Please note that the external wiring is different for voltage input and current input. See the section regarding analogue system wiring for the details. Through the above-mentioned settings, the input data of channel 0 is stored in WX 30 and the input data of channel 1 is stored in WX31. The correspondence between analogue data and digital data is shown in the figure 8.40 (divide 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA in 0 to 4000). The voltage data is converted to 0.0025 [V] per 1H and the current data is converted to 0.005 [mA] per 1H. Therefore, the value ranges that can be measured from the output channel are 0 to 10.2375 [V] for voltage data and 0 to 20.475 [mA] for current data, respectively. FA0H (4000) FA0H (4000) 7D0H (2000) 7D0H (2000) V 0 5 mA 10 0 10 20 Figure 8.43 Correspondence diagrams of digital and analogue input (Example) If analogue input channel 0 is set to voltage input and the analogue input channel 1 is set to current input, and 3V and 14mA are applied respectively, 4B0H (1200) is stored in WX30 and AF0H (2800) is stored in WX31. 8.10 Analogue Output The 23-point type CPU is equipped with one point of analogue output. In analogue output, digital values set at WY40 are converted to analogue output, and then output. Switching between voltage output/current output is performed by external wiring; analogue voltage outputs are output when connected to a voltage output terminal, and analogue current output when connected to a current output terminal. The correspondence between analogue data and digital data is shown in the figure 8.41 (divide 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA in 0 to 4000). The voltage data is converted to 0.0025 [V] per 1H and the current data is converted to 0.005 [mA] per 1H. Therefore, the values that can be output from the output channel are 0 to 10.2375 [V] for voltage data and 0 to 20.475 [mA] for current data, respectively. V mA 10 5 0 20 10 7D0H FA0H (2000) (4000) 0 7D0H (2000) FA0H (4000) Figure 8.44 Correspondence diagrams of digital and analogue output (Example) If 5F0H (1520) is set in WY40, 3.8 V is output from the analogue voltage output terminal. When reconnected to the analogue current output terminal, 7.6 mA is output. Please note that if connected to both terminals by mistake, the correct output value will not be output. 8-23 Chapter 8 High-speed counter, PWM / Pulse train output and Analogue I/O 8.11 Analogue Expansion unit Analogue expansion module has 4 ch. of analog input and 2 ch. of analog output, which is configured by dip switches. Range setting Analogue input range setting (Common for all input channels.) Sw1 Sw2 Range Remarks Dip switch (Default setting) off off 0 - 10V off ON 0 - ±10V Default setting SW1 → 1 ON off 0 - 20mA ON ON 4 - 20mA SW2 → 2 SW3 → 3 Analogue output range setting (Common for all output channels.) Sw3 Sw4 Range off off off ON ON off 0 - 20mA ON ON 4 - 20mA 0 - 10V O N SW4 → 4 Remarks SW5 → 5 Default setting SW6 → 6 SW7 → 7 SW8 → 8 Conversino mode Sw6 off Conversion mode Remarks Default setting I/O assignment, data table I/O assignment = "FUN 0" WX u00 System area Do not use this area. WX u01 Ch.1 Input data Data in lower 12 bits. WX u02 Ch.2 Input data Always 0 in higher 4 bits. WX u03 Ch.3 Input data 0000H - 0FFFH WX u04 Ch.4 Input data WY u05 System area Do not use this area. WY u06 Ch.6 Output data Data to be written in lower 12 bits. WY u07 Ch.7 Output data 0000H -0FFFH u : Unit number (1 - 4) Example : Unit 1, Input ch.2 → WX102 Unit 4, Output ch.7 → WY407 In/output data table 0 - 10V / 0 - 20mA / 4 - 20mA 0V / 0mA / 4mA 5V / 10mA / 12mA 10V / 20mA / 20mA Mode 4000 0 H07D0 (2000) H0FA0 (4000) -10 - +10V (only for analog input) Mode 4000 -10V H0830 (-2000) * 0V 0 +10V H07D0 (2000) * 2's complement ON Caution : Set dip switch while power off. 4,096 (H0FFF) ON 4,000 (H0FA0) Sw5,7,8 : Set off always. OFF Mode 4096 0 H07FF (2047) H0FFF (4095) Mode 4096 H0800 (-2048) * 0 H07FF (2047) 8-24 Chapter 9 PLC Operation Chapter 9 PLC Operation The operating status and stop status of the MICRO-EH can be switched through various types of operations. This feature is shown in Figure 9.1. Cancel operation definition input Switch “RUN” and operation definition input “ON” Switch “RUN” Stop status Operating status Switch “STOP” Stop status Switch “STOP” or operation definition input “OFF” Designate operation definition input Caution The MICRO-EH cannot handle a REMOTE specification. A 10-point type CPU becomes the RUN mode when the RUN input is On. Figure 9.1 Transitional diagram between operating and stop statuses The MICRO-EH can be operated or stopped under the conditions as shown in Figure 9.1. If an error is detected during operation or stop, output is shut off, an error is displayed and the MICRO-EH stops. There are fatal error, serious error, minor error and warning. The operating status for each error is listed in Table 9.1. Classification Fatal error Serious error Minor error Warning Table 9.1 Description of each error and operating status Description This indicates there is a fatal and unrecoverable error, such as a power supply problem, microcomputer error, system ROM error, system RAM error and system path error. This indicates there is an error such as data memory problem, system program problem, user memory problem, user memory size error, syntax/assembler error, etc., which may cause a malfunction if operation is continued. These are errors such as I/O information verify error, remote problem, congestion error, excessively assigned I/O points, etc. The operation may be continued when a continue operation is set by the user programs. These are problems such as a transfer error, backup memory write problem, etc. where it is possible to continue the operation. 9-1 Run/Stop Stops Stops Stops (continued operation is possible if specified) Operation continues Chapter 9 PLC Operation 9.1 RUN Start When the MICRO-EH switches to the operating state, the user program is executed in sequence from the beginning. The user programs consist of a normal scan program and periodical scan program. In addition to these programs, there is a subroutine area defined as a subroutine. No. 1 2 Program classification Normal scan program Periodical scan program Table 9.2 Program classification Description Expression This is the program that is normally executed. When the program has been executed to the END instruction, execution starts again from the beginning. Congestion error is monitored according to the Normal scan congestion check time set by the user. It is program monitored from the beginning of the program to the END instruction. When it is specified to continue during congestion (R7C0), the operation continues END even if a congestion error occurs. Described in the area after the END This program is executed periodically at instruction. intervals of 10 ms, 20 ms, or 40 ms. INT0: Every 10 ms INT1: Every 20 ms INTn INT2: Every 40 ms Each execution cycle time becomes a congestion error monitoring time. When it is specified to continue during congestion (R7C1), the periodical scan program is suspended during operation. 3 Interrupt scan program When there is an input to the input terminal assigned to the interrupt input, the interrupt program (INT16 to INT19) corresponding to that input starts up. If another interrupt caused by the same factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt program, a congestion error occurs. When the operation continuation at a congestion error (R7C2) is specified, the same interrupt scan program is run from the beginning again. Periodic scan program RTI n = 0, 1, 2 Described in the area after the END instruction INTn Interrupt scan program RTI n = 16 to 19 If the counter value exceeds the preset value, a Described in the area after the END instruction corresponding interrupt program (INT20 to INT27) starts up according to the counter number. INTn Interrupt scan program RTI n = 20 to 27 4 Subroutine This is a program called by the CALL instruction. Described in the area after the END instruction SBn Subroutine program RTS n = 0 to 99 9-2 Chapter 9 PLC Operation Each program is executed in the order of the priority shown in Figure 9.2. Each program is executed while monitoring the execution time of each program area. If the monitored time exceeds the specified time, this causes a congestion error and operation stops. When continued operation has been specified, operation continues. The timing for scan execution is shown in Figure 9.2. System processing is performed at set periods (every 5 ms), followed by communication system processing. *1 The maximum execution time of communication system processing equals the duration of time until the next periodical system processing is started. If the communication system processing ends before the maximum execution time is up, execution of scan processing is started upon completion of the communication system processing. When the next periodical processing is executed, scanning is performed until the next periodical processing is executed. *1: *2: Communication system processing is executed every 10 ms. The execution of scan processing starts after the communication system processing is completed. 5 ms 2] 1] Periodic system processing 1] 2] Communication system processing Scan processing Figure 9.2 Relationship between system processing and scanning Note: Processing 1 takes extremely short period of time as compared with Processing 2. Therefore, in the following diagram Processing 1 is omitted in order to avoid complexity. As shown in Figure 9.3, scan processing is done while periodical scanning is performed. Periodical scanning is processed at the point when switching to normal scan. Periodical scans are performed at intervals of every 10 ms, 20 ms, or 40 ms. In terms of priority of execution, 10 ms scans have the highest priority. Use the refresh instruction when you wish to perform data processing for the external I/O (X, Y) in the periodical scan. Update processing of timer progress value is performed as a part of system processing. 10 ms System processing Periodic scan (10 ms) Periodic scan (20 ms) Periodic scan (40 ms) Normal scan Figure 9.3 Scan execution timing 9.1.1 Normal Scan (1) Definition and operation The normal scan refers to the calculations and execution of the ladder/instruction language program (excluding interrupt programs) until the END scan processing caused by the END instruction or the execution of programs written in Pro-H. The time required for one scan, from the beginning of a normal scan program to the END scan processing, is called the normal scan time. Ladder or instruction language program (excluding interrupt program) END scan processing END scan processing (system self-diagnosis) Ladder or instruction language program END instruction END instruction Figure 9.4 Operation of normal scan 9-3 END instruction END instruction Chapter 9 PLC Operation (2) Causes of congestion errors at normal scan Congestion errors may occur at normal scan because of the following three possible reasons. In particular when using a periodical scan program and an interrupt scan program together, care must be taken to create the program in such a way that the total scan time does not exceed the congestion check time. (a) When only a normal scan program is used The scan time exceeded the congestion check time because the time required for one scan was too long. Periodical system processing Normal scan The periodical system interrupt is executed by interrupts at every 10 ms regardless of whether or not there is a periodical scan or interrupt scan. 10 ms END scan processing Program execution Normal scan time (normal scan only) Congestion check time The congestion check time can be set to 20 ms to 2550 ms using peripheral devices by the users. Figure 9.5 Congestion error at normal scan (a) (b) When both a normal scan program and a periodical scan program are used The congestion check time was exceeded because the periodical scan program was executed and the normal scan time became longer. Periodical Periodical system processing scan Periodical program Normal scan END scan processing Program execution 10 ms RTI INT0 RTI INT0 Scan time Congestion check time Figure 9.6 Congestion error at normal scan (b) (c) When both a normal scan program and an interrupt scan program are used The congestion check time was exceeded because the interrupt scan program was executed due to an interrupt input and the normal scan time became longer. Periodical system processing Interrupt analysis Interrupt processing scan Program execution Normal END scan processing Program execution scan 10 ms Scan time Congestion check time Figure 9.7 Congestion error at normal scan (c) (3) Continuation of operation after a congestion error occurred When the special internal output bit R7C0, which specifies whether the operation should continue after a congestion error occurred, is turned on, the normal scan executes the scan until the end regardless of the congestion check time, and after executing the END scan processing, executes the normal scan from the beginning again. Periodical system processing Normal scan END scan processing Program execution 10 ms Scan time Congestion check time Figure 9.8 Operation when operation continuation at congestion error is set However, note that this setting does not stop the execution of the scan when a congestion error occurred even when an infinite loop is formed within the normal scan by the JMP instruction. 9-4 Chapter 9 PLC Operation 9.1.2 Periodical Scan (1) Definition and operation This scan executes interrupt programs (periodical scan programs) while the CPU is operating with a fixed cycle time (10 ms, 20 ms, or 40 ms) specified by the users. Enter the periodical scan program to be executed between instructions INT0 and RT1 if it should be started up with a 10 ms cycle time, and between INT1 and RT1 if it should be started up with a 20 ms cycle time. The periodical system processing is executed every 10 ms regardless of whether or not there is a periodical scan program. Normal scan Periodical scan Periodical system processing 10 ms Scan every 10 ms Periodical program Periodical system processing (including interrupt analysis processing) Periodical scan Program execution 20 ms Scan every 20 ms Periodical program Scan every 40 ms Periodical program Normal scan Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt INT1 INT1 INT1 RTI RTI Figure 9.9 Operation of periodical scan (in case of INT1) (2) Causes of congestion errors at periodical scan If there are periodical scans at every 10 ms as well as scans at every 20 ms or 40 ms, a congestion error occurs and the scan is stopped if the periodical scan at 10 ms is started up again before all the periodical scans are completed (i.e., the periodical system processing at INT0 to INT2 does not end within 10 ms). Periodical system processing Periodical scan Normal scan END scan processing Normal scan program 10 ms 10 ms Scan every 10 ms Periodical program Scan every 20 ms Periodical program Scan every 40 ms Periodical program Stop 10 ms Stop Stop RTI RTI INT0 (Example 1) Before the periodical scan program at every 10 ms ends, the periodical interrupt at 10 ms is started up again. INT0 INT0 INT1 (Example 2) Before the periodical scan program at every 20 ms ends, the periodical interrupt at 10 ms is started up again. INT1 RTI INT2 (Example 3) Before the periodical scan program at every 40 ms ends, the periodical interrupt at 10 ms is started up again. Figure 9.10 Congestion error at periodical scan (10 ms) Similarly, when executing with a periodical scan at every 20 ms or with a combination of periodical scans at every 20 ms and 40 ms, a congestion error occurs if the periodical scan at 20 ms is started up again before all the periodical scans are completed (i.e., the periodical system processing at INT1 to INT2 does not end within 20 ms). Finally, when using a periodical scan at every 40 ms, a congestion error occurs if the periodical scan at 40 ms is started up again before all the periodical scans are completed (i.e., the periodical system processing at INT2 does not end within 40 ms). 9-5 Chapter 9 PLC Operation (3) Continuation of operation after a congestion error If a congestion error occurs when the special internal output bit R7C1, which specifies whether the operation should continue after a congestion error, is turned on, the execution of the periodical scan is stopped and the periodical scan is executed from the beginning again. If the operation continuation specification for the normal scan is Off when this happens, the scan stops as a congestion error at a normal scan. If the operation continuation specification for the normal scan is On, only the periodical scan continues to be executed in the event of a periodical congestion error. Care must be taken because the normal scan is not executed under this condition. Periodical system processing 10 ms R7C0 On/R7C1 On: Continue Scan every 10 ms Periodical program Scan every 20 ms Periodical program Scan every 40 ms Periodical program Periodical scan Normal scan R7C0 Off/R7C1 On: Stop INT0 END scan processing Normal scan program INT0 Periodical interrupt (10 ms periodical interrupt restarts) Congestion check time Periodical interrupt Figure 9.11 Operation when operation continuation at congestion error is set 9.1.3 Interrupt Scan (1) Definition and operation If there is an input to an input terminal assigned to an interrupt input, or there is an input to an input terminal assigned to a counter input and the current counter value exceeds the preset value while the CPU is operating, interrupt programs (interrupt scan) corresponding to them are started up. An interrupt scan caused by an interrupt input executes interrupt programs from INT16 to19 to RTI instructions. An interrupt scan due to a corresponding interrupt caused by the counter current value executes the interrupt programs from INT20 to INT27 to RTI instruction. If an interrupt caused by another factor is input during the execution of an interrupt scan, the next interrupt scan is started up at the point when the interrupt scan being executed is completed. Also, if two or more interrupts are input during the execution of an interrupt scan, the interrupt scans are started up in order from the smallest INT number at the point when the interrupt scan being executed is completed. Periodical system processing Interrupt analysis processing Normal scan 10 ms Interrupt scan RTI RTI INT16 INT17 INT20 Interrupt analysis processing Execution of interrupt program RTI RTI RTI RTI Normal scan INT20 INT16 INT16 INT17 INT20 INT17 Figure 9.12 Operation of interrupt scan (2) Causes of congestion errors at interrupt scan An interrupt scan congestion error occurs during the interrupt scan processing when an interrupt of the same number is entered again. In addition, a normal scan congestion error occurs if interrupt inputs are frequently entered because a normal scan cannot be executed. Periodical system processing Interrupt scan Interrupt analysis processing Interrupt scan Normal scan END scan processing Program execution 10 ms The interrupt contact of INT16 is turned on during the execution of the INT16 program. Stop Interrupt contact on (INT16) Interrupt contact on (INT16) Figure 9.13 Operation of interrupt scan 9-6 Chapter 9 PLC Operation (3) Continuation of operation after a congestion error occurred If an interrupt scan congestion error occurs when the special internal output bit R7C2, which specifies whether the operation should continue after a congestion error, is turned on, the interrupt scan is started anew and the scan is executed from the beginning again. Therefore, if the operation continuation specification of the normal scan is Off under the conditions where interrupt inputs are frequently entered from the external source, this scan is stopped as a normal scan congestion error. If the operation continuation specification of the normal scan is On, only interrupt scans are continuously executed depending on the condition of the interrupt congestion error. Care must be taken because normal scans are not executed under this condition. Periodical system processing Interrupt scan Normal scan Interrupt analysis processing Interrupt scan R7C0 On/R7C2 On: Continue INT16 END scan processing Program execution R7C0 Off/R7C2 On: Stop Interrupt contact on INT16 Interrupt contact on INT16 Interrupt contact on Congestion check time Figure 9.14 Operation when operation continuation at congestion error is set 9-7 Chapter 9 PLC Operation 9.1.4 Relationship of Each Scan Type When three types of scan occur at the same time, scan is executed in the order of periodical scan, then interrupt scan, and then normal scan. Low Normal scan Execution priority High Interrupt scan Periodical scan 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms Periodical scan Interrupt scan Normal scan Periodical system processing Periodical 10 ms periodical program scan 20 ms periodical program 40 ms periodical program Interrupt scan Interrupt analysis processing Interrupt program INT16 INT17 INT18 : : INT27 Normal scan Ladder program END scan Processing Figure 9.15 Relational diagram of scan operation Interrupt label INT0 INT1 INT2 INT16 INT17 INT18 INT19 Table 9.3 List of interrupt label Cause of startup Interrupt label Interrupt every 10 ms INT20 Interrupt every 20 ms INT21 Interrupt every 40 ms INT22 Interrupt of interrupt input 1 INT23 Interrupt of interrupt input 2 INT24 Interrupt of interrupt input 3 INT25 Interrupt of interrupt input 4 INT26 INT27 9-8 Cause of startup Counter 1 on-preset match Counter 1 off-preset match Counter 2 on-preset match Counter 2 off-preset match Counter 3 on-preset match Counter 3 off-preset match Counter 4 on-preset match Counter 4 off-preset match Chapter 9 PLC Operation 9.2 Online Change in RUN The user programs can be modified during operation while retaining the output status as is. This is called the “program change while running” function. To modify the user programs, special programming software or programmer is required. Refer to the individual manuals on the operation. Program change while running cannot be executed in the following situations. Perform this operation after satisfying the conditions. Table 9.4 Conditions for performing program change while running No 1 2 3 4 5 Conditions under which program change while Specific situation running cannot be performed When READ-occupying Other programming device is connected. When a personal computer or panel, etc. is connected and monitoring is being executed. END instruction is not executed. A program that runs in an infinite loop is being executed. Attempted to modify a program Performing program change while running for a that includes control circuit containing a control instruction may cause instructions. operation to stop depending on the type of the program modification error. A password has been set. A program protected by a password cannot be modified. How to satisfy the conditions Change other programming devices to off-line. Change the personal computer or panel to off-line. (When monitoring, it is convenient to use the occupancy unnecessary task code.) Correct the program so that it does not run in an infinite loop. An explanation of how to perform program change while running for a circuit that contains a control instruction is given in the programming software manual. Execute after having the system administrator remove the password. (When the CPU is stopped, the update is executed without displaying a message confirming program change while running.) The MICRO-EH operation when the user program is changed in RUN is shown below. Program change while running Program modification NG Assemble check Program change Error stop while running (output shuts off) including control command OK Scanning stops at END scan Transfer to operation execution memory Scan resumes Transfer to FLASH memory Displays that program change while running is being performed (programming device) HALT time Note The special internal output R7EF turns on during the transfer to the FLASH memory. If the power supply to the CPU is turned off during transferring to the FLASH memory, the programs may be destroyed. Before the power supply to the CPU is turned off it should be confirmed that R7EF is off, or it should not be turned off until after approximately two minutes upon the completion of program transfer. (If the pulse is being output, turn off the power supply approximately two minutes after the pulse output stops.) Figure 9.16 Internal processing for program change while running Transfer to the FLASH memory Unlike the conventional H/EH series, the MICRO-EH transfers its user program to the FLASH memory, the backup memory, during the idle time of the CPU processing. Because of this, when the transfer to the operation execution memory is completed, the peripheral unit displays that the transfer is complete. However, the transfer to the FLASH memory is not completed at this stage. If the power supply to the CPU (especially CPUs without battery or CPUs whose data maintenance guarantee time is over) is turned off at this status, a user memory error (31H) occurs when the power supply to the main unit is turned back on. Therefore, it should be confirmed that the FLASH memory writing flag (R7EF) is off before the power supply to the main unit is turned off, or it should not be turned off until after approximately two minutes upon the completion of program transfer. (During pulse output, programs are not transferred to the FLASH memory until the pulse output is stopped. If the pulse is being output, turn off the power supply approximately two minutes after the pulse output stops.) CPU HALT time When performing program change while running, the program to be written to the CPU is checked if there are no errors, then the CPU is halted temporarily (RUN → HALT). The program of the modified area is written to the CPU while it is halted, and the CPU is set to operate (HALT → RUN) again. At this time, the following equation shows the approximate time the CPU is halted (it is not necessarily the maximum value). HALT time (ms) = 45 × Program capacity (k steps) + 20 An example of a calculation of the HALT time for the MICRO-EH using the above equation is 155 ms. 9-9 Chapter 9 PLC Operation 9.3 Instantaneous Power Failure The following shows operation when the power supply to the MICRO-EH shuts off. AC power supply Internal 5 V DC Internal reset 24 V DC RUN ON OFF MICRO-EH operation STOP status Reset processing Power on 2s (1) 1.0 s 1.2 s Instantaneous power failure RUN status (Starts operation) When power supply of 100 V AC is used: operation continues for 10 ms or less When power supply of 200 V AC is used: operation continues for 20 ms or less Powering on The MICRO-EH starts operations after a maximum of 3.5 seconds have elapsed after power-up. If the power for input module is not completely started when the operation is commenced, the input that is supposed to be on will be received as Off and operation proceeds, so make sure that the power for I/O module is completely turned on before operation is commenced. Note: When extending with a CPU larger than 14-point type, turn on the power supply for both base and extension sides at the same time. (2) Instantaneous power failure actions (a) When 100 VAC is supplied Operation is continued during instantaneous power failures that last less than 10 ms. (b) When 200 VAC is supplied Operation is continued during instantaneous power failure that last less than 20 ms. Note: Make arrangement so that the power for input module is supplied while the CPU continues its operation. If the power is not supplied, the CPU will perform operation assuming the input data as Off. Exercise caution especially when performing operation that changes the contents of the power failure memory using input signals, since the contents of the power failure memory may have been altered unintentionally due to an instantaneous power failure. 9-10 Chapter 9 PLC Operation 9.4 Operation Parameter The settings of “parameters,” which are required to perform tasks such as creating programs, transferring programs to the CPU, are performed. The setting contents are explained below. Item 1 Function Password { 2 CPU type { 3 Memory assignment { 4 Operating parameters { 5 I/O assignment 6 Program name 7 Power failure memory* Description Register a password to a program in the four-digit hexadecimal format. The program with a password will not allow program operation nor changes unless the correct password is entered, so please exercise caution. Note: The user will not be able to reset the password when it is forgotten, so exercise extreme caution when accessing a password. Password is not set at the time of shipment. Set the CPU name used to perform programming. Set the CPU type to “H-302” for MICRO-EH. Set the memory capacity. Set the memory type to “RAM-04H” for MICRO-EH. Operation control Perform these settings when controlling the running and stopping of the operation using a specific I/O. If this is not set, operation will start automatically by setting the RUN switch (or the RUN terminal) to “RUN.” { Congestion check time Set this when you wish to stop the CPU operation when the set maximum processing time for a normal scan is exceeded. When this setting is not made, this is automatically set to initial value 100 ms. { Operating mode at problem occurrence Set this when you wish to continue the CPU operation when the error generated by the CPU is minor. { This sets the I/O assignment information of the CPU. It is convenient to use the MICRO-EH's I/O assignment copy function. Set the program name using a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters. The set program names can be written into the CPU along with the program, which will facilitate the program verification and management. This sets the range in which the data in a specified area in the CPU is to be stored upon CPU power off or when commencing RUN. Settings for R, WR, WM, TD, DIF, DFN are possible. When to use the function Use to protect the confidentiality of the programs. Always perform these settings when programming. Always perform these settings when programming. The number of program steps that can be input is 3072. Set according to the user's operation purposes. Always perform these settings when programming. Set this to facilitate program verification and management. Set this when there is data you wish to maintain when operation is stopped. The special internal output data is unconditionally saved for power failure by the I/O number. *: 10-point type CPU does not have the power failure memory function. Even though it is possible to set a power failure memory area from a peripheral unit, the values that are stored here will not be persistent; do not set this function. Moreover, 14-point type CPU can maintain power failure memory only up to 72 hours. Note that non-persistent values will be stored if the power supply to the main unit is not turned on after these hours have passed. 23- and 28point CPUs without a battery can maintain power failure memory for only up to 30 minutes. The data can be retained for approximately two months by installing a battery. 9-11 Chapter 9 PLC Operation 9.5 9.6 Test Operation (1) Verification of interlock Verify performance of the interlock in case of unexpected incidents. Create ladders such as an emergency stop circuit, protective circuit and interlock circuit outside the program controller. For the relay output module, however, do not control the relay drive power supply to interlock with the external loads. (2) Operation without load Before actually operating the loads in the system, test the program only and verify its operation. Always perform this if there may damage the other party's equipment due to unexpected operation caused by program errors or other problems. (3) Operation using actual loads Supply power to the external input and external output to verify the actions. Forced Set/Reset It is possible to forcefully set/reset data to specified I/O points using peripheral units, regardless of whether the CPU is operating or stopped. Refer to the manuals for the peripheral units for how to set/reset forcefully. Please note that for the special internal outputs related to operation modes, forcefully setting/resetting only the corresponding special internal output does not enforce the change in the operation mode. For example, when the frequency of a pulse output should be changed, the frequency will not be changed by just setting the desirable frequency in WRF072, the special internal output for setting pulse frequency. See Chapter 8, where the setting of the PI/O function is explained in detail. 9.7 Forced Output It is possible to use peripheral units to specify single outputs for forced output while the CPU is stopped. Refer to the manuals for the peripheral units for how to output forcefully. Table 9.5 lists the differences between the forced set/reset and forced output. Table 9.5 Differences between forced set/reset and forced output Forced set/reset Forced output I/O types that can be used X,Y,M,R,TD,SS,CU, CT,WX,WY, Y,WY,DY WM,WR, TC,DX,DY,DM,DR CPU status in which the During RUN and being stopped Being stopped function can be used Function Changes the data in the area that stores Turns only one specified external output (one point or one data) on/off the CPU calculation result to a while the CPU is being stopped. specified value. All other outputs are turned off. For checking the wiring for external Application For checking when setting/changing output. power failure memory area data at troubles. Note: 1] The actual external output status and the external output information stored internally in the CPU may be different when the CPU is stopped. At this point, if a forced set/reset is performed to the external output, the external output information stored internally in the CPU is output from other external output. Thus, the forced output function can be used in order to check the wiring for the external output. 2] Only I/O points assigned by the I/O assignment written in the CPU can be set for external input and external output I/O numbers. 9-12 Chapter 10 PLC Installation, Mounting, Wiring Chapter 10 PLC Installation, Mounting, Wiring 10.1 Installation (1) (2) Installation location and environment (a) When installing the MICRO-EH, use the unit under the environment within the general specification. (b) Mount the PLC onto a metal plate. (c) Install the PLC in a suitable enclosure such as a cabinet that opens with a key, tool, etc. Installing the unit (a) Precautions when installing the unit 1] When installing the base unit, fix it securely with screws in 2 places (M4, length 20 mm or more) or DIN rail. 2] To use the unit within the ambient temperature range, a) Allow ample space for air circulation. (50 mm or more at top and bottom, 10 mm or more to the left and right) b) Avoid installing the unit directly above equipment that generates significant heat (heater, transformer, large-capacity resistance, etc.) c) When the ambient temperature reaches more than 55 °C, install a fan or cooler to lower the temperature to below 55 °C. 3] Avoid mounting inside a panel where high-voltage equipment is installed. 4] Install 200 mm or more away from high-voltage lines or power lines. 5] Avoid upside down, vertical or horizontal mounting. L1 50 mm or more 10 mm or more 10 mm or more L2 PLC 50 mm or more 50 mm or more 10 mm or more 10 mm or more PLC Dimensional table Unit 10-point 14-point (basic, exp.) 23, 28-point (basic, exp.) 50 mm or more Wiring duct Figure 10.1 Mounting clearances (b) Figure 10.2 External dimensions L1 65 85 140 L2 70 80 80 Unit: mm Mounting to a DIN rail Attaching to a DIN rail 1] Hook the claw (top side) attached to the back of the unit to the DIN rail. 2] Press the unit into the DIN rail until it clicks. 1] Note: After installation, check to make sure the base unit is securely fixed. 2] 10-1 Chapter 10 PLC Installation, Mounting, Wiring Securing the unit Secure the unit by installing DIN rail fixing brackets from both sides. (The product may move out of place if not secured with the fixing brackets.) DIN rail attachment mounting levers Removing the unit from the DIN rail While lowering the DIN rail attachment mounting lever 1], lift the unit upward to remove as shown by 2]. DIN rail attachment mounting levers 2] 1] 10-2 Chapter 10 PLC Installation, Mounting, Wiring 10.2 Wiring (1) Separation of the power system The power supplies include power for the MICRO-EH main unit/power for the I/O signals/power for general equipment. These power supplies should be wired from separate systems as much as possible. When these power supplies are supplied from one main power source, separate the wiring with a transformer or similar device, so that each power supply is a separate system. Main power supply 100 V AC to 240 V AC NF Power for the PLC unit Transformer NF: noise filter NF Power for I/O signals Transformer NF Power for general equipment Figure 10.3 Example of power system diagram (2) Regarding fail safe 1] Construct an interlock circuit external to the MICRO-EH. When the MICRO-EH’s power is turned on or off, the inputs/outputs of the MICRO-EH may not temporarily operate normally due to the time lag of the power supply of the MICRO-EH’s main unit, the external power supply of the MICRO-EH’s expansion unit, and the external power supply (especially DC power supply) for the MICRO-EH’s I/O signals, as well as the difference in their startup times. Thus, either turn on the power to the expansion unit first, or turn on the power to both the base unit and expansion unit simultaneously. Also, be sure to turn on the external power supply (especially DC power supply) for the MICRO-EH’s I/O signals before turning on the MICRO-EH. Additionally, a problem in the external power supply or a malfunction in the MICRO-EH’s main unit may cause abnormal operations. To prevent such problems from causing abnormal operations of the entire system, and from the viewpoint of creating a fail-safe mechanism, construct such circuits as an emergency stop circuit, protective circuit and interlock circuit external to the MICRO-EH for the sections that may result in mechanical damage or accident if abnormal operations occur. 2] Install a lightning arrester To prevent damage to the equipment as a result of being struck by lightning, it is recommended that a lightning arrester be installed for each MICRO-EH’s power supply circuit. The MICRO-EH detects a power failure from a voltage drop in the internal 5 VDC power supply. For this reason, when the load in the unit's internal 5 VDC system is light, 5 VDC is retained for a long period of time and operations may continue for more than 100 ms. Thus, when an AC input unit is used, an off-delay timer for coordinating with the internal 5 VDC system is required to avoid erroneous input since the AC input signal turns off more quickly than the internal 5 VDC system. 10-3 Chapter 10 PLC Installation, Mounting, Wiring (3) Wiring to the power module (a) For power supply wiring, use a cable of 2 mm2 or more to prevent a voltage drop from occurring. (b) For the function ground terminal (PE terminal), use a cable of 2 mm2 or more and provide Class D grounding (100 Ω or less). The appropriate length for the ground cable is within 20 m. 1] Instrumentation panel and relay panel grounding may be shared. 2] Avoid grounding shared with equipment that may generate noise such as highfrequency heating furnace, large-scaled power panel (several kW or more), thyristor exchanger, electric welders, etc. 3] Connect a noise filter (NF) to the power cable. (c) Tighten the terminal screws within the torque range as shown below. Power supply for the sensor 100 V AC to 240 V AC Power leakage breaker Shielded insulated transformer Noise filter Figure 10.4 Power supply wiring diagram Unit Screw 10-point 14, 23, 28-point, expansion M2.5 Clamping torque 0.3 to 0.4 Nxm M3.0 0.5 to 0.6 Nxm (d) Use the same power supply system for the basic and expansion units. (4) Wiring cable for I/O signals 6 6 10-4 Tighten each terminal screw using a torque of the specified torque range. When using a crimp terminal, use one with an outer diameter of 6 mm or less. Use only up to two crimp terminals in the same terminal. Avoid clamping down more than three at the same time. Only one piece of cable can be wired per terminal if the cable type is between AWG14 and AWG22 (cable thickness ranging between 2.1 mm2 and 0.36 mm2), but two pieces can be wired if the cable type is between AWG16 and AWG22 (between 1.3 mm2 and 0.36 mm2). Chapter 10 PLC Installation, Mounting, Wiring (5) Wiring to the input terminals DC input AC input Current output type Proximity switch 24 V DC ① 1] 24+ 0V 3] 2] 0] 4] C0 6] 5] C1 0 7] ③ ② ④ C0 ⑥ ⑤ C1 ⑦ Example of 14-point type Example of 14-point type Figure 10.5 Input wiring (a) DC input 1] When all input terminals (X0, X1, ...) and the common terminal (C) are loaded with 24 VDC, the input becomes ON status, and approximately 7.5 mA of current flows to the external input contacts. 2] For sensors such as a proximity switch or photoelectric switch, current output type (transistor open collector) can be connected directly. For voltage-output-type sensors, connect them to the input terminal after first going through the transistor. 3] Take measures to prevent faulty contact in a strong electric contact. Strong electric contact The current that flows to a contact when external contacts are closed is approximately 7.5 mA. If a strong electric contact must be used, add resistance as shown in the diagram at left and supply sufficient current to the contact to prevent a faulty contact. 1] Approx. 50 mA 24 V DC 3W 560 Ω C DC input module 4] Limit the wiring length within 30 m. 5] Multiple number of common terminals located at each input section are not connected internally. Make the connections externally as needed. 6] There are no RUN and STOP switches for the 10-point type. Connect with the RUN input terminal according to the above connection procedure so that RUN and STOP can be performed. Operation cannot be performed unless this connection is done. (b) AC input In case of AC input module, input voltage may exist if input wiring is long although no device drives. This phenomenon is caused from leakage current due to floating capacitance between lines. External device AC input module The countermeasures are [1] or [2] as follows. This voltage due to electrostatic coupling must be half of max. OFF voltage or less. [1] To install dummy resistor in parallel so that impedance of input module is lower. [2] To replace power supply at drive (external device) side. Dummy resistor External device AC input module 10-5 Chapter 10 PLC Installation, Mounting, Wiring (6) Wiring to the output terminals Relay output EH-*XXDR** Item External wiring POW POW 0] 1] C0 2] C1 4] 3] C2 POW 5] POW 0] 1] C0 FUSE Diode Figure 10.6 Relay output wiring External wiring Transistor output (sink type) (EH-*XXDT**) POW 0] POW NC 1] 3] 2] 5] 4] C V FUSE Diode Figure 10.7 Transistor output wiring Transistor output (source type) (EH- XXDTP**) Item External wiring POW POW 0] NC 1] 2] 3] 5] 4] C V FUSE Diode Figure 10.8 Transistor output wiring 10-6 4] 3] C2 5] FUSE Surge killer Item 2] C1 Chapter 10 PLC Installation, Mounting, Wiring (a) Wiring to the relay output terminals 1] Life of relay contacts Life curve of relay contacts Figure 1 Life characteristics (125 V AC) 1000 Switching life (10,000 times) 500 AC 125 V cos φ =1 100 AC 125 V cos φ =0.7 50 Life of the contact is almost in squared reverse proportion to the current, so be aware that interrupting rush current or directly driving the condenser load will drastically reduce the life of the relay. When switching is made with high frequency, use a transistor output module. 20 10 1 AC 125 V cos φ =0.4 0 1 2 4 5 3 6 Contact switching current (A) Figure 2 Life characteristics (250 V AC) 1000 Switching life (10,000 times) 500 100 AC 250 V cos φ =1 50 AC 250 V cos φ =0.7 20 10 AC 250 V cos φ =0.4 1 0 1 2 4 5 3 6 Contact switching current (A) Figure 3 Life characteristics 1000 Switching life (10,000 times) 500 DC 30 V L/R=1 ms 100 50 DV 30 V L/R=7 ms 20 10 1 DC 30 V L/R=15 ms 0 1 2 3 6 4 5 Contact switching current (A) 2] Surge killer For inductive load, connect a surge killer (condenser 0.1 µF, + resistance of approx. 100 Ω) in parallel to the load. Also, for DC load, connect a flywheel diode. 3] Fuse A built-in fuse is not used in this module. Install a 6 A fuse in the common to prevent the external wiring from burning out. For the independent contact output section, install a 2A fuse per circuit. (b) Wiring to the transistor output terminals 4] Flywheel diode For inductive load, connect a flywheel diode in parallel. 5] V and C terminals Always connect a V terminal and C (common) terminal. If the module is used without connecting these terminals, the internal flywheel diode may not function and the module may malfunction or break down. 6] Fuse There is no built-in fuse to prevent external wiring burning. Therefore, it is recommended that a fuse be installed externally to prevent the external wiring from burning out. (This does not protect the internal transistor elements.) If the external load is short-circuited, please contact us for repair. 10-7 Chapter 10 PLC Installation, Mounting, Wiring (7) Wiring to the unit terminals Wiring for the power supply 2 Shield insulation transformer AC power supply Use a 2 mm cable and twist it. Leave a distance of 100 mm or more from the signal cable and 200 mm or more from the power line. NF Connection of a noise filter is recommended. Expansion cable Always segregate power line, I/O signal and power supply cable Ground wiring 2 Use a cable 2 mm or more for the wiring. I/O signal cable Leave a distance of at least 200 mm from the power line and do not run the wire next to the power cable. Class D grounding Metal plate Perform class D grounding Outer hull (Cabinet) Perform class D grounding Figure 10.9 Example of wiring (8) Wiring to the analog I/O terminals • Do not apply the voltage that exceeds the rated input voltage to the analog input terminals. In addition, do not allow the current that exceeds the rated input current to flow into the analog input terminals. If a power supply that is different from the specified power supply is connected, the product may be damaged or burned out. • For the channels that do not use the analog input terminals, be sure to short-circuit the analog input terminals before using such channels. • For the external wiring to the analog I/O terminals, use a shielded cable and make routing different from other power lines with different voltages and signal lines. In addition, ground one end of the shield cable. However, grounding both ends or open ends may have better effect than grounding one end of the shield cable, depending on the noise environment in which the equipment is used. Use the appropriate grounding method accordingly. • Place AC power supply lines, signal lines and data lines in separate pipes. • Wire signal lines and data lines as close as possible to a grounded surface such as a cabinet and metal bar. 10-8 Chapter 11 Communication Specifications Chapter 11 Communication Specifications 11.1 Port function Port function of MICRO-EH is shown in Table 11.1. Table 11.1 Communication port specification General purpose port Without St. No. (1:1) PC, modem, HMI PC, etc. PC, etc. device, PC, HMI Trans. procedure 2 Transmission procedure 1 Connected devices RS-422/485 Dedicated port Programming device, Transmission procedure 1 Programming Transmission procedure 2 General purpose port RS-232C Dedicated port Port type With St. No. (1:N) Without St. No. (1:1) With St. No. (1:N) PC, etc. PC, etc. PC, etc. PC, etc. Port 1 All modules 9 9 9* - - - - - Port 2 23,28 pts. module - - - 9 9 9 9 9* * Supported by software version 1.30 (WRF051=H0130) or newer. 11.2 Port 1 Specification of port 1 is shown below. Table 11.1 Port 1 specification Item Communication Specification Modem mode General purpose port 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2 k, 38.4k, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, speed* 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k bps 57.6 k bps 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k bps Communication system Half duplex Synchronization Asynchronous Startup system One-sided startup using the host side command Transmission system Serial transmission (bit serial transmission) Transmission code ASCII Configured by user Transmission code configuration Dedicated (programming) port ASCII: 7-bit data, 1 start, 1 stop, even parity Start bit (1 bit) Configured by user Parity bit (1 bit) Stop bit (1 bit) 0 2 1 2 2 6 P Data (7 bits) (even parity) Data sending sequence Sent out from the lowest bit Vertical parity check, checksum, overrun check, framing check Error control Transmission unit Message unit (variable length) Max. message length 1,024 bytes (including control characters) Control procedure H-series dedicated procedure (hi-protocol) Standard protocol (transmission control procedure 1), Interface Simplified protocol (transmission control procedure 2) RS-232C (maximum cable length: 15 m) Connector 8P modular connector (RJ45) Configured by user * : Handy programmers are not available with MICRO-EH. * : GPCL01H is not available with 10 points type as communication speed is fixed as 4,800 bps. * : If host sends NAK command, the next message must be sent after 10 ms interval. 11-1 Chapter 11 Communication Specifications (1) Port 1 settings Port 1 is configured by combination of DIP switch and special register (WRF01A). DIP switch can be set when cable is not connected (DR signal is off). Switch configuration is set at cable connected (DR is high). Value in WRF01A is saved in FLASH memory when writing flag (R7F6) is turned on. If saved in FLASH memory, it is not necessary to set again at the next power up. [ Caution ] If transmission procedure 2 is configured and saved in FLASH memory once, peripheral device/application which supports procedure 1 such as LADDER EDITOR can not be connected. Port type ON 38.4 kbps 19.2 kbps 9600 bps 4800 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Dedicated 19.2 k bps port via 38.4 k bps modem 57.6 k bps 2400 bps General purpose port Dedicated port 1 2 3 4 1 ON ON off off DIP switch 2 3 off ON off off off ON off off 4 off off off off WRF01A Remarks H0000 : Transmission procedure 1 H8000 : Transmission procedure 2 Default H0000 : Prcd. 1 / H8000 : Prcd. 2 H0100 : Prcd. 1 / H8100 : Prcd. 2 H0*** : H0200 : Prcd. 1 / H8200 : Prcd. 2 Procedure 1 off ON off off H8*** : H0300 : Prcd. 1 / H8300 : Prcd. 2 Procedure 2 H0400 : Prcd. 1 / H8400 : Prcd. 2 H0500 : Prcd. 1 / H8500 : Prcd. 2 Port switching by FUN5 command, Baud rate by TRNS/RECV command * Due to no DIP switch equipped, 10 points type does not support modem function. * +12V is supplied from pin 4 if DIP switch is ON. * General purpose port is supported by software version 0130 (WRF051=H0130) or newer. (2) Port 1 hardware The circuit diagram of port 1 and the signal list are shown in Figure 11.2 and Table 11.3 respectively. 5V 1] SG1 2] VCC Micro processor ER1 DCD1 TX1 RX1 DR1 RS1 1] 2] 3] 4] 5] 6] 7] 8] 3] DTR1 4] CD1 5] SD1 6] RD1 7] DR1 8] RS1 12 V Figure 11.2 Circuit diagram and pin numbers for port 1 Table 11.3 List of port 1 signals Pin No. 1] 2] 3] 4] 5] 6] 7] 8] Signal abbreviation SG1 VCC DTR1 (ER) CD1 (DCD) SD1 (TXD) RD1 (RXD) DR1 (DSR) RS1 (RTS) Direction CPU Host Meaning Signal ground 5 V DC is supplied. (Protective fuse is connected.) Communication enabled signal. When it is high, communication is possible. 12V is output when DIP switch 1 is on. Data sent by the CPU Data received by the CPU Peripheral units connected signal. When it is high, peripheral device is connected. Transmission request signal. When it is high, CPU is ready to receive data. 11-2 Chapter 11 Communication Specifications 11.3 Port 2 The specifications of port 2 are listed in Table 11.4. 1:n station communication by the high protocol is possible with port 2. By creating and including a control procedure based on the high protocol on the personal computer which will become the host, it becomes possible to control a maximum of 32 stations from one host. The systems can thus be configured in several ways. Table 11.4 Port 2 specifications Item Dedicated (programming) port 4800, 9600, 19.2 k, 38.4 k bps Communication speed Communication system Synchronization Startup system Transmission system Transmission code, configuration Transmission code outgoing sequence Error control Transmission unit Maximum message length Control procedure Interface Connector Specification General purpose port 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2 k, 38.4 k, 57.6 k bps Half duplex Asynchronous One-sided startup using the host side command Serial transmission (bit serial transmission) ASCII: 7-bit data, 1 start, 1 stop, even parity Configured by user Sent out from the lowest bit in character units Vertical parity check, checksum, overrun check, framing check Message unit (variable length) 503 bytes (including control characters) 1,024 bytes Note: 505 bytes when the station number is used. H-series dedicated procedure (h-protocol) Configured by user Standard protocol (transmission control procedure 1), Simplified protocol (transmission control procedure 2) RS-422/485 (maximum cable length: 250 m) CPU side: 15-pin D-sub Cable side: a cable equivalent to 17JE-23150-02(D8B) (DDK Co., Ltd.) is recommended (D-SUB fitting screw M3 × 0.5) (1) Setting port 2 Port 2 is configured by special register WRF03D. The settings can be changed even when port 2 is communicating. The highest bit (b15) of WRF03D is setting bit. If station number mode is used, make sure to set the station number from 0 to 31 in BCD code. Value in WRF03D is saved in FLASH memory when writing flag (R7F6) is turned on. If saved in FLASH memory, it is not necessary to set again at the next power up. (Example) Transmission control procedure 2, communication speed 19.2 kbps, and station number 28. Î WRF03D = HE228 After the setting is completed, WRF03D is changed to H6228. (b15 cleared) Bit: WRF03D: Initial value: 15 a 0 Field a b c d e 14 b 0 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 c 0 d 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 11.3 Special internal output for setting port 2 Setting value 0 Content Setting completed 1 Setting change request 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 Other than above 0 ~ 31 Transmission control procedure 1 Transmission control procedure 2 Without station number With station number Transmission speed Station number * 4 e 0 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 Note After the setting is completed, the system changes this bit to 0. Set this bit to 1 when changing the setting. 4800 bps 9600 bps 19.2 kbps 38.4 kbps 4800 bps Setting of bits 8 to 12 H0000 H0001 H0010 H0011 Set by BCD. * Communication speed of general purpose port is configured in TRNS/RECV command. Value in WRF03D is ignored. 11-3 Chapter 11 Communication Specifications (2) 1:n station communication on RS-485 When station number mode is used on RS-485, termination command (NAK FF) from host/PC can conflict with reply from CPU, and CPU can fail to receive this command. Pay attention to this possibility at using this command. (3) Port 2 hardware The circuit diagram of port 2 and the signal list are shown in Figure 11.4 and Table 11.6 respectively. 7] SG 5] VCC Micro processor VCC 15] 14] RSP RS2 14] 6] RSN 13] 15] CSN CS2 12] 8] CSP TX2 RX2 13] SDP 11] 12] SDN 10] 10] RDN 9] 8] 7] 6] 5] 4] 3] 2] 1] 11] RDP 9] RT Figure 11.4 Circuit diagram and pin numbers for port 2 Table 11.6 List of port 2 signals Pin No. 1] 2] 3] 4] 5] 6] 7] 8] 9] 10] 11] 12] 13] 14] 15] Signal abbreviation NC NC NC NC Vcc RSN SG CSP RT RDN RDP SDN SDP RSP CSN Direction CPU Host Meaning Not used Not used Not used Not used 5 V DC is supplied. Transmission request signal. When it is high low, CPU is ready to receive data.. Signal ground Receive enabled signal. When it is high, connected device is ready to receive data. Terminating resistor (120Ω). Connect to pin 10 if necessary. Data received by the CPU Data received by the CPU + Data sent by the CPU Data sent by the CPU + Transmission request signal. When it is high level, CPU is ready to receive data. Receive enabled signal. When it is low, connected device is ready to receive data. 11.4 General purpose port (Port 1,2) General purpose port can be configured either port 1 or port 2 by FUN 5 command in user program. General purpose port enables serial communication to devices like bar code reader by TRNS/RECV command in user program. Even if configured, the port works as general purpose port only CPU is in RUN status. Port is changed back to dedicated port when CPU is in STOP status. * General purpose port is supported by software version 1.30 (WRF051=H0130) or newer. CPU in STOP General purpose port Dedicated port 11-4 Switching automatically CPU in RUN General purpose port Chapter 11 Communication Specifications 11.5 Modem Control Function The 14-point or higher MICRO-EH is equipped with a modem control function. The modem control function can be operated using task codes. To use this function, it is necessary to set No.2 of the DIP SW. For details on the communication specifications, see Table 11.1, “Specifications of port 1.” * The 10-point type CPU does not have this function. Connecting two operating modems may be difficult if there is a significant difference between them in terms of communication speeds. Thus, use the models having the same communication speed. 11.5.1 Configuration Personal computer Modem Modem MICRO-EH RS-232C (MAX 57.6 kbps) Public line Figure 11.5 Modem connection configuration diagram Table 11.7 List of port 1 signals when a modem is connected Signal Direction Meaning abbreviation CPU Host SG1 Signal ground CD1 Carrier receive in-progress notification signal Connected to CD in the modem. ER1 Communication enabled signal of the terminal ER2 Not used SD1 Data sent by the CPU Connected to SD in the modem. RD1 Data received by the CPU Connected to RD in the modem. DR1 Communication enabled signal of the modem Connected to DR in the modem. RS1 Transmission request signal Connected to RS in the modem. Pin No. 1] 2] 3] 4] 5] 6] 7] 8] 11.5.2 AT Commands The AT commands are used to make various modem settings, and are set from the host computer. The MICRO-EH issues the AT commands automatically for initial setting. Other than this, the AT commands are not used. Refer to instruction manual or other documents furnished by modem manufacturers for details on the AT commands. In AT commands, an instruction sent to the modem from the host is called a “command,” and the character string in response to the “command” returned to the host from the modem is called a “result code.” AT commands always begin with the character string “AT,” and a return code is input at the end of the command. However, A/ is excluded. The command that follows the “AT” can have multiple inputs in a single line. Example) A T &C AT commands (1) 1 &S CD signals: Follows the carrier signals generated by the opposite device 0 DR signals: Always On P 2 CR 20 pps (pulse setting) Format 1] AT command format A 2] command parameter command parameter · · · · T Result code format CR LF CR Result code (word) Result code (number) CR LF 11-5 LF CR LF LF Chapter 11 Communication Specifications (2) List of commands (extract) 1] AT commands Command Function overview AT Automatically recognizes data format A/ Re-executes the response directly preceding ATA Forced reception ATDmm Dial ATEn Command echo (echo back a text string entered to modem) ATHn ATPn ATQn ATT ATSn = X ATVn AT&Cn AT&Dn AT&Sn AT&Rn 2] 3] Example 0: No 1: Yes Line ON/OFF 0: On hook (disconnect) 1: Off hook Pulse (dial) setting 0, 1: 10 pps 2 : 20 pps Result code setting 0: Yes 1: No Tone (push) setting Sets S register value. Result code display format 0: Number 1: Word CD signal control 0: Always on 1: Depends on the carrier of counter-party modem ER signal control 0: Always on 2: Turning from on to off during communication disconnects line 3: Turning from on to off resets the software DR signal 0: Always on 1: Depends on sequence 2: Depends on CD signal RI(CI) signal control 0: Turns on from calling start until communication begins 1: Turns on from calling start until communication ends 2: Turns on/off in synchronization with the call signal S register S register Set value S0 0 no automatic reception 1 to 255 S2 0 to 127 (43 [+] ) S3 0 to 127 (13 [CR] ) S4 0 to 127 (10 [LF] ) Result codes Number format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 Function Setting for automatic reception/reception ring count Escape code setting CR code setting LF code setting Word format OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR CONNECT 1200 NO DIAL TONE BUSY NO ANSWER CONNECT 2400 CONNECT 4800 CONNECT 9600 CONNECT 14400 Meaning Normal execution Connection complete Reception detected Line disconnected Command error 1200 bps connection Cannot hear dial tone Busy signal detected No tone heard 2400 bps connection 4800 bps connection 9600 bps connection 14400 bps connection 11-6 ATD12345678 ATE0 ATH0 ATH1 ATP0, ATP1 ATP2 ATQ0 ATT ATS0 = 0 ATV0 ATV1 AT&C0 AT&C1 AT&D0 AT&D2 AT&D3 AT&S0 AT&S1 AT&S2 AT&R0 AT&R1 AT&R2 Chapter 11 Communication Specifications (3) Sequence An example of a communication sequence using the Omron-made modem ME3314A is given below. (a) Reception sequence 2] 0 DR on Modem CR 1] ATE0Q0V0&C1&S0 MICRO-EH ER on 2 CR LF Initial setting (Note 1) CR 2 Waiting for reception CR 2 CR Modem MICRO-EH 3] Forced connection when three rings are detected 1 Modem CR 4] MICRO-EH ATA Port communication begins from here CR LF Reception complete 1] 2] 3] 4] The PLC issues the AT command that performs the initial setting of the modem. If initial setting is OK, the modem returns “0.” The PLC detects the result code “2” three times while in the reception wait state. It connects the modem. (b) Disconnect sequence 3 Modem MICRO-EH CR Port communication ends 1] Line disconnected 1] The PLC disconnects the line when the result code “3” is returned from the modem. Note 1: Since the modem initial setup sets only minimal items from the MICRO-EH side, connect a personal computer and perform necessary settings before making the connection. (Set the DR signal to always on.) Moreover, do not change the following initial settings. Contents of the initial settings Command echo: Result code: Display format of result code: None Yes Numerical format Note 2: The modem timeout (WRF03C) stored in the special internal output refers to the time from data transmission from the MICRO-EH to the data reception from the opposite station (STX, ENQ, NAK). Normally, this special internal output should be set to “0000” (default) or “H8000” (no timeout). Set the timeout only when it is especially necessary to monitor the reception time from the opposite station. When a timeout is detected, the MICRO-EH cuts off the line. When setting the timeout, set the time in the ** part of H80. The unit is * seconds (hexadecimal). Note 3: Before actually cutting off the line, issue the task code of the line cut off request (HIC--see Appendix 2, “Task code list” for details) from the host side. 11-7 Chapter 11 Communication Specifications 11.6 Connecting to the Ports The following shows some examples of connections between port 1 and 2 and peripheral units. When creating a connection cable, check it thoroughly in advance according to what the purpose of its use is. 11.6.1 Port 1 Port 1 of the MICRO-EH is a communication port that uses the RS-232C protocol as interface. It is also a dedicated port with which to perform communication by the H series dedicated procedure (high protocol). Table 11.8 lists the types of peripheral units and cables that can be connected to port 1. Peripheral unit Table 11.8 Peripheral unit connection configuration Cable CPU type 28-/23-point type EH-RS05 GPCL01H (Ladder Editor, HI-Ladder) GPCB02H 14-point type Ladder Editor (DOS version) EH-RS05 PCCB02H WPCB02H (PC9800) Ladder Editor for Windows® EH-RS05 28-/23-point type WVCB02H (DOS/V system) 14-point type EH-VCB02 (DOS/V system) EH-RS05 WVCB02H 10-point type Pro-H EH-VCB02 *1: *2: Set the DIP switches to 19.2 kbps when connecting to a GPCL01H. Adjust the DIP switch settings to the speed with which to communicate when connecting a LADDER EDITOR or Pro-H. (The speed is fixed at 4800 bps for 10-point type CPU.) 11-8 Chapter 11 Communication Specifications 11.6.2 Port 2 Port 2 of the MICRO-EH is a communication port that uses either the RS-422 or RS-485 protocol as interface. It is also a dedicated port with which to perform communication by the H series dedicated procedure (high protocol), which allows 1:n station communication. Figure 11.6 and 11.7 show examples of port 2 connections for 1:n station communication. Moreover, the connection for communicating 1:1 is performed by connecting only the first CPU in the figure below. (1) In case of RS-422 RD (-) RD (+) SD (-) SD (+) (13) SDP Host (13) SDP (12) SDN (11) RDP (10) RDN (13) SDP (12) SDN (11) RDP (10) RDN (12) SDN (11) RDP (10) RDN MICRO-EH (1st CPU) MICRO-EH (2nd CPU) MICRO-EH (32nd CPU) Figure 11.6 Connection for 1:n station communication by RS-422 (2) In case of RS-485 MICRO-EH (1st CPU) MICRO-EH (32nd CPU) Host (13) SDP RD (-) RD (+) SD (-) SD (+) (13) SDP (12) SDN (11) RDP (10) RDN (12) SDN (11) RDP Twisted pair cable A B Relay terminal block Relay terminal block Relay terminal block Figure 11.7 Connection for 1:n station communication by RS-485 11-9 (10) RDN Chapter 11 Communication Specifications MEMO 11-10 Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs 12.1 Error Codes The table below indicates the self-diagnostic error codes. (See Chapter 13, “Troubleshooting” about corrective actions.) Error codes are output as hexadecimal values to the special internal output WRF000. (This special internal output is saved during power failure, and is retained even when the causes of the error are eliminated. Also, when multiple errors occur, the most fatal error in the error classification is stored.) Note: LED examples The occurrence of a flashing pattern other than the following means a micro computer error. However, an error code is not reflected in the special internal output in this case. : ON Error code : OFF : Flashing (1 s ON, 1 s OFF) Error name [detection timing] Classifi -cation 11 System ROM error [at power ON] Fatal error 12 System RAM error [at power ON] Micro computer error [always checking] Fatal error Fatal error Reset processing in progress [at power ON] System program error [always checking] Undefined instruction [at starting RUN] 13 1F 23 27 31 33 34 41 44 45 46 Data memory error [at power ON and initializing CPU] User memory error [at power ON and during RUN] User memory size error [at starting RUN] Grammar/assemble error [at starting RUN and online change in RUN] I/O configuration error [always checking] Overload error (normal scan) [at END processing] Overload error (periodical scan) [periodical processing] Overload error (interrupt scan) [during interrupt processing] : Flashing (500 ms ON, 500 ms OFF) Description RUN LED The system ROM has a checksum error or cannot be read Error in built-in ROM/FLASH ) The system RAM cannot be read and/or written properly Address error interrupt, undefined instruction interrupt occurred in the micro computer CPU is being reset. : Flashing (250 ms ON, 250 ms OFF) OK LED Operation Stop Related special internal output Bit Word Stop Stop R7C8 Stop Stop Stop R7C9 Stop Serious A checksum error is detected in user error memory. Stop R7CA Serious error Serious error User program capacity set by the parameter is other than 280 HEX. There is a grammatical error in user program. Stop R7CC Stop R7D4 WRF001 Minor error *1 Stop *2 R7CD WRF002 *1 Stop *2 R7D1 Minor error • I/O assignment information and actual loading of module do not match • Assignment is made for expansion level 5 or greater. • There exists assignment of 5 slots or greater. Execution time for normal scan exceeded the overload check time set by the parameter. Execution time for periodical scan exceeded the execution period. *1 Stop *2 R7D2 Minor error An interrupt of the same cause occurred during interrupt scan *1 Stop *2 R7D3 Fatal error Serious error System program in FLASH memory has a checksum error Error is detected when an attempt is made to execute a user program instruction that cannot be decoded (undefined instruction) Serious Data memory cannot be read/written error properly. Minor error 12-1 Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs Error code 5F 61 62 63 64 65 67 68 69 6A 6B 71 *3 72 *4 94 *1: *2: *3: *4: Error name [detection timing] Backup memory error [at program downloading and special I/O function setting is requested] Port 1 transmission error (parity) [when transmitting] Port 1 transmission error (framing/overrun) [when transmitting] Port 1 transmission error (time out) [when transmitting] Port 1 transmission error (protocol error) [when transmitting] Port 1 transmission error (BCC error) [when transmitting] Port 2 transmission error (parity) [when transmitting] Port 2 transmission error (framing/overrun) [when transmitting] Port 2 transmission error (time out) [when transmitting] Port 2 transmission error (protocol error) [when transmitting] Port 2 transmission error (BCC error) [when transmitting] Battery error (data memory) [always checking] Instantaneous power failure detection [always checking] Port 1 No modem response [when modem is connected] Classifi -cation Description RUN LED OK LED Operation Related special internal output Bit Word Warning Data cannot be written to the backup memory. *1 Run Warning Parity error was detected during transmission. *1 Run Warning Framing error or overrun error was detected during transmission. *1 Run Warning Time out error was detected during transmission. *1 Run Warning Protocol (transmission procedure) error was detected during transmission. *1 Runs Warning Checksum error was detected during transmission. *1 Run Warning Parity error was detected during transmission. *1 Run Warning Framing error or overrun error was detected during transmission. *1 Run Warning Time out error was detected during transmission. *1 Run Warning Protocol (transmission procedure) error was detected during transmission. *1 Run Warning Checksum error was detected during transmission. *1 Run Warning • Battery voltage dropped below the specified value • Battery not installed Warning Instantaneous power failure detected. *1 Run R7D9 *1 Run R7CF R7DA Warning There is no response with the AT command. *1 Run Depends on the CPU’s operating state. The RUN LED is lit while the CPU is in operation; the RUN LED is unlit while the CPU is not in operation. Depending on the settings of the operating parameters from the peripherals, the operation may be continued even when an error occurs. Although batteries cannot be mounted on the 10- or 14-point type, battery errors are monitored by the system. Set R7EE to OFF prior to the use. Supported by software version 1.11 (WRF051=H0111) or newer. How to Clear the CPU Error Code: Set 1 to the Special Internal Output R7EC. 12-2 Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs 12.2 Syntax and Assembler Error Codes The following describes the syntax and Assembler error codes. The error codes are output as hexadecimal values to the internal output WRF001. The syntax and Assembler error checks are performed at the time of RUN startup. Error code H0001 H0002 H0003 H0004 H0005 H0010 H0011 H0012 H0013 H0014 H0020 H0021 H0022 H0023 H0030 H0031 H0032 Error item Duplicate definition of LBL Duplicate definition of FOR Duplicate definition of NEXT Description of error There are 2 or more LBL instructions with the same number in the program There are 2 or more FOR instructions with the same number in the program There are 2 or more NEXT instructions with the same number in the program Corrective action Limit the LBL instruction that has 2 or more of the same number to 1. Limit the FOR instruction that has 2 or more of the same number to 1. Limit the NEXT instruction that has 2 or more of the same number to 1. Duplicate definition of There are 2 or more SB instructions with the same Limit the SB instruction that has 2 SB number in the program or more of the same number to 1. Duplicate definition of There are 2 or more INT instructions with the Limit the INT instruction that has INT same number in the program 2 or more of the same number to 1. END undefined There is no END instruction prior to the INT or Define the END instruction before SB instructions the INT or SB instruction. RTS undefined There is no RTS instruction corresponding to the Define the RTS instruction after SB instruction the SB instruction. RTI undefined There is no RTI instruction corresponding to the Define the RTI instruction after the INT instruction INT instruction. SB undefined There is no SB instruction corresponding to the Define the SB instruction before RTS instruction the RTS instruction. INT undefined There is no INT instruction corresponding to the Define the INT instruction before RTI instruction the RTI instruction. RTS area error There is the RTS instruction in the normal scan Define the RTS instruction within area or interrupt scan program area the subroutine area. RTI area error There is the RTI instruction in the normal scan Define the RTI instruction within area or subroutine program area the interrupt scan area. END area error There is the END instruction in the interrupt scan Define the END instruction at the program area or subroutine program area end of the normal scan area. CEND area error There is the CEND instruction in the interrupt Define the CEND instruction scan program area or subroutine program area within the normal scan area. RTS start condition error There is a startup condition in the processing box Delete the startup condition of the that includes the RTS instruction processing box. RTI start condition error There is a startup condition in the processing box Delete the startup condition of the that includes the RTI instruction processing box. END start condition error There is a startup condition in the processing box Delete the startup condition of the that includes the END instruction processing box. Syntax and Assembler error checks by the task code The undefined contents of the syntax, Assembler and operation error codes will be checked. However, error codes will not be set in WRF001 12-3 Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs 12.3 Operation Error Codes If an error occurs when a control instruction is executed, “1” is set in the operation error (ERR) special internal output “R7F3” and an error code (hexadecimal) indicating the description of the error is set in WRF015. To clear the operation errors to zeros, execute “R7F3=0” using a forced setting from a program or peripheral unit. To clear the error codes to zeros, execute “WRF015=0” using a forced setting from a program or peripheral unit. Error code Error name H0013 SB undefined H0015 LBL undefined H0016 FOR undefined H0017 NEXT undefined H0040 LBL area error H0041 H0042 CAL nesting overflow CAL undefined H0043 FOR to NEXT error H0044 NEXT area error H0045 FOR to NEXT nesting overflow FOR nesting overflow H0046 Description of error Originating instruction CAL SBn instruction corresponding to the instruction number n in the CALn instruction is not programmed LBLn instruction corresponding to the instruction number n in the JMPn and CJMPn instructions is not programmed FORn instruction corresponding to the instruction number n in the NEXTn instruction is not programmed NEXTn instruction corresponding to the instruction number n in the FORn instruction is not programmed LBLn instruction corresponding to the instruction number n in the JMPn and CJMPn instructions is not programmed in the same program area There are more than 6 levels of subroutine nesting RTS instruction was executed without executing the CAL instruction There is a NEXTn with the same instruction number n prior to the FORn instruction There is no NEXTn instruction with the same instruction number n as the FORn instruction in the same program area The FORn and NEXTn instructions are not nested FOR There are more than 6 nesting levels of FOR to NEXT FOR NEXT 12-4 JMP CJMP NEXT FOR JMP CJMP CAL RTS FOR FOR Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs 12.4 Bit Special Internal Output Area The MICRO-EH has a special internal output area for performing status display and various other settings. The special internal output area is constantly backed up in case of power failure. The following lists the definitions of the bit special internal output area (R7C0 to R7FF). No. Name Meaning R7C0 Ignore scan time error (normal scan) R7C1 Ignore scan time error (cyclic scan) R7C2 Ignore scan time error (interrupt scan) 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: R7C3 R7C4 R7C5 R7C6 R7C7 Do not use. Do not use. Do not use. Do not use. 0: On line changed not allowed. 1: On line changed allowed. 0: Normal 1: Abnormal Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined On line change in RUN R7C8 Serious error flag Stop operation Continue operation Stop operation Continue operation Stop operation Continue operation R7C9 Microcomputer error 0: Normal 1: Abnormal R7CA User memory error 0: Normal 1: Abnormal Do not use. 0: Normal 1: Abnormal R7CB Undefined R7CC Memory size over Description Designates continue/stop running when a normal scan overload error occurs Designates continue/stop running when Set by user a periodic-scan overload error occurs Designates continue/stop running when an interrupt-scan overload error occurs Designates whether online change in RUN is allowed in user program Indicates whether there is an abnormal in the microcomputer (Address error, undefined instruction) Indicates whether there is an abnormal in the microcomputer (Computation error) Indicates whether there is an abnormal in user memory Indicates whether the capacity set by the parameter exceeds loaded memory capacity Indicates whether I/O assignment and loading are matched (Mismatched information output to WRF002) R7CD I/O configuration error 0: Normal 1: Unmatched R7CE Undefined R7CF Operation mode for *1 instantaneous power failure Do not use. 0: Hold 1: Reset (same start up operation as normal power on.) R7D0 Undefined R7D1 Scan time error (normal scan) Do not use. 0: Normal 1: Scan time over R7D2 Scan time error (cyclic scan) R7D3 Scan time error (interrupt scan) 0: 1: 0: 1: R7D4 Grammar/assemble error 0: Normal 1: Error Normal Scan time over Normal Scan time over R7D5 Blown fuse detection 0: Normal 1: Error Setting condition Indicates whether the normal scan execution time has exceeded the designated time Indicates whether the periodic scan was completed within cycle time Indicates whether an interrupt of the same factor occurred during interrupt scan execution. Indicates whether there is a grammar error in user program (Detailed information output to WRF001) Indicates whether or not a fuse connected to the second pin (see Chapter 11) of serial port 1 has blown out. R7D6 Undefined Do not use. *1: Supported by software version 1.11 (WRF051=H0111) or newer. 12-5 Resetting condition Cleared by user, Cleared when retentive area is cleared, or the CPU is initialized. Set by user Set by the system Cleared by user, Cleared when retentive area is cleared, or the CPU is initialized. Set by the system Cleared by user, Cleared when retentive area is cleared, or the CPU is initialized. Set by the system Cleared by user, Cleared when retentive area is cleared, or the CPU is initialized. Set by the system Cleared by user, Cleared when retentive area is cleared, or the CPU is initialized. Set by the system Cleared by the system Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs No. Name R7D7 Undefined R7D8 Undefined R7D9 Battery error R7DA Instantaneous power *1 failure detection R7DB Self-diagnostic error R7DC Output mode R7DD R7DE R7DF R7E0 Undefined Undefined Undefined Key switch location (STOP) R7E1 Undefined R7E2 Key switch location (RUN) R7E3 1st scan ON after RUN R7E4 Always ON R7E5 R7E6 R7E7 R7E8 R7E9 R7EA *1: *2: 0.02 second clock 0.1 second clock 1.0 second clock CPU Occupation RUN prohibited Executing a online change in RUN Meaning Description Do not use. Do not use. 0: Normal Indicates whether battery voltage is 1: Abnormal low 0: Not detected 1: Instantaneous power failure detected. Indicates whether there is a self0: Normal diagnostic error (Detailed information 1: Error output to WRF000) Operation mode at CPU stop for PWM 0: Stops output output, pulse output and counter 1: Continues output coincidence output. Do not use. Do not use. Do not use. 0: at RUN position 1: at STOP position Do not use. 0: at STOP position 1: at RUN position st ON only at the 1 scan. 1: Always Always ON regardless of CPU status 1: Being executed Set by the system Set by the system Resetting condition Cleared by the system *2 Set by user Cleared by user, Cleared when retentive area is cleared, or the CPU is initialized. Set by the system Cleared by the system Set by the system Cleared by the system st 1: 1 scan after RUN 0: 0.01 seconds 1: 0.01 seconds 0: 0.05 seconds 1: 0.05 seconds 0: 0.5 seconds 1: 0.5 seconds 0: Unoccupied 1: Occupied 0: Operation allowed 1: Operation prohibited Setting condition Cannot be cleared. Set by the system Indicates CPU occupation status from the peripheral unit Indicates whether it is operation prohibited status Indicates whether operation is temporarily stopped (output hold) due to online change in RUN Supported by software version 1.11 (WRF051=H0111) or newer. The battery error (R7D9) will turn off when the error cause is eliminated by replacing the battery, etc. 12-6 Cleared by the system Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs No. Name R7EB R7EC R7ED R7EE Clear retentive area Clear error code Undefined Battery error detection enable/disable R7EF Backup memory writing execution flag R7F0 Carry flag (CY) R7F1 Overflow flag (V) R7F2 Shift data (SD) R7F3 Operation error (ERR) R7F4 Data error (DER) R7F5 Special I/O function setting flag R7F6 Special I/O parameters to write in FLASH *4 R7F7 Special I/O parameter error R7F8 Calendar, clock read request R7F9 Calendar, clock setting request R7FA Clock ± 30 second adjustment request R7FB Calendar and clock set data error R7FC Output control 1 R7FD Output control 2 R7FE Output control 3 R7FF Output control 4 *3: *4: Meaning Description 1: Clear retentive area 1: Clear error code in WRF000 to F00A, R7C8 to 7DE Do not use. 1: Detection enabled Be sure to set if battery is used. 0: Detection disabled Setting condition Set by user Resetting condition Cleared by the system Set by user Cleared by user, or when retentive area is cleared, or the CPU is initialized. Set by the system *3 Cleared by the system Set by user Cleared by user 1: Being written 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 1: No carry Carry No overflow Overflow Shift data “0” Shift data “1” Normal Error Normal Error Request to set Indicates whether there is a carryover from the operation result Indicates whether there is overflow in the operation result Designates the shift data used in shift instructions, etc. Indicates whether there is an operation error when operation is executed Indicates whether there is a data error when operation is being executed. For counter, PWM and pulse train Set by the system 1: Request to write For counter, PWM and pulse train Set by user 0: Normal 1: Error 1: Request to read Indicates the results of the special I/O parameter settings. Read the present values of calendar, clock and set in WRF01B to WRF01F Set the data set in WRF01B to WRF01F in the calendar and clock When second data (WRF00F) is 0 to 29, it becomes 0 seconds and when it is 30 to 59, +1 minute is added and second data becomes 0 Indicates whether there is an error in calendar and clock set data Sets the enabling and disabling when Y100 through Y103 is used as PWM output, pulse output, and counter coincidence output. Set by the system 1: Request to write 1: Request adjustment 0: 1: 0: 1: Normal Error Output disabled Output enabled Cleared by the system Set by user Set by the system Set by user Cleared by user (Cleared by the system in case of pulse output) Cleared by system even when Set by user. The word special internal output that can be written using this function is shown in Table 12.1 on the following page. 12-7 Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Table 12.1 List of special internal outputs that can be stored Special internal output Function that can be stored WRF01A Dedicated port 1 Communication settings WRF03C Dedicated port 1 Modem timeout time WRF03D Dedicated port 2 Communication settings WRF06B Pulse and PWM auto correction setting WRF06C Potentiometer 1 Filtering time WRF06D Potentiometer 2 Filtering time WRF06E Analog input type selection WRF06F Phase counting mode WRF070 I/O operation mode WRF071 I/O detailed function settings WRF072 Output frequency On-preset value WRF073 WRF074 WRF075 WRF076 On-duty value Off-preset value WRF077 WRF078 WRF079 WRF07A Pre-load value Pulse output value WRF07B WRF07C WRF07D WRF07E Input edge WRF07F Input filtering time 12-8 Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs 12.5 Word Special Internal Output Area The following lists the definitions of the word special internal output area (WRF000 to WRF1FF). Setting No. Name Storage data Description condition WRF000 Self-diagnosis error Error code code (Hexadecimal) WRF001 Syntax/Assembler Syntax/Assembler error Error code for user program error details code (Hexadecimal) Syntax/Assembler error is stored WRF002 Further information Set by the Mismatched slot number system of I/O configuration 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 error 0 a b 0 Resetting condition Cleared by user a: Unit number (0 to 5) b: Slot number (0 to F) WRF003 -F00A WRF00B WRF00C WRF00D WRF00E WRF00F WRF010 Undefined Do not use. Calendar and clock present value (4 digit BCD) Year Month / date Day of the week Hour / minute Seconds Max. scan time × 10 ms Scan time (maximum value) WRF011 Scan time (present value) WRF012 Scan time (minimum value) WRF013 CPU status 4 digit year [yyyy] [mm dd] Sunday: 0000 to Saturday: 0006 [hh mm] (24-hour system) [00 ss] Min. scan time × 10 ms. (HFFFF at 1st scan) 8 Unused WRF015 WRF016 WRF017 capacity Operation error code Division remainder register (low word) Division remainder register (high word) Undefined WRF018F019 WRF01A Setting of Com. port 1 Reading or writing register for calendar and clock (4 digit BCD) Use with R7F8 or R7F9 WRF020 Undefined to F03B 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 b c d e f g h i Set by the system Cleared by user Remainder data when division instruction executed (Used only at double word operation) Do not use. b c 8 7 d Always displayed Always displayed Operation error code Remainder data when division instruction executed a WRF01B WRF01C WRF01D WRF01E WRF01F a 7 a: CPU type (0011), b: Battery error (1=error, 0=no error), c: Not used, d-g: Not used (Fixed to 0), h: Halt (1=executing, 0=not executing), i: CPU operation (1=RUN, 0=STOP) Number of words for word internal output (WR) = H1000 15 14 13 12 Always displayed Cleared by the system (in the RUN starts) Current scan time × 10 ms 15 14 13 12 11 WRF014 Word internal output Set by the system 0 Unused a: Transmission control procedures (0- Standard, 1-Simplified) b-c: Not used d: Baud rate during modem connection = 00000: 4800 bps, = 00001: 9600 bps, = 00010: 19.2 kbps = 00011: 38.4 kbps, = 00100: 57.6 kbps, = 00101: 2400 bps = 4800 bps for other than the above Year 4 digit year [yyyy] Month / date [mm dd] Day of the week Sunday: 0000 to Saturday: 0006 Hour / minute [hh mm] (24-hour system) Seconds [00 ss] Do not use. 12-9 Set by user Cleared by user Set by system or user Cleared by user Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs No. Name Storage data Setting condition Description Resetting condition WRF03C Port 1 Modem timeout time 15 8 a 7 0 Not used Modem timeout time a: Whether or not settings are present 0=No setting 1=Setting is present Modem timeout time: 1 second increments (set with hexadecimal value) 0=No timeout monitoring Set by user Cleared by user Set by user Cleared by user WRF03D Port 2 Communication settings 15 14 13 12 a b 8 c 7 0 d Station number a: Setting bit 1=Set Set to 0 by the system after setting is complete. b: Transmission control procedures 0=Standard, 1=Simplified c: Whether or not station numbers are present 0=No station numbers, 1=Station numbers are present d: Baud rate settings = 00000: 4800 bps, = 00001: 9600 bps, = 00010: 19.2 kbps = 00011: 38.4 kbps, = 4800 bps if other than the above Station numbers: 2 digits from 00 through 31 of BCD Set to 31 for values outside the range WRF03E Potentiometer input 1 0 - 1023 WRF03F Potentiometer input 2 0 - 1023 WRF040 Occupied member to F042 registration area 1 WRF043 Occupied member to F045 registration area 2 Set by user Cleared by user Cleared by user Occupied port number a: 0=Not occupied, 1=Read-occupied, 2=Write-occupied b: Loop number c: Unit number d: Module number e: Port number 15 WRF046 Occupied member to F048 registration area 3 WRF049 Occupied member to F04B registration area 4 WRF04C to F04F WRF050 WRF051 WRF052 WRF053 WRF054 WRF055 WRF057 Set by user 8 7 0 a Fixed to 0 b c d e Undefined Do not use. System ROM version System ROM version Undefined Undefined Power on timer Power on timer Detailed information of counter setting errors System software version in internal ROM System software version in external FLASH memory Do not use. Do not use. Power on time [sec.] (low word) Power on time [sec.] (high word) 15 14 a 8 Not used 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 b c d e f g h i a: Error in pulse frequency total b: Pulse 4 frequency c: Pulse 3 frequency d: Pulse 2 frequency e: Pulse 1 frequency f: Counter 4 preset g: Counter 3 preset h: Counter 2 preset i: Counter 1 preset 0=Normal, 1=Error 12-10 Set by the system Cleared by the system Set by the system - Set by the system - Set by the system Cleared by the system Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs No. Name Stored data Setting condition Description Resetting condition WRF057 Detailed information of counter setting errors 15 14 a 8 Not used 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 b c d e f g h i a: Error in pulse frequency total b: Pulse 4 frequency c: Pulse 3 frequency d: Pulse 2 frequency e: Pulse 1 frequency f: Counter 4 preset g: Counter 3 preset h: Counter 2 preset i: Counter 1 preset 0=Normal, 1=Error Set by the system Cleared by the system Set by user Cleared by the system Set by user Cleared by the system Set by user Cleared by the system Set by user Cleared by the system WRF058 PI/O function individual setting request 1 * 15 2 Not used 1 0 a b a: Output number (during pulse setting) Off-preset (during counter setting) b: On-preset (during counter setting) Frequency (during pulse setting), frequency, on-duty (during PWM setting) 0=No changes, 1=Change request WRF059 PI/O function individual setting request 2 * 15 2 Not used 1 0 a b a: Output number (during pulse setting) Off-preset (during counter setting) b: On-preset (during counter setting) Frequency (during pulse setting), frequency, on-duty (during PWM setting) 0=No changes, 1=Change request WRF05A PI/O function individual setting request 3 * 15 2 Not used 1 0 a b a: Output number (during pulse setting) Off-preset (during counter setting) b: On-preset (during counter setting) Frequency (during pulse setting), frequency, on-duty (during PWM setting) 0=No changes, 1=Change request WRF05B PI/O function individual setting request 4 * 15 2 Not used WRF05D Undefined to F06A 1 0 a b a: Output number (during pulse setting) Off-preset (during counter setting) b: On-preset (during counter setting) Frequency (during pulse setting), frequency, on-duty (during PWM setting) 0=No changes, 1=Change request Do not use. 12-11 Chapter 12 Error Code List and Special Internal Outputs No. Name WRF06B Pulse and PWM output auto correction setting WRF06C Potentiometer CH1 WRF06D Potentiometer CH2 WRF06E Analog input type selection Stored data WRF070 WRF071 WRF072 to F075 WRF076 to F079 WRF07A to F07D WRF07E WRF07F WRF080 to F19F *: Resetting condition 01: For EH-***DTP The output waveforms of the pulses and 02: For EH-***DT PWM are automatically corrected by 03: For EH-***DRP setting the value corresponding to the 04: For EH-***DRT CPU model. Sampling number: 0 to 40. 15 14 13 a WRF06F Setting condition Description b 0 Not used Selects whether the analog input is voltage or current. a: Analog 1 selection 0=Voltage 1=Current b: Analog 2 selection 0=Voltage 1=Current Counting mode of 00: Mode 0 01: Mode 1 2-phase counter 02: Mode 2 03: Mode 3 I/O operation mode H00: Mode 0 H01: Mode 1 H02: Mode 2 H03: Mode 3 H10: Mode 10 I/O detailed function I/O assignment for counter, PWM and pulse train output settings Output frequency, Frequency setting value, on-preset setting value On-preset value On-duty value, On-duty setting value, off-preset setting value Off-preset value Pre-load value, Counter pre-load value or pulse output value Pulse output value Input edge Counter input edge setting value Input filtering time Filter time ×0.5 ms, up to 40 (=20ms) Undefined Do not use. See Chapter 8 for more details. 12-12 Set by user Cleared by user Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13.1 Error Display and Actions The display locations of errors detected by individual device in the MICRO-EH system are shown in Figure 13.1. When an error occurs, take an action according to the error code list. LADDER EDITOR POW OK RUN OK Lamp L/E error display LADDER EDITOR for Windows® L/E for Windows® error display Figure 13.1 Error display locations of the MICRO-EH (1) Error display (a) Error display on the main unit The MICRO-EH will perform self-diagnostic tests using the microcomputer, and when there is an error the contents are indicated in the combination of lit/flashing/not lit of the OK and RUN lamps located in the front of the main unit. See the error code list and action in Chapter 12, for the detailed error codes and actions. (b) Programmer error display Error codes encountered during program device operation, such as duplicate definition error, undefined error, operation error, program over, etc., will be displayed on the programming device. For detailed error codes, refer to the error code list in the programming device manual. (c) GPCL error display The error detected by the CPU during the GPCL operation is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. For the details of error codes, see the list of error codes in the GPCL manual. (d) Setting in the special internal output An error code is set in the special internal output area (such as WRF000). The smaller the error code value, the more serious the error is. When two or more errors occur, the smaller number is set. For example, if “71” (battery error) and “31” (user memory error) occur simultaneously, “31” is set. If the levels are the same, the cause code generated last will be displayed. The clearing of error special internal output is performed by setting the special internal output R7EC to “1.” The R7EC can be set to “1” either by connecting the programming device or by including a subprogram that sets the R7EC using external input within the program. (If turning R7EC on by the program, always set it on after the error cause has been verified. However, if R7EC is turned on by a program that would generate a congestion error, the system may clear the error cause and rerun after detecting a congestion error.) Note: Error codes are set in hexadecimal values. Verify error codes by setting the monitor to hexadecimal display. 13-1 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting The following shows the range of the special internal output that is cleared when R7EC is set to “1.” No. Bit special internal output R7C8 Fatal error flag 9 Microcomputer error A User memory error B (Undefined) C Memory size over D I/O verify mismatch E (Undefined) R7CF (Undefined) R7D0 (Undefined) 1 Congestion error (normal scan) 2 Congestion error (periodical scan) 3 Congestion error (interrupt scan) 4 Syntax/assembler error 5 (Undefined) 6 (Undefined) 7 (Undefined) 8 (Undefined) 9 Battery error A (Undefined) R7DB Self-diagnostic error No. Word special internal output WRF000 Self-diagnostic error code 1 Syntax/assembler error details 2 I/O verify mismatch details When all of the special internal output data cannot be cleared during program execution, refer to the selfdiagnostic error code list and clear only the corresponding error flags by using forced set of the programmer or peripheral unit. Caution If the internal output for a self-diagnostic error R7DB (WRF000) is used as a system error for the stop condition of CPU RUN, the R7DB may be turned on even with an error of the warning level (battery error, etc.), causing the CPU to stop. Therefore, do not use the internal output of the self-diagnostic error as a condition for stopping the CPU. 13-2 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting (2) Corrective actions when an error occurred The process flow when an error occurred is shown below. Error occurred Error is detected by the CPU module and displayed by lit/flashing/not lit of RUN and OK LEDs. Verify the self-diagnostic error code (WRF000) with the RUN and OK LED statuses or using a peripheral unitand refer to error code list. Reference the bit special internal output (14-1). Reference the word special internal output (14-2). Reference the grammar/ assemble error (WRF001) detailed data (13-2) and remove the error cause. Reference the operation error (WRF015) detailed data (13-3) and remove the error cause. Remove the error cause according to the corrective action for each error code as shown below. If there are spare parts available, replace the parts. Error code 11 12 13 1F 23 27 31 33 34 41 44 45 46 5F Error name System ROM error System RAM error Microcomputer error System program error Contact our service department. Corrective action Restart the power. If the same error occurs, it is a hardware error in the CPU module, so replace the CPU module with a spare. Make sure that there are no machines, etc. that generate excessive noise near MCRO-EH. Undefined instruction Note: The 1x error cannot be verified since peripheral units cannot be connected until the Data memory error system starts up after powering on again. Power shut-off, power Check the power supply voltage of the basic unit and expansion unit. supply error User memory error The contents of the user program is destroyed. Perform initialization and transfer the program again. This is displayed when the machine is stored with a worn-out battery or without battery for a long period of time. User memory size This may be displayed when the contents of the memory within the basic unit is unstable. error If the same error occurs after initialization, replace the basic unit with a new one. Syntax/assembler There is a syntax/assembler error in the user program. error Verify the program and I/O assignment. I/O information Check the I/O assignment. verification error Check the expansion cable connection. Congestion error Change the program so that the scan time of the user program is less or change the congestion (normal scan) check time. Congestion error Change the program so that the periodic interrupt program execution time is less. (periodic scan) Congestion error Perform interlock externally to that the same interrupt will not occur during interrupt (interrupt scan) processing. Change the program so that the execution time of the interrupt program is short. Backup memory error There is a possibility that the FLASH memory cannot be written to. Reset the power after the user program is read and saved to the peripheral units. 13-3 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Error code Error name 61 Port 1 transmission error (parity) 62 Port 1 transmission error (framing/overrun) 63 Port 1 transmission error (timeout) 64 Port 1 transmission error (protocol error) 65 Port 1 transmission error (BCC error) 67 Port 2 transmission error (parity) 68 Port 2 transmission error (framing/overrun) 69 Port 2 transmission error (timeout) 6A Port 2 transmission error (protocol error) 6B Port 2 transmission error (BCC error) 71 Battery error 91 Port 1 Modem no response Corrective action Check the connection of the connector cable. Check the settings such as the transmission speed. Check to see if there are any sources of noise near the cable. Check the connection of the connector cable. Check to see if there are any sources of noise near the cable. Verify the protocol specification, examine the host computer processing and correct any errors. Check the connection of the connector cable. Check the settings such as the transmission speed. Check to see if there are any sources of noise near the cable. Check the connection of the connector cable. Check to see if there are any sources of noise near the cable. Verify the protocol specification, examine the host computer processing and correct any errors. Replace the battery with a new one. Verify the connection of the battery connector. Verify the connection with battery. Replace the modem with a new one. Perform the following procedures to erase the error display. (a) (b) When the basic unit is being stopped Turn the basic unit RUN switch (or RUN terminal) to “STOP,” then to “RUN” again. If the cause of the error has been corrected, the OK lamp is lit. However, the error information remains in the error special internal output, which stores the CPU error types and details. (This makes it possible to analyze the error after recovery.) To reset the error information, perform the procedures shown in (b) or turn ON the special internal output (R7EB) of the power failure memory clear on the peripheral units. When the CPU is still running (RUN) Set the special internal output R7EC to “1” to clear the OK lamp indicator and the error internal output. 13-4 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13.2 Checklist when Abnormality Occurred If an error occurs in the MICRO-EH system, check the following items. If there are no problems in the following items, contact our service department. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Power supply related items • Is the power voltage correct? (85 to 264 V AC) • Are there any warps in the power supply waveform? • Are there any excessive noises in the power supply? • Is power supplied for all basic and expansion units? CPU related items • Are the initial settings (CPU initialization, I/O assignment, parameter settings, etc.) proper? • Are there any error codes that are output to the special internal output? • Is the RUN switch (or RUN terminal) in the proper location? • Are batteries mounted properly? Is the battery life still remaining? (23/28-point types only) Input module related items • Is the input voltage within the specifications for the internal section? • Is there any noise or chattering in the input? • Do the I/O assignment numbers in the program match? • Is the wiring done properly? Output module related items • Do the module and the load power supply type (DC/AC) match? • Do the load voltage and current match the specification of the output section? • Is there any noise or chattering in the output waveform? • Is the wiring done properly? • Do the I/O assignment numbers in the program match? • Are there any unintentional overlaps in the output numbers? Wiring related items • Is the wiring between the expansions mixed up with other wires? • Are the power supply wiring and I/O cables separated? • Are there any foreign substances in the connector of the basic/expansion units? Cautions (a) When returning the unit for repair, please notify us of the malfunctioning conditions in as much detail as possible (including error codes, malfunctioning I/O bit number, will not turn on or off, etc.). (b) The tools and devices necessary for troubleshooting are briefly as follows: Phillips/flathead drivers, digital multimeter, tester, oscilloscope (necessary depending on the case) etc. 13-5 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13.3 Procedures to Solve Abnormality The following shows the processing flow when a problem has occurred: Problem occurred Bring the system to a safe condition Record the status Problem, Analysis, Presumption Major problems PLC will not start Will not operate (will not RUN) Operation stopped (RUN stopped) Erroneous input, no input (abnormal operation) Counter input does not operate Output error, no output (abnormal operation) PWM pulse output does not operate Peripheral unit problem Verification points Power LED, CPU error code Typical causes of problem Power supply problem, power shut-off, insufficient power supply capacity, fatal CPU error I/O assignment problem, incorrect parameter CPU error code, CPU settings, incorrect user program, syntax error, LED, Internal output of operating conditions not established, writeerror occupied status Power LED, CPU LED, Power supply problem, expansion power supply CPU error code problem/shut-off, CPU problem, memory problem User program timings, input power supply, bad CPU LED, I/O LED Monitoring by peripheral connection, problem in input area, I/O inductive noise units Input LED, special Input power supply, bad connection, problem in internal output setting input area, I/O inductive noise, operating mode setting error User programming, bad connection, problem in CPU LED, I/O LED, Monitoring by peripheral output area, I/O inductive noise units, Forced setting Output LED, special Bad connection, problem in output area, I/O internal output setting inductive noise, operating mode setting error CPU error code, fuse, Fatal CPU error, peripheral unit problem, peripheral units peripheral unit setting error, cable problem, broken fuse Correct or replace the faulty area (Verify according to the item corresponding to the problem.) Verify the system operation Operation 13-6 Reference item (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) Chapter 13 Troubleshooting (a) PLC will not start The CPU OK LED does not turn off even when power is started, nor peripheral units cannot be connected on-line. POWER LED is lit NO YES Power supply check AC power supply type • AC power supply voltage (at the input terminal) • DC power supply voltage (at the output terminal) DC power supply type • DC power supply voltage (at the input terminal) • DC power supply voltage (at the output terminal) Fitting between terminal stand and main unit Self-diagnostic error code 11 12 NO 13 1F Fatal CPU error YES Occur frequently? There is a possibility of power supply area damage YES NO Contact our service department Malfunction due to noise 13-7 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting (b) Will not operate (will not run) Even if the PLC operation conditions are met, the CPU does not operate (the RUN LED does not turn on) and remains stopped. However, the peripheral units go on-line. Caution If the CPU is WRITE-occupied, the CPU will not run even if the RUN switch is switched from “STOP” to “RUN.” The CPU starts running by pressing the GRS key after peripheral units are connected. Self-diagnostic error code 27 31 YES 33 Serious memory error Check the memory Perform CPU initialization Set memory parameters Reset the power Replace CPU if above steps does not remedy the problem NO Self-diagnostic error code 23 34 44 YES 45 Serious user program error NO Check the user program • Check programs using peripheral devices • Error special internal output monitor • Verify scan time • Correct program Check I/O assignments • Check the assignment table at peripheral devices • Can I/O assignment be corrected? • Malfunction due to noise 13-8 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting (c) Operation stopped (RUN stopped) During normal operation, the CPU suddenly stops (the RUN LED turns off). POWER LED is lit (Power supply is normal) NO YES Check the power supply • Instantaneous power failure occurs • Power is shut off on the expansion unit side Self-diagnostic error code 11 12 YES 13 1F Fatal CPU error NO Turn the power off and turn it back on Check the program Check parameters Check I/O assignment Contact our service department if a fatal error occurs frequently Parameter settings Program congestion Check I/O assignment Duplicate use of the timer counter • Retransfer of program • Connection with the expansion connector • • • • 13-9 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting (d) Wrong input at input module or no input (operation problem) The CPU runs, but the input data is not correct. Input LED is not lit Input is not read YES NO Input LED is lit Input is not read • • • • Check input signals Input signal voltage Input power supply type Cable disconnection High-speed pulse is entered in a normal input • • • • Check input monitor I/O assignment Program Input signal voltage YES Check input signals NO Input LED is not lit Input is read YES NO LED error ∗ LED replacement may not be performed by the user, so a repair request must be submitted. Check for input error Check input signal source • • Check input program • Malfunction due to noise 13-10 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Data cannot be entered. Is there a wiring error, disconnection or loose screw on the terminal block? YES Perform rewiring NO Is there input when the voltage is checked between the common and bit on the input side? NO Check the wiring systems Change the voltage to satisfy the specifications YES Is the LED lit? NO Contact our service department YES Is there an error on the internal contactors on the terminal stand? YES Replace the terminal block NO Contact our service department I/O assignment error is generated, but data is read. Are the program and I/O assignment correct? NO Correct the error YES Is the cable in the expansion unit damaged? NO Replace the expansion unit YES Replace the expansion cable 13-11 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting (e) The counter input does not function The CPU operates, but the input data is incorrect Does it operate as normal input? NO Check the input area • Check the input signal source • Malfunction due to noise • Cable is disconnected YES Are pulses that exceed 5 kHz being input? YES Set the pulse input to 5kHz or less NO Are the operating mode settings correct? NO Set the operating mode for the peripheral devices Note: The operating mode can only be changed while the CPU is being stopped YES Are the I/O function settings correct? NO Set the I/O functions on devices such as peripheral devices YES Are the various settings valid? NO Turn on the setting enabling request flag ON using peripheral devices YES Check the input area Check the input pulse • • Malfunction due to noise 13-12 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting (f) Wrong output from output module or output module will not output (operation problem) The CPU operates, but output signals are not correct. Output LED is not lit Will not output YES NO Output LED is lit Will not output Check the output area Forced output • • I/O assignment • Program YES NO Check output signals Output signal voltage Power supply voltage for load Terminal block wiring Terminal block connector connection • Voltage between the common and the bit • Wiring Especially for the S terminal on the transistor • The drive power supply for the relay is not connected • • • • Output LED is not lit Will output YES NO LED error ∗ LED replacement may not be performed by the user, so a repair request must be submitted Check for output error • Check the output power supply • Check the output program • Malfunction due to noise 13-13 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting The CPU operates, but output signals are not detected. Is the LED lit? NO Check the program YES Is there a wiring error, disconnection or loose screw on the terminal block? YES Perform rewiring NO Is the relay drive power supply connected? NO Supply 24 VDC power YES Is the voltage satisfying the specification in the terminal block? Is the polarity correct? NO Change the voltage and polarity to satisfy the specifications YES Are there any problem in internal contactors of the terminal block? YES Replace the terminal block NO Contact our service department I/O assignment error occurred, but output is normal. Are the program and I/O assignment correct? NO Correct the error YES Is the expansion unit cable damaged? YES Replace the expansion unit NO Replace the expansion cable 13-14 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting (g) The PWM and pulse output does not operate The CPU operates, but the pulse output and PWM output are not correct Does it operate as normal output? NO Check the output area • Output signal voltage • Power supply voltage for the load • Terminal stand wiring • Terminal stand connection • Voltage between the common and bit • Wiring Especially for the S terminal on the transistor YES Pulse is output using the relay output YES The expected pulse output from the relay is not output NO Are the operating mode settings correct? NO Set the operating mode for the peripheral devices Note:The operating mode can only be changed while the CPU is being stopped YES Are the I/O function settings correct? NO Set the I/O functions on devices such as peripheral devices YES Are the various settings valid? NO Turn on the setting enabling request flag ON using peripheral devices YES Is the backup memory being written? *1 YES Wait until the write to the backup memory is completed. NO The total pulse output exceeds 5kHz? *1 Pulse output only. YES Set the pulse input to be a total of 5 kHz or less* NO * Pulse output only. 2 kHz is the upper Check the output area limit for PWM output. • Check the output power supply • Malfunction due to noise 13-15 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting (h) Peripheral units problem Peripheral units cannot be connected. Is it a fatal CPU error? YES NO Are the connection cable type, continuity and connector connections normal? NO Expansion connector check Expansion cable check YES Are the CPU communication setting correct? NO Correct the setting Set the CPU DIP SW to the communication speed of the peripheral unitused YES Is there 5 V DC output when a 5 V DC power supply is required? NO Broken fuse ∗ Fuse replacement may not be performed by the user, so a replacement request must be submitted YES Replace the connection cable Please contact our service department. 13-16 Chapter 14 Operation Examples Chapter 14 Operation Examples To understand the basic operation of the MICRO-EH, this chapter explains samples of operations such as inputting simple programs and verifying operations. The following programming devices can be used: Peripheral unit name Form HL-PC3 H series ladder diagram HL-AT3E instruction language software LADDER EDITOR HLW-PC3 2 H series ladder diagram HLW-PC3E instruction language software LADDER EDITOR for Windows® version * Graphic input device (format: GPCL01H) can be used except on-direct mode. 1 (1) Operation verification procedures An operation is verified according to the following procedures: Start Start the LADDER EDITOR for Windows ® STEP 1 Perform initial settings STEP 2 Input program STEP 3 Check program errors STEP 4 Save program STEP 5 Transfer program to the CPU STEP 6 Monitor (verify the operation) STEP 7 End A personal computer and LADDER EDITOR for Windows® are used as the peripheral units in the example. For details, refer to the user's manual for each peripheral unit. (2) Detailed operation example The following explains an operation example using the module and sample program from step 1. CPU: 14-point type Slot 0: Bit point X48 Slot 1: Bit point Y32 Slot 2: 16 vacant points Input/output operating mode: Mode 0 (WRF070 = 0, default value) Operation of program Turn Y100 and Y 102 on and Y101 and Y103 off and vice versa, alternating at one second intervals. R7E3 (00001) R0 = 1 R0 TD0 TD1 TD0 Y100 = 1 Y101 = 0 Y102 = 1 Y103 = 0 TD0 TD0 14-1 (00003) TD1 Y100 = 0 Y101 = 1 Y102 = 0 Y103 = 1 (00002) . 1S 10 (00004) . 1S 10 (00005) Chapter 14 Operation Examples STEP 1. 1 Starting the LADDER EDITOR for Windows® Start the personal computer. Start the personal computer. 2. Start the LADDER EDITOR for Windows® system (GRS screen). From the Start menu of Windows®, click [Program] → [Hladder] → [Hladder]. As LADDER EDITOR for Windows® is started, the GRS screen is displayed. Startup 3. Switching to Offline mode. Click [Offline] in the Menu bar. GRS screen The Read/Edit screen is displayed. Mode switching 14-2 Chapter 14 Operation Examples STEP 2 Initialization Settings for the CPU type, memory type and I/O assignment are performed. 1. Setting the CPU type Click [Utility] → [Environment Settings] in the Menu bar. Pull-down menu The Environment Setting dialogue box is displayed. Specify the CPU type from the Ladder tag. • Click the W of the Offline CPU field to show the available CPU types in the pull-down display. Select the CPU type. • Click the [OK] button. Pull-down display of CPU types Specify the transmission speed from the Communication tag. • Select the transmission speed set with the DIP switches of the MICRO-EH main unit (in case of the 10-point type CPU, the transmission speed is fixed at 4800 bps). • Specify the communication port. • Click the [OK] button. Pull-down display of CPU types Select “H-302” for the CPU type setting. 14-3 Chapter 14 Operation Examples 2. Setting the memory type Click [Utility] → [CPU Setting] → [CPU Information] in the Menu bar. The CPU Information dialogue box is displayed. Pull-down menu • Click the Memory Cassette/Ladder Assign button and select the memory cassette size. • Click [Execute] or the [Memory/Execute] button. CPU Information dialogue box • Click the [OK] button in the confirmation dialogue box. Set the memory cassette size to RAM-04H. [Execute]: Save to the PC memory [Memory/Execute]: Save to the PC memory and Window registry. 3. Assigning I/O Click [Utility] → [CPU Setting] → [I/O Assign] in the Menu bar. Pull-down menu The I/O Assign List dialogue box is displayed. Click the W of the Types field and select [Standard] from the pull-down display. I/O Assign List dialogue box There are two setting methods for the subsequent procedures. • From the I/O Assign List • From the I/O Assign List → Slot Setting Status 14-4 Chapter 14 Operation Examples [Setting from the I/O Assign List] 1] Double-click the cell for the unit number and slot number to be set. The Assignment Setting dialogue box is displayed. The Assignment Setting dialogue box v 2] Click the W of the data and select I/O type from the pull-down display. 3] Click the [OK] button to close the Assignment Setting dialogue box. Setting of I/O type In the same way, repeat steps 1] to 3] to assign X48 and 16 vacant points to Slot 1 and 2 respectively. If a wrong value has been entered, the slot is left blank by assigning [Vacant 0] and is treated as though nothing is assigned to it. 4] Click the [Execute] button. The information assigned to the PC memory is written. 5] Click the [OK] button in the confirmation dialogue box to close the I/O Assignment List dialogue box. Confirmation dialogue box 14-5 Chapter 14 Operation Examples [Setting from the Slot Setting Status] Click the [Slot] button to display the Slot Setting Status dialogue box. 1] Click the W of the unit and select the unit number from the pull-down display. 2] Click the button of the slot number to be set. Slot Setting Status dialogue box 3] Click the W of the data and select the I/O type from the pull-down display. 4] Click the [OK] button and close the Assignment Setting dialogue box. Specification of I/O type In the same way, repeat the steps 1] and 2] to 4] to set other unit and slot numbers in order to perform I/O assignment according to the unit to be used. In this example, X48 and 16 vacant points are assigned to slots 1 and 2 respectively. 5] Click the [Close] button to close the Slot Setting Status dialogue box. Enter the I/O assignment set in the Slot Setting Status into the I/O Assignment List. 6] Click the [Execute] button to write the assigned information to the PC memory. 7] Click the [OK] button in the confirmation dialogue box to close the I/O Assignment List dialogue box. Confirmation dialogue box For online mode, it is possible to read the I/O mounted on the CPU by the “Mount” button. For details, refer to the “Reading Mounted I/O” of the programming device. 14-6 Chapter 14 Operation Examples STEP 1. 3 Program Input Input a program. At first, the output window displays “there is no program” in the bottom left of the Read/Edit screen. The cursor , which indicates the program input position, is placed at the top left of the screen. Read/Edit screen Output window [Input procedure of ladder program] Repeat steps 1] to 4] to proceed with symbol input. The usual operations found in other Windows applications, such as cut, copy, paste, and move, can be performed on already input symbols. 1] Specify the input position. (Move the cursor by clicking the mouse or the arrow keys.) 2] Click symbols in the Symbol bar. Symbol bar 3] Input the desired function (I/O, comparison expression, arithmetic expression) in the dialogue box for the symbol displayed. 4] Click the [OK] button in the dialogue box. [Example of entering a contact] 1] Begin from the cursor position at the top left. 2] Click the symbol for contact A. The dialogue box for contacts is displayed. Symbol selection 3] Enter “R7E3” as the I/O No. in the Input field. (I/O No. (half-width alpha-numeric input) can be entered by the keyboard only, or by selecting the initial letter(s) from the pull-down menu of W and by typing the rest.) Enter a proper comment. Contact property 4] Click the [OK] button. The dialogue closes. 14-7 Chapter 14 Operation Examples When the dialogue box closes, the symbol is displayed in the Read/Edit screen and the cursor shifts. Display of symbol The comment is displayed under the symbol. [Example of entering a Processing Box] 1] The specification of the input position can be omitted when entering symbols into the same circuit as the contact above. 2] Click the symbol for Processing Box. Symbol selection The cursor moves to the far-right portion of the screen automatically. The dialogue box for the processing box symbol is displayed. 3] Input arithmetic expressions in the Expression in Processing Box text field. Multiple lines (a maximum of 19) can be input by including line breaks Processing Box properties The comment for the I/O No. written to the Processing Box is displayed by clicking the Comment column. If there are no comments, only the I/O No. is displayed. Always enter a space before and after “=“. • The Comment Input dialogue box is displayed by double-clicking the I/O No. displayed in the Comment column. • Input a comment and click the [OK] button. Comment Input dialogue box 4] Click the [OK] button in the Processing Box. 14-8 Chapter 14 Operation Examples The input of the horizontal line symbol, which connects between symbols, may be omitted. (Symbols are connected by horizontal lines by the automatic wiring function at circuit write.) [Example of entering a timer] 1] Specify the input position, or omit the specification if entering it in the same circuit. 2] Click the symbol for coil. When the specification of the input position is omitted, the cursor automatically moves to the far-right portion of the screen. Symbol selection 3] Input I/O No., time base, and the first setting value. Coil property The following initials of various I/O numbers can be selected from the pull-down display of the Input field: R, L, M, Y, TD, SS, WDT, MS, TMR, CU, RCU, CTU, CTD, CL Input values in the necessary items, such as the time base, the first setting value, and second setting value, according to the I/O No. (Example) Coil It is only necessary to enter values in the Input and Comment items. 4] Click the [OK] button to display the symbol at the cursor at the far-right portion of the circuit. Symbols whose input positions for coils, arithmetic expressions, etc. are determined are automatically flushed to the right. Display of symbols After displaying the coil, the cursor moves to the top of the next circuit. [Example of entering a Comparison Box] 1] Specify the input position 2] Click the symbol for Comparison Box. Symbol selection 14-9 Chapter 14 Operation Examples 3] Input comparison expression and comment. 4] Click the [OK] button. Comparison Box property The comment input is valid only for I/O numbers. In this example, entering a comment for the value on the right side of the expression will not generate a comment. Always enter a space between an I/O number and comparison operator (in this case, between “WY10” and “= =“), as well as between a comparison operator and comparison data (“= =“ and “0”). [Example of entering a Knot] 1] Specify the input position. 2] Click the symbol for Knot. The symbol is displayed and the cursor moves to the right. Display of symbols [Example of entering a Vertical Line] 1] Specify the input position. 2] Click the symbol for Vertical Line. The symbol is displayed on the right side of the cursor. The cursor does not move. Display of symbol In case of the Horizontal Line symbol, the cursor does move to the right after displaying the symbol, in the same way as in the Knot symbol. 2. Writing to the program memory Perform a “circuit write” operation by either of the following methods in order to write the circuit to the program memory. 1] Click [Build] → [Circuit write] in the Menu bar. 2] Click the [circuit write] icon tool bar. in the Circuit write operation 14-10 Chapter 14 Operation Examples STEP 4 Checking Program Errors Check to see if the program in the memory is correct. Click [Utility] → [Check] in the Menu bar. The Check dialogue box is displayed. Pull-down menu • Click the [All items] or the individual check column to specify the items to be checked. • Click the [Execute] button. The Check Result dialogue box is displayed. Check dialogue box The checking of the CPU can be specified at online mode. • Click the [OK] button. The Check Result dialogue box closes. Check Result dialogue box (Note) For example, if the I/O assignment of bit Y32 is missing for unit 1, WY10 of the sample is treated as undefined; the error is displayed as in the figure to the right. If there are any errors, correct the errors of the program before check the program again. 14-11 Chapter 14 Operation Examples STEP 5 Saving the Program Save the program and comment that has been created to a floppy disk. Click [File] → [Record] in the Menu bar, the Record icon , or [File] → [Batch Record]. The dialogue for Record or Batch Record is displayed. Pull-down menu Record : Specify the file type and save. Batch Record: Saves a program and all the comment files. Record dialogue box: Specify the directory to save in, file name, and file type. Batch Record dialogue box: Specify the place to save and file name. Click the [Save] button to save. Record dialogue box File name extensions are not necessary to input. Record and Batch Record display the results of the save operations for one file and five files respectively. The figure to the left shows an example of a result display for the Batch Record. Batch Record Result dialogue box 14-12 Chapter 14 Operation Examples STEP 6 Program Transfer to CPU Write the program that has been input, to the CPU. However, verify the following: • The CPU and the personal computer connection cable are properly connected. • The CPU power is on. • CPU mode switch is set to “STOP.” 1. Switching to online mode. Move to the GRS screen from the offline mode. This can be done in two ways. 1] Click [File] → [GRS] in the Menu bar. 2] Click (lower button) on the upper right of the screen. GRS screen In the GRS screen, click the [Online] item in the Menu bar. The Read/Edit screen of the online mode is displayed. GRS screen Note: Verify again that the DIP switches are set to the transmission speed selected in the Environment Setting in step 2. (For the 10point type, it is fixed to 4800 bps.) 2. Initializing the CPU Click [Utility] → [Initialize] → [CPU initialize] in the Menu bar. Pull-down menu Note: Please note that programs etc. in the personal computer will be erased if [PC initialize] is selected. 14-13 Chapter 14 Operation Examples The Confirmation dialogue box is displayed; click the [Yes] button and start the CPU initialization. The Exit dialogue box is displayed; click the [OK] button to close the dialogue. 3. Transferring to the CPU Click [File] → [CPU write] in the Menu bar. Pull-down menu Program transfer CPU Read: PC (personal computer) ← CPU CPU Write: PC (personal computer) → CPU The CPU Write dialogue box is displayed. Click the [Execute] button. CPU write dialogue box When the writing is completed, the result is displayed. Click the [Close] button to close the dialogue box. Display of write result 14-14 Chapter 14 Operation Examples STEP 7 Monitoring (Verifying the Operation) Monitor the program execution status in the CPU. [Circuit monitor] Click [Mode] → [Monitor] in the Menu bar. Pull-down menu The Confirmation dialogue box for the program match check between PC and the CPU is displayed. Click the [Yes] button. Match check Set the CPU's RUN switch to “RUN” to begin the CPU operation. The on/off status of the contact, timer, and current counter value are displayed. Display of circuit monitor To monitor and display the current value and progress value, select comparison expression, arithmetic box, and coil (timer, counter, etc.) with the mouse arrow. [I/O monitor] The I/O monitor can be operated while in monitor mode. Click [Window] → [I/O Monitor] in the Menu bar. The I/O Monitor dialogue box is displayed. Pull-down menu The I/O Monitor dialogue box is displayed on the Read/Edit screen at its maximum size. 14-15 Chapter 14 Operation Examples The I/O monitor can be specified in the following two ways. 1] Click [Edit] → [I/O monitor setting] in the Menu bar. 2] Click the icon in the Symbol bar. I/O Monitor dialogue box • Enter the starting I/O No. • Click the number of points to be monitored. • Click on either the [Add], [Insert], or [Overwrite] buttons. I/O Monitor Setting dialogue box Monitor and display 16 points from Y100. I/O monitor The I/O monitor can display up to 64 I/O points (up to 64 including words/double-words). Click the I/O No. being I/O monitored and click [Edit] → [Delete] to delete it from the monitor. The display size of the I/O Monitor dialogue box can be changed by clicking . Both the circuit monitor in the Read/Edit screen and the I/O Monitor can be displayed by making their display sizes smaller to check the operation. Display of circuit and I/O monitor 14-16 Chapter 15 Daily and Periodic Inspection Chapter 15 Daily and Periodic Inspections In order to use the functions of the MICRO-EH in the optimal conditions and maintain the system to operate normally, it is essential to conduct daily and periodic inspections. (1) Daily inspection Verify the following items while the system is running. Table 15.1 Items for daily inspection LED Item Normal status Main cause of error display Unit LED display POW Lighting Power supply error, etc. *1 When not lit: RUN Lighting Microcomputer malfunction, memory error, etc. (in RUN When flashing: status) Syntax error, congestion error, etc. OK Lighting When not lit: Microcomputer malfunction, memory error, etc. When flashing: Battery error *2 *1: The MICRO-EH indicates the error contents using the combination of lit/flashing/not lit status of OK and RUN lamps. For details, see the error code list in Chapter 12. *2: If the power supply for the basic unit is left turned off without replacing the battery after the OK lamp was flashing, the memory contents may be destroyed. Exercise caution when the system power is turned off for a long period of time, since this error may not have been detected and the memory contents may have already been destroyed. (2) Periodic inspection Turn off the power for the external I/O circuit and check the following items once every six months. Part Table 15.2 Items for periodic inspection Item Check criteria Programming device to CPU Check operation of programming device Power supply I/O module Check for voltage fluctuations Output relay life LED External power voltage Battery (Lithium battery) Check voltage and life Installation and connecting areas (1) All modules are securely fixed (2) All connectors fit snugly (3) All screws are tightened (4) Damage and deterioration of each cable (1) Temperature (2) Humidity (3) Other Check number of parts, storage condition Check program contents Ambient environment Spare parts Program (3) Remarks Must be able to be connected online. All switches and display lamps work normally. 85 to 264 V AC Tester Electrical life 200,000 times See the relay contact life Mechanical life 20 million times curve (Chapter 10). Turns on/off correctly Within the specification for each I/O See the I/O specifications (Chapter 6). Is the OK lamp flashing? Check to see if it has been less than 2 months since the last exchange. There should be no problem. Tighten Check insertion Tighten Visual check 0 to 55 °C 5 to 95 % RH (no condensation) No dust, foreign matter, vibration There should be no problem. Compare the contents of the latest program saved and CPU contents, and make sure they match. - Check both master and backup. Life of the power module Numbers of electrolytic condensers are used in the power module. Electrolytic condensers have a lifetime and it is believed that the life is reduced by half when the ambient temperature rises 10 °C. When stocking spare parts, the standard for consideration is that the power module has a life of approximately five years when used at the rated ambient temperature (30 °C). Also, to extend the life of the module, consider the air circulation around the module and ambient temperature when installing it. 15-1 Chapter 15 Daily and Periodic Inspection (4) Life of the battery • The battery life time is shown below. Battery life time (total power off time) [Hr] * Guaranteed value (Min.) @55°C Actual value (Max.) @25°C 9,000 18,000 * Battery life time has been changed since Oct. 2002 production (MFG NO.02Jxx) due to hardware modification. • • R7D9 The battery life can be determined by checking for the flashing of the OK lamp. The battery life time flag is in the bit special internal output “R7D9.” An example of a circuit using “R7D9” is shown below. Y00100 The battery error can be output to external output Y00100 by using Y00100 the ladder shown to the left. * R7EE is a bit to enable battery error detection. Be sure to set R7EE if battery is used. Figure 15.1 Battery error detection circuit • • • (5) The self-diagnostic error code “71” indicates that the battery is not loaded or that it has reached its life. Exchange the battery every two years even if it is still functional. Use the battery within one year after purchase. How to replace the battery Blue Red - Connector on battery side + Figure 15.2 Replacing battery 1] 2] 3] 4] Prepare a new battery (EH-MBAT). Replace the battery while the power supply to the basic base is turned on. Remove the old lithium battery from the battery case. Insert the new battery and connect the cable to the CPU module. Insert it so that the red lead is , and the black lead is . 5] Fold the excess lead and store it in the lead storage space. (If excess lead is not stored properly, the wire may get caught on the front cover and be severed.) * When exchanging while the basic unit power turned off, perform steps 4], 5] and 6], in less than 30 minute. Caution on handling the battery Be careful when replacing the battery, since incorrect replacement may cause the battery to explode. Use EH-MBAT for new batteries. Batteries that have been replaced should be individually placed in a suitable plastic bag (to prevent shorting) and a disposal company should be requested to dispose of them. At this time, do not short the batteries, throw them in a fire, dismantle them, exert external force, expose them to water, charge them or cut the lead wires since doing so leads to the risk that the batteries will ignite, explode or burn up. 15-2 Appendix 1 H-series Instruction Support Comparison Chart Appendix 1 H-Series Instruction Support Comparison Chart [Basic instructions and sequence instructions] No. Instruction format Instruction name MICRO- EH-150 EH H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 Start logical operation { { { { { { { { { LDI Start logical NOT operation { { { { { { { { { AND Logical AND { { { { { { { { { 4 ANI Logical AND not { { { { { { { { { 5 OR Logical OR { { { { { { { { { 1 LD 2 3 6 ORI Logical OR not { { { { { { { { { 7 NOT Logical NOT { { { { { { { { { 8 AND DIF Detect rising edge { { { { { { { { { 9 OR DIF Detect rising edge { { { { { { { { { 10 AND DFN Detect falling edge { { { { { { { { { 11 OR DFN Detect falling edge { { { { { { { { { 12 OUT Output I/O { { { { { { { { { 13 SET Set I/O { { { { { { { { { 14 RES Reset I/O { { { { { { { { { 15 MCS Start master control { { { { { { { { { 16 MCR Cancel master control { { { { { { { { { 17 MPS Push operation result { { { { { { { { { 18 MRD Read operation result { { { { { { { { { 19 MPP Pull operation result { { { { { { { { { 20 ANB Connect logical block in serial { { { { { { { { { 21 ORB Connect logical block in parallel { { { { { { { { { 22 [ ] Start and end processing box { { { { { { { { { 23 ( ) Start and end relational box { { { { { { { { { H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 [Basic instructions and timers/counters] No. Instruction format Instruction name MICRO- EH-150 EH H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 1 OUT TD On-delay timer { { { { { { { { { 2 OUT SS Single shot { { { { { { { { { 3 OUT MS Mono stable timer × { × × { { { { { 4 OUT TMR Integral timer × { × × { { { { { 5 OUT WDT Watchdog timer × { × × { { { { { 6 OUT CU Counter { { { { { { { { { 7 OUT RCU Ring counter × { × × { { { { { 8 OUT CTU Up-down counter up { { { { { { { { { 9 OUT CTD Up-down counter down { { { { { { { { { 10 OUT CL Clear counter { { { { { { { { { A-1 Appendix 1 H-series Instruction Support Comparison Chart [Basic instructions and comparison boxes] No. Instruction format Instruction name MICRO- EH-150 EH H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 1 LD (s1 == s2) = comparison box { { { { { { { { { 2 AND (s1 == s2) = comparison box { { { { { { { { { 3 OR (s1 == s2) = comparison box { { { { { { { { { 4 LD (s1 S== s2) Signed = comparison box { { × × { { { { { 5 AND (s1 S== s2) Signed = comparison box { { × × { { { { { 6 OR (s1 S== s2) Signed = comparison box { { × × { { { { { 7 LD (s1 < > s2) < > comparison box { { { { { { { { { 8 AND (s1 < > s2) < > comparison box { { { { { { { { { 9 OR (s1 < > s2) < > comparison box { { { { { { { { { 10 LD (s1 S< > s2) Signed < > comparison box { { × × { { { { { 11 AND (s1 S< > s2) Signed < > comparison box { { × × { { { { { 12 OR (s1 S< > s2) Signed < > comparison box { { × × { { { { { 13 LD (s1 < s2) < comparison box { { { { { { { { { 14 AND (s1 < s2) < comparison box { { { { { { { { { 15 OR (s1 < s2) < comparison box { { { { { { { { { 16 LD (s1 S< s2) Signed < comparison box { { × × { { { { { 17 AND (s1 S< s2) Signed < comparison box { { × × { { { { { 18 OR (s1 S< s2) Signed < comparison box { { × × { { { { { 19 LD (s1 <= s2) <= comparison box { { { { { { { { { 20 AND (s1 <= s2) <= comparison box { { { { { { { { { 21 OR (s1 <= s2) <= comparison box { { { { { { { { { 22 LD (s1 S<= s2) Signed <= comparison box { { × × { { { { { 23 AND (s1 S<= s2) Signed <= comparison box { { × × { { { { { 24 OR (s1 S<= s2) Signed <= comparison box { { × × { { { { { A-2 Appendix 1 H-series Instruction Support Comparison Chart [Arithmetic instructions] No. Instruction format Instruction name MICRO- EH-150 EH H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 1 d=s Assignment statement { { { { { { { { { 2 d = s1 + s2 Binary addition { { { { { { { { { 3 d = s1 B+ s2 BCD addition { { { { { { { { { 4 d = s1 – s2 Binary subtraction { { { { { { { { { 5 d = s1 B– s2 BCD subtraction { { { { { { { { { 6 d = s1 × s2 Binary multiplication { { { { { { { { { 7 d = s1 B× s2 BCD multiplication { { { { { { { { { 8 d = s1 S× s2 Signed binary multiplication { { × × { { { { { 9 d = s1 / s2 Binary division { { { { { { { { { 10 d = s1 B/ s2 BCD division { { { { { { { { { 11 d = s1 S/ s2 Signed binary division { { × × { { { { { 12 d = s1 OR s2 Logical OR { { { { { { { { { 13 d = s1 AND s2 Logical AND { { { { { { { { { 14 d = s1 XOR s2 Exclusive OR { { { { { { { { { 15 d = s1 == s2 = comparison expression { { { { { { { { { 16 d = s1 S== s2 Signed = comparison expression { { × × { { { { { 17 d = s1 < > s2 ≠ comparison expression { { { { { { { { { 18 d = s1 S< > s2 Signed ≠ comparison expression { { × × { { { { { 19 d = s1 < s2 < comparison expression { { { { { { { { { 20 d = s1 S< s2 Signed < comparison expression { { × × { { { { { 21 d = s1 <= s2 ≤ comparison expression { { { { { { { { { 22 d = s1 S<= s2 Signed ≤ comparison expression { { × × { { { { { H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 [Application instructions] (1/2) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Instruction format BSET (d, n) BRES (d, n) BTS (d, n) SHR (d, n) SHL (d, n) ROR (d, n) ROL (d, n) LSR (d, n) LSL (d, n) BSR (d, n) Instruction name MICRO- EH-150 EH H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 Bit set Bit reset Bit test Shift right Shift left Rotate right Rotate left Logical shift right Logical shift left BCD shift right { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { 11 BSL (d, n) BCD shift left { { { { { { { { { 12 13 14 15 16 17 WSHR (d, n) WSHL (d, n) WBSR (d, n) WBSL (d, n) MOV (d, s, n) COPY (d, s, n) Batch shift right Batch shift left Batch BCD shift right Batch BCD shift left Block transfer Copy × × × × { { { { { { { { × × × × × × × × × × × × { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { A-3 Appendix 1 H-series Instruction Support Comparison Chart [Application instructions] (2/2) No. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Instruction format XCG (d, d2, n) NOT (d) NEG (d) ABS (d, s) SGET (d, s) EXT (d, s) BCD (d, s) BIN (d, s) DECO (d, s, n) ENCO (d, s, n) SEG (d, s) SQR (d, s) BCU (d, s) SWAP (d) FIFIT (P, n) FIFWR (P, s) FIFRD (P, d) UNIT (d, s, n) DIST (d, s, n) ADRIO (d, s) Instruction name Block exchange Reverse Two's complement Absolute value Sign addition Sign expansion Binary → BCD conversion BCD → Binary conversion Decode Encode 7 segment decode Square root Bit count Swap Initialize FIFO Write FIFO Read FIFO Unit Distribute Convert I/O address MICRO- EH-150 EH { { { { × × { { { { × × { { × × × { { × { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 × { { { × { { { × × { { { { × × { { { { × × { { × × { { × × × { { × × × { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { × × × { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { [Control instructions] No. Instruction format Instruction name MICRO- EH-150 EH H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 End normal scan { { { { { { { { { CEND (s) End scan condition { { { { { { { { { JMP n Unconditional jump { { { { { { { { { 4 CJMP n (s) Conditional jump { { { { { { { { { 5 RSRV n Reserve × × × × × × { { { 1 END 2 3 6 FREE Free reserve × × × × × × { { { 7 LBL n Label { { { { { { { { { 8 FOR n (s) For { { × × { { { { { 9 NEXT n Next { { × × { { { { { 10 CAL n Call subroutine { { { { { { { { { 11 SB n Start subroutine program { { { { { { { { { 12 RTS Return subroutine { { { { { { { { { 13 START n Start basic task × × × × × × { { { 14 INT n Start interrupt scan program { { { { { { { { { 15 RTI Return interrupt { { { { { { { { { A-4 Appendix 1 H-series Instruction Support Comparison Chart [High-function module transfer instructions] No. Instruction format 1 TRNS 0 (d, s, t) 2 RECV 0 (d, s, t) 3 TRNS 1 (d, s, t) 4 QTRNS1 (d, s, t) 5 TRNS 2 (d, s, t) 6 QTRNS2 (d, s, t) 7 TRNS 3 (d, s, t) 8 QTRNS3 (d, s, t) 9 RECV 3 (d, s, t) 10 TRNS 4 (d, s, t) 11 QTRNS 4 (d, s, t) 12 TRNS 5 (d, s, t) 13 TRNS 6 (d, s, t) Instruction name General-purpose port transmission instruction General-purpose port reception instruction Data transmission/reception instruction for SIO, CLOCK High-speed data transmission/reception instruction for SIO, CLOCK Data transmission/reception instruction for ASCII High-speed data transmission/reception instruction for ASCII Data transmission instruction for POSIT-H High-speed data transmission instruction for POSIT-H Data reception instruction for POSITH Data transmission/reception instruction for POSIT-2H, POSITA2H High-speed data transmission/reception instruction for POSIT-2H, POSITA2H Data transmission/reception instruction for XCU-001H Data transmission/reception instruction for XCU-232H MICRO- EH-150 EH H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 {* { × × × × × { { {* { × × × × × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × × × { { × × × × × × × { { × × × × × × × { { × × × × × × × { { × × × × × × × { { × × × × × × × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × × × { { × × × × × × × { { × × × × × × × { { H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 * Supported by software version 1.30 (WRF051=H0130) or newer. [FUN instructions] (1/5) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Instruction format FUN 0 (s) (PIDIT (s)) FUN 1 (s) (PIDOP (s)) FUN 2 (s) (PIDCL (s)) FUN 4 (s) (IFR (s)) FUN 5 (s) FUN 10 (s) (SIN (s)) FUN 11 (s) (COS (s)) FUN 12 (s) (TAN (s)) FUN 13 (s) (ASIN (s)) FUN 14 (s) (ACOS (s)) FUN 15 (s) (ATAN (s)) FUN 20 (s) (DSRCH (s)) FUN 21 (s) (TSRCH (s)) FUN 30 (s) (BINDA (s)) FUN 31 (s) (DBINDA (s)) Instruction name MICRO- EH-150 EH H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 PID operation initialization × { × × × { × { { PID operation execution control × { × × × { × { { PID operation execution × { × × × { × { { Process stepping × { × × × × × × { General purpose port switching SIN function calculation { × × { × × × × × × × { × × × { × { COS function calculation × { × × × { × { { TAN function calculation × { × × × { × { { ARC SIN function calculation × { × × × { × { { ARC COS function calculation × { × × × { × { { ARC TAN function calculation × { × × × { × { { Data search × × × × × { × { { Table search × × × × × { × { { Binary → decimal ASCII conversion (16 bits) Binary → decimal ASCII conversion (32 bits) × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { A-5 Appendix 1 H-series Instruction Support Comparison Chart [FUN instructions] (2/5) No. 16 Instruction format 39 40 FUN 32 (s) (BINHA (s)) FUN 33 (s) (DBINHA (s)) FUN 34 (s) (BCDDA (s)) FUN 35 (s) (DBCDDA (s)) FUN 36 (s) (DABIN (s)) FUN 37 (s) (DDABIN (s)) FUN 38 (s) (HABIN (s)) FUN 39 (s) (DHABIN (s)) FUN 40 (s) (DABCD (s)) FUN 41 (s) (DDABCD (s)) FUN 42 (s) (ASC (s)) FUN 43 (s) (HEX (s)) FUN 44 (s) (ASDD (s)) FUN 45 (s) (SCMP (s)) FUN 46 (s) (WTOB (s)) FUN 47 (s) (WTOW (s)) FUN 48 (s) (BSHR (s)) FUN 49 (s) (BSHL (s)) FUN 50 (s) (TRSET (s)) FUN 51 (s) (TRACE (s)) FUN 52 (s) (TRRES (s)) FUN 60 (s) (BSQR (s)) FUN 61 (s) (PGEN (s)) FUN 70 (s) FUN 71 (s) 41 FUN 72 (s) 42 43 44 FUN 73 (s) FUN 74 (s) FUN 80 (s) (ALREF (s)) 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Instruction name Binary → hexadecimal ASCII conversion (16 bits) Binary → hexadecimal ASCII conversion (32 bits) BCD → decimal ASCII conversion (16 bits) BCD → decimal ASCII conversion (32 bits) Unsigned 5 digit Decimal ASCII → binary conversion Signed 10 digit Decimal ASCII → binary conversion 4-digit hexadecimal ASCII → binary conversion 8-digit hexadecimal ASCII → binary conversion 4-digit decimal ASCII → BCD conversion 8-digit decimal ASCII → BCD conversion Hexadecimal binary → ASCII conversion (digit designation) Hexadecimal ASCII → binary conversion (digit designation) Unit character strings MICRO- EH-150 EH H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { × × × × × { × { { Compare character strings × × × × × { × { { Word → byte conversion × × × × × { × { { Byte → word conversion × × × × × { × { { Shift byte unit to right × × × × × { × { { Shift byte unit to left × × × × × { × { { Set sampling trace × × × × × { × { { Execute sampling trace × × × × × { × { { Reset sampling trace × × × × × { × { { Binary square root × × × × × { × { { Dynamic scan pulse × × × × × { × { { Set high-speed counter mode Read high-speed counter progress value Write high-speed counter progress value Read high-speed counter set value Write high-speed counter set value Refresh I/O (all points) × × × × { { × × × × × × × × × × × × × × { × × × × × × × × { × × { { { × × × × × × × × × { × × × × × × × × { A-6 Appendix 1 H-series Instruction Support Comparison Chart [FUN instructions] (3/5) No. 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Instruction format FUN 81 (s) (IORREF (s)) FUN 82 (s) (SLREL (s)) FUN 90 (ETDIT) FUN 91 (ETD) FUN 92 (ECUIT) FUN 93 (ECU) FUN 94 (ECTU) FUN 95 (ECTD) FUN 96 (ECL) FUN 97 (WNRED) FUN 98 (WNWRT) FUN 100 (INT) 57 FUN 101 (INTD) 58 FUN 102 (FLOAT) 59 FUN 103 (FLOATD) 60 FUN 104 (FADD) FUN 105 (FSUB) FUN 106 (FMUL) FUN 107 (FDIV) FUN 108 (FRAD) FUN 109 (FDEG) FUN 110 (FSIN) FUN 111 (FCOS) FUN 112 (FTAN) FUN 113 (FASIN) FUN 114 (FACOS) 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 Instruction name MICRO- EH-150 EH H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 Refresh I/O (input/output designation) Refresh I/O refresh (any slot) { { × × × { × × { { { × × × { × × { Expansion timer initial setting × × × × × × × × { Expansion timer execution × × × × × × × × { Expansion counter/up-down counter initial setting Expansion counter execution × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × Expansion up-down counter up execution Expansion up-down counter down execution Clear expansion counter × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × Read expansion link area × × × × × × × × { Write expansion link area × × × × × × × × { Floating decimal point operation (real number → integer (word ) conversion) Floating decimal point operation (real number → integer (double word) conversion) Floating decimal point operation (integer (word) → real number conversion) Floating decimal point operation (integer (double word) → real number conversion) Floating decimal point operation (addition) Floating decimal point operation (subtraction) Floating decimal point operation (multiplication) Floating decimal point operation (division) Floating decimal point operation (angle → radian conversion) Floating decimal point operation (radian → angle conversion) Floating decimal point operation (SIN) Floating decimal point operation (COS) Floating decimal point operation (TAN) Floating decimal point operation (ARC SIN) Floating decimal point operation (ARC COS) × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { A-7 Appendix 1 H-series Instruction Support Comparison Chart [FUN instructions] (4/5) No. 71 Instruction format 91 92 FUN 115 (FATAN) FUN 116 (FSQR) FUN 117 (FEXP) FUN 118 (FLOG) FUN 120 (INDXD) FUN 121 (INDXS) FUN 122 (INDXC) FUN 123 (INC) FUN 124 (INCD) FUN 125 (DEC) FUN 126 (DECD) FUN 127 (BITTOW) FUN 128 (WTOBIT) FUN 130 (FBINI) FUN 131 (FBMOV) FUN 132 (FBCHG) FUN 133 (FWRED) FUN 134 (FWWRT) FUN 135 (FRED) FUN 136 (FWRT) FUN 140 (s) FUN 141 (s) 93 94 FUN 142 (s) FUN 143 (s) 95 FUN 144 (s) 96 FUN 145 (s) 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 Instruction name MICRO- EH-150 EH H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 Floating decimal point operation (ARC TAN) Floating decimal point operation (square root) Floating decimal point operation (exponent) Floating decimal point operation (natural logarithm) Index setting (argument d) × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × { × × × × × × { × × × × × × × × { Index setting (argument s) × × × × × × × × { Cancel index × × × × × × × × { Increment (INC) × × × × × × × × { Double word increment (DINC) × × × × × × × × { Decrement (DEC) × × × × × × × × { Double word decrement (DECD) × × × × × × × × { Expand bit data to word data × × × × × × × × { Expand word data to bit data × × × × × × × × { Set file memory block × × × × × × × × { Transfer file memory block × × × × × × × × { Exchange file memory block × × × × × × × × { Read file memory word unit × × × × × × × × { Write file memory word unit × × × × × × × × { Read file memory byte unit × × × × × × × × { Write file memory byte unit × × × × × × × × { High-speed counter operation control High-speed counter coincident output control High-speed counter up/down control Rewrite current high-speed counter value Read current high-speed counter value Clear current high-speed counter value { { × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × { { × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × { × × × × × × × × { × × × × × × × × A-8 Appendix 1 H-series Instruction Support Comparison Chart [FUN instructions] (5/5) No. Instruction format 97 98 99 100 101 FUN 146 (s) FUN 147 (s) FUN 148 (s) FUN 149 (s) FUN 150 (s) 102 FUN 151 (s) 103 FUN 210 (s) (LOGIT (s)) FUN 211 (s) (LOGWRT (s)) FUN 212 (s) (LOGCLR (s)) FUN 213 (s) (LOGRED (s)) FUN 254 (s) (BOXC (s)) FUN 255 (s) (MEMC (s)) 104 105 106 107 108 Instruction name MICRO- EH-150 EH H-64 ~ H-20 H-200 H-250 H-252 H-2000 H-2002 H-4010 H-700 H-1002 H-300 H-702 H-302 Preset high-speed counter PWM operation control Change PWM frequency on-duty Pulse output control Change number of pulse frequency output setting Pulse output with acceleration/deceleration Initial setting for data logging { { { { { × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × { × × × × × × × × × { × × × × × × × Write log data × { × × × × × × × Clear log data × { × × × × × × × Read log data × { × × × × × × × BOX comment { { { { { { { { { Memo comment { { { { { { { { { Supported command for EH-150 depends on CPU types. Please read EH-150 application manual for further information. A-9 Appendix 2 Standards Appendix 2 Standards MICRO-EH products are global products designed and manufactured for use throughout the world. They should be installed and used in conformance with product-specific guidelines as well as the following agency approvals and standards. Item Industrial Control Equipment[Safety] Hazardous Locations[Safety] Class I, Div II, A,B,C,D European EMC Directive European Low Voltage Directive Australia C-tick mark UL 508 CSA C22.2 no 142-M1987 UL 1604 CSA C22.2 No142-M1987 IEC 61131-2 (2003) IEC 61131-2 (1994) AS/AZN CISPR11 (2002) Standards Certification by Underwriters Laboratories for selected modules Certification by Underwriters Laboratories for selected modules Emission, Immunity Warning: Explosion hazard – substitution of componets may impair suitability for class I, division 2" Do not replace modules unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous. Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous. A-11
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : Yes Page Count : 319 Page Mode : UseOutlines Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6 About : uuid:87a461b7-40c4-43dd-89dc-e6a8b3499c3c Producer : Acrobat Distiller 3.0 for Windows Create Date : 2000:08:24 13:08:41Z Modify Date : 2005:05:17 12:14:52-03:00 Metadata Date : 2005:05:17 12:14:52-03:00 Document ID : uuid:e6a55084-56c7-49af-8236-eeecf336633e Format : application/pdf Title : HIDIC MICRO-EH APPLICATION MANUAL Description : NJI-350(X) Creator : HITACHI,Ltd. Author : HITACHI,Ltd. Subject : NJI-350(X)EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools